You are on page 1of 910

Relion 670 series

Bay control REC670 Technical reference manual

Document ID: 1MRK 511 227-UEN Issued: December 2012 Revision: C Product version: 1.2

Copyright 2012 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor used for any unauthorized purpose. The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
ABB AB Substation Automation Products SE-721 59 Vsters Sweden Telephone: +46 (0) 21 32 50 00 Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18 http://www.abb.com/substationautomation

Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/ or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks. This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.

Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.

Table of contents

Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................27
Introduction to the technical reference manual.................................27 About the complete set of manuals for an IED............................27 About the technical reference manual.........................................28 This manual.................................................................................29 Introduction.............................................................................29 Principle of operation..............................................................29 Input and output signals.........................................................32 Function block........................................................................32 Setting parameters.................................................................32 Technical data........................................................................33 Intended audience.......................................................................33 Related documents......................................................................33 Revision notes.............................................................................34

Section 2

Analog inputs..................................................................35
Introduction.......................................................................................35 Operation principle...........................................................................35 Function block..................................................................................36 Setting parameters...........................................................................37

Section 3

Local HMI.......................................................................43
Human machine interface ................................................................43 Small size HMI..................................................................................45 Small............................................................................................45 Design.........................................................................................45 Medium size graphic HMI.................................................................47 Medium........................................................................................47 Design.........................................................................................47 Keypad.............................................................................................49 LED...................................................................................................50 Introduction..................................................................................50 Status indication LEDs................................................................50 Indication LEDs...........................................................................50 Local HMI related functions..............................................................51 Introduction..................................................................................51 General setting parameters.........................................................52 Status LEDs.................................................................................52 Design....................................................................................52 Function block........................................................................52
1

Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Input and output signals.........................................................52 Indication LEDs...........................................................................53 Introduction.............................................................................53 Design....................................................................................53 Function block........................................................................60 Input and output signals.........................................................60 Setting parameters.................................................................60

Section 4

Basic IED functions........................................................63


Authorization.....................................................................................63 Principle of operation...................................................................63 Authorization handling in the IED...........................................64 Self supervision with internal event list.............................................65 Introduction..................................................................................65 Principle of operation...................................................................65 Internal signals.......................................................................67 Run-time model......................................................................69 Function block.............................................................................70 Output signals..............................................................................70 Setting parameters......................................................................70 Technical data.............................................................................71 Time synchronization........................................................................71 Introduction..................................................................................71 Principle of operation...................................................................71 General concepts...................................................................71 Real-time clock (RTC) operation............................................74 Synchronization alternatives..................................................75 Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization.....................78 Function block.............................................................................79 Output signals..............................................................................79 Setting parameters......................................................................79 Technical data.............................................................................82 Parameter setting groups.................................................................82 Introduction..................................................................................82 Principle of operation...................................................................82 Function block.............................................................................84 Input and output signals..............................................................84 Setting parameters......................................................................85 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK.....................................................85 Introduction..................................................................................85 Principle of operation...................................................................85 Function block.............................................................................86 Input and output signals..............................................................86 Setting parameters......................................................................86

2 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Test mode functionality TEST..........................................................86 Introduction..................................................................................86 Principle of operation...................................................................87 Function block.............................................................................88 Input and output signals..............................................................89 Setting parameters......................................................................89 IED identifiers...................................................................................89 Introduction..................................................................................89 Setting parameters......................................................................90 Product information..........................................................................90 Introduction..................................................................................90 Setting parameters......................................................................90 Factory defined settings..............................................................90 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI................................................91 Introduction..................................................................................91 Principle of operation...................................................................91 Function block.............................................................................92 Input and output signals..............................................................92 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ...........................................93 Introduction..................................................................................93 Principle of operation...................................................................93 Function block.............................................................................93 Input and output signals..............................................................94 Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI....................................................94 Introduction..................................................................................94 Principle of operation...................................................................94 Function block.............................................................................95 Input and output signals..............................................................95 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI...............................................95 Introduction..................................................................................95 Principle of operation...................................................................96 Frequency values........................................................................96 Function block.............................................................................97 Input and output signals..............................................................98 Setting parameters......................................................................99 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM..............................................100 Introduction................................................................................101 Principle of operation.................................................................101 Function block...........................................................................101 Input and output signals............................................................101 Setting parameters....................................................................102 Authority status ATHSTAT.............................................................102 Introduction................................................................................102
3 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Principle of operation.................................................................102 Function block...........................................................................103 Output signals............................................................................103 Setting parameters....................................................................103 Denial of service DOS....................................................................103 Introduction................................................................................103 Principle of operation.................................................................103 Function blocks..........................................................................104 Signals.......................................................................................104 Settings......................................................................................105

Section 5

Differential protection...................................................107
1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF .....................107 Identification..............................................................................107 Introduction................................................................................107 Principle of operation.................................................................107 Logic diagram.......................................................................108 Function block...........................................................................108 Input and output signals............................................................108 Setting parameters....................................................................109 Technical data...........................................................................109

Section 6

Current protection.........................................................111
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output PHPIOC .........................................................................................111 Introduction................................................................................111 Principle of operation.................................................................111 Function block...........................................................................112 Input and output signals............................................................112 Setting parameters....................................................................112 Technical data...........................................................................113 Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC ......................113 Introduction................................................................................113 Principle of operation.................................................................114 Function block...........................................................................119 Input and output signals............................................................119 Setting parameters....................................................................121 Technical data...........................................................................126 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC ................127 Introduction................................................................................127 Principle of operation.................................................................127 Function block...........................................................................128 Input and output signals............................................................128 Setting parameters....................................................................128

4 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Technical data...........................................................................129 Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero, negative sequence direction EF4PTOC .......................................................129 Introduction................................................................................129 Principle of operation.................................................................130 Operating quantity within the function..................................130 Internal polarizing.................................................................131 External polarizing for earth-fault function............................133 Base quantities within the protection....................................133 Internal earth-fault protection structure................................134 Four residual overcurrent steps............................................134 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function............................................135 Second harmonic blocking element.....................................137 Switch on to fault feature......................................................139 Function block...........................................................................141 Input and output signals............................................................142 Setting parameters....................................................................143 Technical data...........................................................................148 Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC .....................................................................148 Introduction................................................................................149 Principle of operation.................................................................149 Operating quantity within the function..................................149 Internal polarizing facility of the function..............................150 External polarizing for negative sequence function..............151 Base quantities within the function.......................................151 Internal negative sequence protection structure..................152 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages........................152 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function............................................153 Function block...........................................................................156 Input and output signals............................................................156 Setting parameters....................................................................157 Technical data...........................................................................162 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE .....................................................................................162 Introduction................................................................................162 Principle of operation.................................................................164 Function inputs.....................................................................164 Function block...........................................................................170 Input and output signals............................................................171 Setting parameters....................................................................172 Technical data...........................................................................174
5 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Thermal overload protection, one time constant LPTTR................175 Introduction................................................................................175 Principle of operation.................................................................175 Function block...........................................................................178 Input and output signals............................................................179 Setting parameters....................................................................179 Technical data...........................................................................180 Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR ...........180 Introduction................................................................................180 Principle of operation.................................................................181 Function block...........................................................................185 Input and output signals............................................................185 Setting parameters....................................................................185 Technical data...........................................................................187 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF ..............................................187 Introduction................................................................................187 Principle of operation.................................................................188 Function block...........................................................................190 Input and output signals............................................................191 Setting parameters....................................................................191 Technical data...........................................................................192 Stub protection STBPTOC ............................................................193 Introduction................................................................................193 Principle of operation.................................................................193 Function block...........................................................................194 Input and output signals............................................................194 Setting parameters....................................................................195 Technical data...........................................................................195 Pole discordance protection CCRPLD ..........................................195 Introduction................................................................................196 Principle of operation.................................................................196 Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker...................199 Unsymmetrical current detection..........................................199 Function block...........................................................................199 Input and output signals............................................................200 Setting parameters....................................................................200 Technical data...........................................................................201 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP...............................201 Introduction................................................................................201 Principle of operation.................................................................202 Low pass filtering..................................................................204 Calibration of analog inputs..................................................204 Function block...........................................................................205
6 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Input and output signals............................................................206 Setting parameters....................................................................206 Technical data...........................................................................207 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP ................................208 Introduction................................................................................208 Principle of operation.................................................................209 Low pass filtering..................................................................211 Calibration of analog inputs..................................................211 Function block...........................................................................212 Input and output signals............................................................213 Setting parameters....................................................................213 Technical data...........................................................................215 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC .............................................215 Introduction................................................................................215 Principle of operation.................................................................215 Function block...........................................................................217 Input and output signals............................................................217 Setting parameters....................................................................217 Technical data...........................................................................218 Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC............................................218 Introduction................................................................................218 Principle of operation.................................................................218 Measured quantities.............................................................218 Reconnection inhibit feature.................................................221 Overcurrent feature..............................................................222 Undercurrent feature............................................................223 Capacitor harmonic overload feature...................................223 Capacitor reactive power overload feature...........................225 Function block...........................................................................226 Input and output signals............................................................227 Setting parameters....................................................................228 Technical data...........................................................................229

Section 7

Voltage protection........................................................231
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV ................................231 Introduction................................................................................231 Principle of operation.................................................................231 Measurement principle.........................................................232 Time delay............................................................................232 Blocking................................................................................238 Design..................................................................................239 Function block...........................................................................241 Input and output signals............................................................241 Setting parameters....................................................................242
7

Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Technical data...........................................................................244 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV ..................................245 Introduction................................................................................245 Principle of operation.................................................................245 Measurement principle.........................................................246 Time delay............................................................................246 Blocking................................................................................252 Design..................................................................................252 Function block...........................................................................254 Input and output signals............................................................254 Setting parameters....................................................................255 Technical data...........................................................................257 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV .................257 Introduction................................................................................258 Principle of operation.................................................................258 Measurement principle.........................................................258 Time delay............................................................................258 Blocking................................................................................264 Design..................................................................................264 Function block...........................................................................265 Input and output signals............................................................266 Setting parameters....................................................................266 Technical data...........................................................................268 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV ......................................268 Introduction................................................................................268 Principle of operation.................................................................269 Function block...........................................................................270 Input and output signals............................................................271 Setting parameters....................................................................271 Technical data...........................................................................272 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV ..................................................272 Introduction................................................................................272 Principle of operation.................................................................272 Function block...........................................................................274 Input and output signals............................................................275 Setting parameters....................................................................275 Technical data...........................................................................275

Section 8

Frequency protection....................................................277
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF .............................................277 Introduction................................................................................277 Principle of operation.................................................................277 Measurement principle.........................................................278 Time delay............................................................................278

8 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Voltage dependent time delay..............................................278 Blocking................................................................................280 Design..................................................................................280 Function block...........................................................................281 Input and output signals............................................................281 Setting parameters....................................................................281 Technical data...........................................................................282 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF ...............................................282 Introduction................................................................................283 Principle of operation.................................................................283 Measurement principle.........................................................283 Time delay............................................................................283 Blocking................................................................................284 Design..................................................................................284 Function block...........................................................................285 Input and output signals............................................................285 Setting parameters....................................................................285 Technical data...........................................................................286 Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC .............................286 Introduction................................................................................286 Principle of operation.................................................................286 Measurement principle.........................................................287 Time delay............................................................................287 Blocking................................................................................287 Design..................................................................................288 Function block...........................................................................289 Input and output signals............................................................289 Setting parameters....................................................................289 Technical data...........................................................................290

Section 9

Multipurpose protection................................................291
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC..........................291 Introduction................................................................................291 Principle of operation.................................................................291 Measured quantities within CVGAPC...................................291 Base quantities for CVGAPC function..................................294 Built-in overcurrent protection steps.....................................294 Built-in undercurrent protection steps...................................299 Built-in overvoltage protection steps....................................300 Built-in undervoltage protection steps..................................300 Logic diagram.......................................................................300 Function block...........................................................................305 Input and output signals............................................................306 Setting parameters....................................................................307
9

Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Technical data...........................................................................315

Section 10 Secondary system supervision.....................................317


Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF ............................................317 Introduction................................................................................317 Principle of operation.................................................................317 Function block...........................................................................319 Input and output signals............................................................319 Setting parameters....................................................................320 Technical data...........................................................................320 Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF...............................................320 Introduction................................................................................320 Principle of operation.................................................................321 Zero and negative sequence detection................................321 Delta current and delta voltage detection.............................325 Dead line detection...............................................................327 Main logic.............................................................................327 Function block...........................................................................331 Input and output signals............................................................331 Setting parameters....................................................................331 Technical data...........................................................................332

Section 11 Control..........................................................................335
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN......................................................................................335 Introduction................................................................................335 Principle of operation.................................................................336 Basic functionality.................................................................336 Logic diagrams.....................................................................336 Function block...........................................................................345 Input and output signals............................................................345 Setting parameters....................................................................348 Technical data...........................................................................351 Autorecloser SMBRREC ...............................................................352 Introduction................................................................................352 Principle of operation.................................................................352 Logic Diagrams....................................................................352 Auto-reclosing operation Off and On....................................352 Auto-reclosing mode selection.............................................353 Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle......................................................................353 Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1...............354 Long trip signal.....................................................................355 Time sequence diagrams.....................................................361
10 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Function block...........................................................................364 Input and output signals............................................................364 Setting parameters....................................................................366 Technical data...........................................................................368 Apparatus control APC...................................................................368 Introduction................................................................................368 Principle of operation.................................................................368 Error handling............................................................................369 Bay control QCBAY...................................................................371 Introduction...........................................................................371 Principle of operation............................................................371 Function block......................................................................373 Input and output signals.......................................................373 Setting parameters...............................................................374 Local/Remote switch.................................................................374 Introduction...........................................................................374 Principle of operation............................................................374 Function block......................................................................376 Input and output signals.......................................................376 Setting parameters...............................................................377 Switch controller SCSWI...........................................................377 Introduction...........................................................................378 Principle of operation............................................................378 Function block......................................................................383 Input and output signals.......................................................383 Setting parameters...............................................................384 Circuit breaker SXCBR..............................................................384 Introduction...........................................................................385 Principle of operation............................................................385 Function block......................................................................389 Input and output signals.......................................................389 Setting parameters...............................................................390 Circuit switch SXSWI.................................................................390 Introduction...........................................................................390 Principle of operation............................................................390 Function block......................................................................394 Input and output signals.......................................................394 Setting parameters...............................................................395 Bay reserve QCRSV..................................................................395 Introduction...........................................................................396 Principle of operation............................................................396 Function block......................................................................398 Input and output signals.......................................................399
11 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Setting parameters...............................................................400 Reservation input RESIN...........................................................400 Introduction...........................................................................400 Principle of operation............................................................400 Function block......................................................................402 Input and output signals.......................................................403 Setting parameters...............................................................404 Interlocking ....................................................................................404 Introduction................................................................................404 Principle of operation.................................................................404 Logical node for interlocking SCILO .........................................407 Introduction...........................................................................407 Logic diagram.......................................................................407 Function block......................................................................408 Input and output signals.......................................................408 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES .........................408 Introduction...........................................................................409 Function block......................................................................409 Logic diagram.......................................................................409 Input and output signals.......................................................409 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS..........................410 Introduction...........................................................................410 Function block......................................................................411 Logic diagram.......................................................................412 Input and output signals.......................................................413 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC ................414 Introduction...........................................................................415 Function block......................................................................415 Logic diagram.......................................................................416 Input and output signals.......................................................416 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC ................................417 Introduction...........................................................................417 Function block......................................................................418 Logic diagram.......................................................................419 Input and output signals.......................................................421 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH .....................................................424 Introduction...........................................................................424 Function blocks....................................................................425 Logic diagrams.....................................................................427 Input and output signals.......................................................432 Interlocking for double CB bay DB ...........................................436 Introduction...........................................................................436 Function block......................................................................437
12 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Logic diagrams.....................................................................439 Input and output signals ......................................................442 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE ..........................................445 Introduction...........................................................................445 Function block......................................................................446 Logic diagram.......................................................................447 Input and output signals.......................................................452 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO ............................454 Introduction...........................................................................455 Function block......................................................................456 Logic diagram.......................................................................457 Input and output signals.......................................................458 Position evaluation POS_EVAL.................................................460 Introduction...........................................................................460 Logic diagram.......................................................................460 Function block......................................................................461 Input and output signals.......................................................461 Voltage control................................................................................461 Introduction................................................................................461 Principle of operation.................................................................462 Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC and TR8ATCC .................................................................................463 Principle of operation............................................................463 Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC ........................................................475 Principle of operation............................................................475 Connection between TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and TCMYLTCor TCLYLTC.............................................................479 Function block...........................................................................483 Input and output signals............................................................486 Setting parameters....................................................................493 Technical data...........................................................................500 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGGIO.....................................................................501 Introduction................................................................................502 Principle of operation.................................................................502 Functionality and behaviour ................................................503 Graphical display..................................................................503 Function block...........................................................................505 Input and output signals............................................................505 Setting parameters....................................................................506 Selector mini switch VSGGIO.........................................................507 Introduction................................................................................507 Principle of operation.................................................................507
13 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Function block...........................................................................508 Input and output signals............................................................508 Setting parameters....................................................................509 IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO.............509 Introduction................................................................................509 Principle of operation.................................................................509 Function block...........................................................................510 Input and output signals............................................................510 Settings......................................................................................510 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO.........................510 Introduction................................................................................510 Principle of operation.................................................................511 Function block...........................................................................511 Input and output signals............................................................511 Setting parameters....................................................................512 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS..........512 Introduction................................................................................513 Principle of operation.................................................................513 Function block...........................................................................514 Input and output signals............................................................514 Setting parameters....................................................................515 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD....................................529 Introduction................................................................................529 Principle of operation.................................................................529 Function block...........................................................................530 Input and output signals............................................................530 Setting parameters....................................................................531

Section 12 Scheme communication...............................................533


Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection ZCPSCH........................................................................533 Introduction................................................................................533 Principle of operation.................................................................534 Blocking scheme..................................................................534 Permissive underreaching scheme......................................534 Permissive overreaching scheme........................................535 Unblocking scheme..............................................................535 Intertrip scheme....................................................................536 Simplified logic diagram.......................................................536 Function block...........................................................................538 Input and output signals............................................................538 Setting parameters....................................................................539 Technical data...........................................................................539

14 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Current reversal and WEI logic for distance protection 3-phase ZCRWPSCH ..................................................................................540 Introduction................................................................................540 Principle of operation.................................................................540 Current reversal logic...........................................................540 Weak-end infeed logic..........................................................541 Function block...........................................................................542 Input and output signals............................................................542 Setting parameters....................................................................543 Technical data...........................................................................543 Local acceleration logic ZCLCPLAL...............................................544 Introduction................................................................................544 Principle of operation.................................................................544 Zone extension.....................................................................544 Loss-of-Load acceleration....................................................545 Function block...........................................................................546 Input and output signals............................................................546 Setting parameters....................................................................547 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH .......................................................................547 Introduction................................................................................547 Principle of operation.................................................................548 Blocking scheme..................................................................548 Permissive under/overreaching scheme..............................549 Unblocking scheme..............................................................550 Function block...........................................................................551 Input and output signals............................................................552 Setting parameters....................................................................552 Technical data...........................................................................553 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH...............................................553 Introduction................................................................................553 Principle of operation.................................................................554 Directional comparison logic function...................................554 Fault current reversal logic...................................................554 Weak-end infeed logic..........................................................555 Function block...........................................................................556 Input and output signals............................................................556 Setting parameters....................................................................557 Technical data...........................................................................557

Section 13 Logic.............................................................................559
Tripping logic SMPPTRC ...............................................................559 Introduction................................................................................559
15 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Principle of operation.................................................................559 Logic diagram.......................................................................561 Function block...........................................................................564 Input and output signals............................................................564 Setting parameters....................................................................565 Technical data...........................................................................566 Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO............................................................566 Introduction................................................................................566 Principle of operation.................................................................566 Function block...........................................................................568 Input and output signals............................................................568 Setting parameters....................................................................569 Configurable logic blocks................................................................570 Introduction................................................................................570 Inverter function block INV........................................................572 OR function block OR................................................................572 AND function block AND...........................................................573 Timer function block TIMER......................................................573 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER..................................574 Exclusive OR function block XOR.............................................575 Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY...................................575 Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY.................576 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY.................577 Controllable gate function block GATE......................................578 Settable timer function block TIMERSET..................................578 Technical data...........................................................................579 Configurable logic Q/T....................................................................580 Introduction................................................................................580 ORQT function block ................................................................580 Introduction...........................................................................580 Function block......................................................................581 Input and output signals.......................................................581 INVERTERQT function block ...................................................581 Introduction...........................................................................581 Function block......................................................................582 Input and output signals.......................................................582 Pulse timer function block PULSTIMERQT...............................582 Introduction...........................................................................582 Function block......................................................................582 Input and output signals.......................................................583 Setting parameters...............................................................583 XORQT function block...............................................................583 Introduction...........................................................................583
16 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Function block......................................................................583 Input and output signals.......................................................584 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT.............................584 Introduction...........................................................................584 Function block......................................................................585 Input and output signals.......................................................585 Setting parameters...............................................................585 ANDQT function block ..............................................................585 Introduction...........................................................................585 Function block......................................................................586 Input and output signals.......................................................586 Setting parameters...............................................................586 Set-reset function block SRMEMORYQT..................................586 Introduction...........................................................................586 Function block......................................................................587 Input and output signals.......................................................587 Setting parameters...............................................................587 Reset-set function block RSMEMORYQT ................................588 Introduction...........................................................................588 Function block......................................................................588 Input and output signals.......................................................588 Setting parameters...............................................................589 INVALIDQT function block.........................................................589 Introduction...........................................................................589 Function block......................................................................589 Input and output signals.......................................................590 Single indication signal combining function block INDCOMBSPQT........................................................................591 Introduction...........................................................................591 Function block......................................................................591 Input and output signals.......................................................591 Single indication signal extractor function block INDEXTSPQT............................................................................592 Introduction...........................................................................592 Function block......................................................................592 Input and output signals.......................................................592 Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN............................................593 Principle of operation.................................................................593 Function block...........................................................................593 Input and output signals............................................................594 Setting parameters....................................................................594 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I..........................................594 Introduction................................................................................594 Principle of operation.................................................................594
17 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Function block...........................................................................595 Input and output signals............................................................595 Setting parameters....................................................................596 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation B16IFCVI................................................................596 Introduction................................................................................596 Principle of operation.................................................................596 Function block...........................................................................596 Input and output signals............................................................597 Setting parameters....................................................................597 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16..........................................597 Introduction................................................................................598 Principle of operation.................................................................598 Function block...........................................................................598 Input and output signals............................................................598 Setting parameters....................................................................599 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation IB16FCVB...............................................................599 Introduction................................................................................599 Principle of operation.................................................................599 Function block...........................................................................600 Input and output signals............................................................600 Setting parameters....................................................................601

Section 14 Monitoring.....................................................................603
Measurements................................................................................603 Introduction................................................................................604 Principle of operation.................................................................605 Measurement supervision....................................................605 Measurements CVMMXN.....................................................609 Phase current measurement CMMXU.................................614 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU, VNMMXU..............................................................615 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI..................................................................................615 Function block...........................................................................615 Input and output signals............................................................617 Setting parameters....................................................................620 Technical data...........................................................................633 Event counter CNTGGIO................................................................634 Identification..............................................................................634 Introduction................................................................................635 Principle of operation.................................................................635 Reporting..............................................................................635
18 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Design..................................................................................635 Function block...........................................................................636 Input signals..............................................................................636 Setting parameters....................................................................637 Technical data...........................................................................637 Event function EVENT....................................................................637 Introduction................................................................................637 Principle of operation.................................................................637 Function block...........................................................................639 Input and output signals............................................................639 Setting parameters....................................................................640 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP.....................................642 Introduction................................................................................642 Principle of operation.................................................................642 Function block...........................................................................643 Input and output signals............................................................643 Setting parameters....................................................................644 Fault locator LMBRFLO..................................................................644 Introduction................................................................................645 Principle of operation.................................................................645 Measuring Principle..............................................................646 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault.....646 The non-compensated impedance model............................650 IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................651 Function block...........................................................................651 Input and output signals............................................................651 Setting parameters....................................................................652 Technical data...........................................................................653 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP................................653 Introduction................................................................................653 Principle of operation.................................................................653 Function block...........................................................................654 Input and output signals............................................................654 Disturbance report DRPRDRE.......................................................654 Introduction................................................................................655 Principle of operation.................................................................655 Function block...........................................................................662 Input and output signals............................................................664 Setting parameters....................................................................665 Technical data...........................................................................675 Event list.........................................................................................675 Introduction................................................................................675 Principle of operation.................................................................675
19 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Function block...........................................................................676 Input signals..............................................................................676 Technical data...........................................................................676 Indications......................................................................................676 Introduction................................................................................676 Principle of operation.................................................................677 Function block...........................................................................678 Input signals..............................................................................678 Technical data...........................................................................678 Event recorder ...............................................................................678 Introduction................................................................................678 Principle of operation.................................................................678 Function block...........................................................................679 Input signals..............................................................................679 Technical data...........................................................................679 Trip value recorder.........................................................................679 Introduction................................................................................679 Principle of operation.................................................................680 Function block...........................................................................680 Input signals..............................................................................681 Technical data...........................................................................681 Disturbance recorder......................................................................681 Introduction................................................................................681 Principle of operation.................................................................681 Memory and storage............................................................682 IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................683 Function block...........................................................................684 Input and output signals............................................................684 Setting parameters....................................................................684 Technical data...........................................................................684

Section 15 Metering.......................................................................685
Pulse-counter logic PCGGIO..........................................................685 Introduction................................................................................685 Principle of operation.................................................................685 Function block...........................................................................687 Input and output signals............................................................688 Setting parameters....................................................................688 Technical data...........................................................................689 Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR......................................................................................689 Introduction................................................................................689 Principle of operation.................................................................689 Function block...........................................................................690
20 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Input and output signals............................................................690 Setting parameters....................................................................691

Section 16 Station communication.................................................693


Overview.........................................................................................693 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.........................................693 Introduction................................................................................693 Setting parameters....................................................................694 Technical data...........................................................................694 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO, SP16GGIO................................................................................694 Introduction...........................................................................694 Principle of operation............................................................694 Function block......................................................................695 Input and output signals.......................................................695 Setting parameters...............................................................696 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions MVGGIO.......696 Principle of operation............................................................696 Function block......................................................................696 Input and output signals.......................................................696 Setting parameters...............................................................697 IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication..............697 Introduction...........................................................................697 Principle of operation............................................................698 Function block......................................................................700 Output signals......................................................................700 Setting parameters...............................................................700 IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol.....................................700 Introduction................................................................................700 Principle of operation.................................................................700 Consequence on accuracy for power measurement functions when using signals from IEC 61850-9-2LE communication..........................................................................703 Function block...........................................................................704 Output signals............................................................................704 Setting parameters....................................................................705 Technical data...........................................................................705 LON communication protocol.........................................................705 Introduction................................................................................705 Principle of operation.................................................................706 Setting parameters....................................................................724 Technical data...........................................................................724 SPA communication protocol.........................................................724 Introduction................................................................................724
21 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Principle of operation.................................................................725 Communication ports...........................................................732 Design.......................................................................................732 Setting parameters....................................................................733 Technical data...........................................................................733 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol.....................................733 Introduction................................................................................733 Principle of operation.................................................................733 General.................................................................................733 Communication ports...........................................................743 Function block...........................................................................743 Input and output signals............................................................746 Setting parameters....................................................................751 Technical data...........................................................................754 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV.........................................................................754 Function block...........................................................................754 Input and output signals............................................................755 Setting parameters....................................................................756 Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV..........................................757 Function block...........................................................................757 Input and output signals............................................................757 Setting parameters....................................................................758 Multiple command and transmit MULTICMDRCV, MULTICMDSND.............................................................................758 Introduction................................................................................759 Principle of operation.................................................................759 Design.......................................................................................759 General.................................................................................759 Function block...........................................................................760 Input and output signals............................................................761 Setting parameters....................................................................762

Section 17 Remote communication................................................763


Binary signal transfer......................................................................763 Introduction................................................................................763 Principle of operation.................................................................763 Function block...........................................................................765 Input and output signals............................................................765 Setting parameters....................................................................767 Transmission of analog data from LDCM LDCMTransmit..............770 Function block...........................................................................770 Input and output signals............................................................770

22 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Section 18 IED hardware...............................................................771


Overview.........................................................................................771 Variants of case and local HMI display size..............................771 Case from the rear side.............................................................774 Hardware modules.........................................................................778 Overview....................................................................................778 Combined backplane module (CBM).........................................779 Introduction...........................................................................779 Functionality.........................................................................779 Design..................................................................................780 Universal backplane module (UBM)..........................................782 Introduction...........................................................................782 Functionality.........................................................................782 Design..................................................................................782 Numeric processing module (NUM)..........................................784 Introduction...........................................................................784 Functionality.........................................................................784 Block diagram.......................................................................785 Power supply module (PSM).....................................................786 Introduction...........................................................................786 Design..................................................................................786 Technical data......................................................................786 Local human-machine interface (Local HMI).............................787 Transformer input module (TRM)..............................................787 Introduction...........................................................................787 Design..................................................................................787 Technical data......................................................................788 Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization (ADM) .............................................................789 Introduction...........................................................................789 Design..................................................................................789 Binary input module (BIM).........................................................791 Introduction...........................................................................791 Design..................................................................................791 Technical data......................................................................795 Binary output modules (BOM)...................................................795 Introduction...........................................................................795 Design..................................................................................795 Technical data......................................................................797 Static binary output module (SOM)...........................................798 Introduction...........................................................................798 Design..................................................................................798 Technical data......................................................................800
23 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Binary input/output module (IOM)..............................................801 Introduction...........................................................................801 Design..................................................................................802 Technical data......................................................................804 mA input module (MIM).............................................................805 Introduction...........................................................................805 Design..................................................................................806 Technical data......................................................................807 Serial and LON communication module (SLM) ........................807 Introduction...........................................................................807 Design..................................................................................807 Technical data......................................................................809 Galvanic RS485 communication module...................................809 Introduction...........................................................................809 Design..................................................................................809 Technical data......................................................................811 Optical ethernet module (OEM).................................................811 Introduction...........................................................................811 Functionality.........................................................................811 Design..................................................................................811 Technical data......................................................................812 Line data communication module (LDCM)................................813 Introduction...........................................................................813 Design..................................................................................813 Technical data......................................................................814 GPS time synchronization module (GTM).................................815 Introduction...........................................................................815 Design..................................................................................815 Technical data......................................................................816 GPS antenna.............................................................................816 Introduction...........................................................................816 Design..................................................................................816 Technical data......................................................................818 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B.............................818 Introduction...........................................................................818 Design..................................................................................818 Technical data......................................................................819 Dimensions.....................................................................................820 Case without rear cover.............................................................820 Case with rear cover..................................................................822 Flush mounting dimensions.......................................................824 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions...................................825 Wall mounting dimensions.........................................................826
24 Technical reference manual

Table of contents

External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection...................................................................................826 Mounting alternatives.....................................................................828 Flush mounting..........................................................................828 Overview..............................................................................828 Mounting procedure for flush mounting................................829 19 panel rack mounting............................................................830 Overview..............................................................................830 Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting.................831 Wall mounting............................................................................831 Overview..............................................................................831 Mounting procedure for wall mounting.................................832 How to reach the rear side of the IED..................................833 Side-by-side 19 rack mounting.................................................833 Overview..............................................................................833 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting............834 IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case.............834 Side-by-side flush mounting......................................................835 Overview..............................................................................835 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting...........836 Technical data................................................................................836 Enclosure...................................................................................836 Connection system....................................................................837 Influencing factors.....................................................................837 Type tests according to standard..............................................838

Section 19 Labels...........................................................................841
Labels on IED.................................................................................841

Section 20 Connection diagrams...................................................845 Section 21 Inverse time characteristics..........................................861


Application......................................................................................861 Principle of operation......................................................................864 Mode of operation......................................................................864 Inverse characteristics....................................................................869

Section 22 Glossary.......................................................................895

25 Technical reference manual

26

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 1 Introduction

Section 1

Introduction

About this chapter


This chapter explains concepts and conventions used in this manual and provides information necessary to understand the contents of the manual.

1.1
1.1.1

Introduction to the technical reference manual


About the complete set of manuals for an IED
The users manual (UM) is a complete set of five different manuals:
Decommissioning deinstalling & disposal
IEC09000744-1-en.vsd
IEC09000744 V1 EN

Planning & purchase

Commissioning

Engineering

Engineeringmanual Installation and Commissioning manual Operators manual Application manual Technical reference manual

The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting guidelines and setting parameters sorted per function. The application manual should be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection function could be used. The manual should also be used when calculating settings. The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains application and functionality descriptions and it lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The technical reference
27 Technical reference manual

Operation

Installing

Maintenance

Section 1 Introduction

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

manual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service. The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on how to install and commission the protection IED. The manual can also be used as a reference during periodic testing. The manual covers procedures for mechanical and electrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and configuration as well as verifying settings and performing directional tests. The chapters are organized in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/section numbers) in which the protection IED should be installed and commissioned. The Operators Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protection IED during normal service once it has been commissioned. The operators manual can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated and measured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault. The Engineering Manual (EM) contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the different tools in PCM600. The manual provides instructions on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also recommends a sequence for engineering of protection and control functions, LHMI functions as well as communication engineering for IEC 61850 and DNP3.

1.1.2

About the technical reference manual


The following chapters are included in the technical reference manual. Local HMI describes the control panel on the IED and explains display characteristics, control keys and various local HMI features. Basic IED functions presents functions for all protection types that are included in all IEDs, for example, time synchronization, self supervision with event list, test mode and other general functions. Current protection describes functions, for example, over current protection, breaker failure protection and pole discordance. Voltage protection describes functions for under voltage and over voltage protection and residual over voltage protection. Frequency protection describes functions for over frequency, under frequency and rate of change of frequency protection. Multipurpose protection describes the general protection function for current and voltage. Secondary system supervision describes current based functions for current circuit supervision and fuse failure supervision. Control describes control functions, for example, synchronization and energizing check and other product specific functions. Scheme communication describes functions related to current reversal and weak end infeed logic. Logic describes trip logic and related functions. Monitoring describes measurement related functions that are used to provide data regarding relevant quantities, events and faults, for example. Metering describes pulse counter logic.

28 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 1 Introduction

Station communication describes Ethernet based communication in general, including the use of IEC 61850 and horizontal communication via GOOSE. Remote communication describes binary and analog signal transfer, and the associated hardware. Hardware describes the IED and its components. Connection diagrams provides terminal wiring diagrams and information regarding connections to and from the IED. Inverse time characteristics describes and explains inverse time delay, inverse time curves and their effects. Glossary is a list of terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical documentation.

1.1.3

This manual
The description of each IED related function follows the same structure (where applicable). The different sections are outlined below.

1.1.3.1

Introduction
Outlines the implementation of a particular protection function.

1.1.3.2

Principle of operation
Describes how the function works, presents a general background to algorithms and measurement techniques. Logic diagrams are used to illustrate functionality.

Logic diagrams

Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are bordered by dashed lines. Signal names Input and output logic signals consist of two groups of letters separated by two dashes. The first group consists of up to four letters and presents the abbreviated name for the corresponding function. The second group presents the functionality of the particular signal. According to this explanation, the meaning of the signal BLKTR in figure 4 is as follows: BLKTR informs the user that the signal will BLOCK the TRIP command from the under-voltage function, when its value is a logical one (1).

Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand side. Settings are not displayed. Input and output signals In a logic diagram, input and output signal paths are shown as a lines that touch the outer border of the diagram.

29 Technical reference manual

Section 1 Introduction

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Input and output signals can be configured using the ACT tool. They can be connected to the inputs and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and outputs. Examples of input signals are BLKTR, BLOCK and VTSU. Examples output signals are TRIP, START, STL1, STL2, STL3. Setting parameters Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent setting parameter signals. These parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Their values are high (1) only when the corresponding setting parameter is set to the symbolic value specified within the frame. Example is the signal Block TUV=Yes. Their logical values correspond automatically to the selected setting value. Internal signals Internal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately 2 mm from the frame edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the suffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and continues, see figure 1.
BLKTR TEST TEST Block TUV=Yes BLOCK VTSU BLOCK-int. STUL1N BLOCK-int. STUL2N BLOCK-int. STUL3N & & >1 & t & TRIP START STL1 STL2 STL3 & >1

BLOCK-int.

xx04000375.vsd
IEC04000375 V1 EN

Figure 1:

Logic diagram example with -int signals

30 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 1 Introduction
External signals Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagram have the suffix -cont., see figure 2 and figure 3.
STZMPP-cont.

STCND & & & & & &

>1

STNDL1L2-cont. STNDL2L3-cont. STNDL3L1-cont. STNDL1N-cont. STNDL2N-cont. STNDL3N-cont. >1 STNDPE-cont.

1L1L2 1L2L3 1L3L1 1L1N 1L2N 1L3N

>1 1--VTSZ 1--BLOCK >1 & 1--STND BLK-cont.


xx04000376.vsd
IEC04000376 V1 EN

Figure 2:

Logic diagram example with an outgoing -cont signal

STNDL1N-cont. STNDL2N-cont. STNDL3N-cont. STNDL1L2-cont. STNDL2L3-cont. STNDL3L1-cont.

>1 & >1 & & & 15 ms t 15 ms t 15 ms t 15 ms t STL1 STL2 STL3 START

>1 >1

BLK-cont.
xx04000377.vsd
IEC04000377 V1 EN

Figure 3:

Logic diagram example with an incoming -cont signal

31 Technical reference manual

Section 1 Introduction
1.1.3.3 Input and output signals

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Input and output signals are presented in two separate tables. Each table consists of two columns. The first column contains the name of the signal and the second column contains the description of the signal.

1.1.3.4

Function block
Each function block is illustrated graphically. Input signals are always on the left hand side and output signals on the right hand side. Settings are not displayed. Special kinds of settings are sometimes available. These are supposed to be connected to constants in the configuration scheme and are therefore depicted as inputs. Such signals will be found in the signal list but described in the settings table. The ^ character in front of an input or output signal name in the function block symbol given for a function, indicates that the user can set a signal name of their own in PCM600. The * character after an input or output signal name in the function block symbol given for a function, indicates that the signal must be connected to another function block in the application configuration to achieve a valid application configuration.
IEC 61850 - 8 -1 Logical Node

Mandatory signal (*) Outputs


PCGGIO

Inputs
BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE* RS_CNT INVALID RESTART BLOCKED NEW_VAL ^SCAL_VAL en05000511-1-en.vsd

User defined name (^)

Diagram Number
IEC05000511 V2 EN

Figure 4:

Example of a function block

1.1.3.5

Setting parameters
These are presented in tables and include all parameters associated with the function in question.

32 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 1 Introduction
Technical data
The technical data section provides specific technical information about the function or hardware described.

1.1.3.6

1.1.4

Intended audience
General
This manual addresses system engineers, installation and commissioning personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal service.

Requirements
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in the protective devices. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in the handling electronic equipment.

1.1.5
Documents related to REC670 Operators manual

Related documents
Identity number 1MRK 511 228-UEN 1MRK 511 229-UEN 1MRK 511 227-UEN 1MRK 511 230-UEN 1MRK 511 231-BEN 1MRK 511 232-BEN 1MRK 511 219-BEN SA2005-001280

Installation and commissioning manual Technical reference manual Application manual Product guide customized Product guide pre-configured Product guide IEC 61850-9-2 Sample specification

Connection and Installation components Test system, COMBITEST Accessories for 670 series IEDs 670 series SPA and signal list IEC 61850 Data objects list for 670 series Engineering manual 670 series Communication set-up for Relion 670 series

1MRK 513 003-BEN 1MRK 512 001-BEN 1MRK 514 012-BEN 1MRK 500 092-WEN 1MRK 500 091-WEN 1MRK 511 240-UEN 1MRK 505 260-UEN

More information can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation.

33 Technical reference manual

Section 1 Introduction 1.1.6 Revision notes


Revision A B C Description Minor corrections made Minor corrections made Maintenance updates, PR corrections

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

34 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 2 Analog inputs

Section 2

Analog inputs

2.1

Introduction
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly to get correct measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be defined properly. Measuring and protection algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary quantities as well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and voltage transformers properly. A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing and service values reading. The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary equipment, that are sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a process bus, via the IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol.

The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer input module (TRM) type.

2.2

Operation principle
The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are typically star connected and can be connected with the star point to the object or from the object. This information must be set in the IED. The convention of the directionality is defined as follows: Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into the object. Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out from the object.

35 Technical reference manual

Section 2 Analog inputs

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see figure 5) Forward means direction into the object. Reverse means direction out from the object.
Definition of direction for directional functions Reverse Forward Definition of direction for directional functions Forward Reverse

Protected Object Line, transformer, etc


e.g. P, Q, I Measured quantity is positive when flowing towards the object Set parameter CTStarPoint Correct Setting is "ToObject" e.g. P, Q, I Measured quantity is positive when flowing towards the object Set parameter CTStarPoint Correct Setting is "FromObject" en05000456.vsd
IEC05000456 V1 EN

Figure 5:

Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is right, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or ToObject according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows towards the protected object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the protected object. The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs and VTs are therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with their rated ratios. The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main menu/Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool.

2.3

Function block
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED and used internally in the configuration.

36 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 2 Analog inputs

2.4

Setting parameters
Dependent on ordered IED type.

Table 1:
Name PhaseAngleRef

AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) TRM40-Ch1 TRM40-Ch2 TRM40-Ch3 TRM40-Ch4 TRM40-Ch5 TRM40-Ch6 TRM40-Ch7 TRM40-Ch8 TRM40-Ch9 TRM40-Ch10 TRM40-Ch11 TRM40-Ch12 TRM41-Ch1 TRM41-Ch2 TRM41-Ch3 TRM41-Ch4 TRM41-Ch5 TRM41-Ch6 TRM41-Ch7 TRM41-Ch8 TRM41-Ch9 TRM41-Ch10 TRM41-Ch11 TRM41-Ch12 MU1-L1I MU1-L2I MU1-L3I MU1-L4I MU1-L1U MU1-L2U MU1-L3U MU1-L4U MU2-L1I MU2-L2I MU2-L3I MU2-L4I MU2-L1U MU2-L2U MU2-L3U MU2-L4U MU3-L1I MU3-L2I MU3-L3I MU3-L4I MU3-L1U MU3-L2U MU3-L3U MU3-L4U Unit Step Default TRM40-Ch1 Description Reference channel for phase angle presentation

37 Technical reference manual

Section 2 Analog inputs

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Table 2:
Name CTStarPoint1 CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2 CTsec2 CTprim2 CTStarPoint3 CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4 CTsec4 CTprim4 CTStarPoint5 CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6 CTsec6 CTprim6 CTStarPoint7 CTsec7 CTprim7 CTStarPoint8 CTsec8 CTprim8 CTStarPoint9 CTsec9 CTprim9 CTStarPoint10 CTsec10 CTprim10 CTStarPoint11 CTsec11

TRM_12I Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 Unit A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current

Table continues on next page 38 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 2 Analog inputs


Values (Range) 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 Unit A A A Step 1 1 1 Default 3000 ToObject 1 3000 Description Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

Name CTprim11 CTStarPoint12 CTsec12 CTprim12

Table 3:
Name CTStarPoint1 CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2 CTsec2 CTprim2 CTStarPoint3 CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4 CTsec4 CTprim4 CTStarPoint5 CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6 CTsec6 CTprim6 VTsec7 VTprim7 VTsec8 VTprim8 VTsec9 VTprim9 VTsec10 VTprim10 VTsec11

TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 Unit A A A A A A A A A A A A V kV V kV V kV V kV V Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 Default ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage

Table continues on next page

39 Technical reference manual

Section 2 Analog inputs


Name VTprim11 VTsec12 VTprim12 Values (Range) 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 Unit kV V kV Step 0.05 0.001 0.05 Default 400.00 110.000 400.00 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage

Table 4:
Name CTStarPoint1 CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2 CTsec2 CTprim2 CTStarPoint3 CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4 CTsec4 CTprim4 CTStarPoint5 CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6 CTsec6 CTprim6

TRM_6I Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 Unit A A A A A A A A A A A A Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

Table 5:
Name CTStarPoint1 CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2 CTsec2 CTprim2

TRM_7I_5U Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 Unit A A A A Step 1 1 1 1 Default ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

Table continues on next page

40 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 2 Analog inputs


Values (Range) FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 Unit A A A A A A A A A A V kV V kV V kV V kV V kV Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 Default ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage

Name CTStarPoint3 CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4 CTsec4 CTprim4 CTStarPoint5 CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6 CTsec6 CTprim6 CTStarPoint7 CTsec7 CTprim7 VTsec8 VTprim8 VTsec9 VTprim9 VTsec10 VTprim10 VTsec11 VTprim11 VTsec12 VTprim12

Table 6:
Name CTStarPoint1 CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2 CTsec2 CTprim2

TRM_9I_3U Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 Unit A A A A Step 1 1 1 1 Default ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

Table continues on next page

41 Technical reference manual

Section 2 Analog inputs


Name CTStarPoint3 CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4 CTsec4 CTprim4 CTStarPoint5 CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6 CTsec6 CTprim6 CTStarPoint7 CTsec7 CTprim7 CTStarPoint8 CTsec8 CTprim8 CTStarPoint9 CTsec9 CTprim9 VTsec10 VTprim10 VTsec11 VTprim11 VTsec12 VTprim12 Values (Range) FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 Unit A A A A A A A A A A A A A A V kV V kV V kV Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 Default ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage

42 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 3 Local HMI

Section 3

Local HMI

About this chapter


This chapter describes the structure and use of local HMI, which is the control panel at the IED.

3.1

Human machine interface


The local human machine interface is available in a small and a medium sized model. The difference between the two models is the size of the LCD. The small size LCD can display seven lines of text and the medium size LCD can display the single line diagram with up to 15 objects on each page. Up to 12 single line diagram pages can be defined, depending on the product capability. The local HMI is divided into zones with different functionality. Status indication LEDs. Alarm indication LEDs, which consist of 15 LEDs (6 red and 9 yellow) with user printable label. All LEDs are configurable from PCM600. Liquid crystal display (LCD). Keypad with push buttons for control and navigation purposes, switch for selection between local and remote control and reset. Isolated RJ45 communication port.

43 Technical reference manual

Section 3 Local HMI

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

IEC05000055-LITEN V1 EN

Figure 6:

Small, alpha numeric HMI

IEC05000056-LITEN V1 EN

Figure 7:

Medium graphic HMI, 15 controllable objects

44 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 3 Local HMI

3.2
3.2.1

Small size HMI


Small
The small sized HMI is available for 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 x 19 case. The LCD on the small HMI measures 32 x 90 mm and displays 7 lines with up to 40 characters per line. The first line displays the product name and the last line displays date and time. The remaining 5 lines are dynamic. This LCD has no graphic display potential.

3.2.2

Design
The local HMI is identical for both the 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 cases. The different parts of the small local HMI are shown in figure 8

45 Technical reference manual

Section 3 Local HMI

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

8
IEC05000055-CALLOUT V1 EN

en05000055.eps

Figure 8:

Small graphic HMI

1 Status indication LEDs 2 LCD 3 Indication LEDs 4 Label 5 Local/Remote LEDs 6 RJ45 port 7 Communication indication LED 8 Keypad

46 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 3 Local HMI

3.3
3.3.1

Medium size graphic HMI


Medium
The following case sizes can be equipped with the medium size LCD: 1/2 x 19 3/4 x 19 1/1 x 19

This is a fully graphical monochrome LCD which measures 120 x 90 mm. It has 28 lines with up to 40 characters per line. To display the single line diagram, this LCD is required.

3.3.2

Design
The different parts of the medium size local HMI are shown in figure 9. The local HMI exists in an IEC version and in an ANSI version. The difference is on the keypad operation buttons and the yellow LED designation.

47 Technical reference manual

Section 3 Local HMI

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

en05000056.eps

8
IEC05000056-CALLOUT V1 EN

Figure 9:

Medium size graphic HMI

1 Status indication LEDs 2 LCD 3 Indication LEDs 4 Label 5 Local/Remote LEDs 6 RJ45 port 7 Communication indication LED 8 Keypad

48 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 3 Local HMI

3.4

Keypad
The keypad is used to monitor and operate the IED. The keypad has the same look and feel in all IEDs. LCD screens and other details may differ but the way the keys function is identical.

IEC05000153 V1 EN

Figure 10:

The HMI keypad.

Table 7 describes the HMI keys that are used to operate the IED.
Table 7:
Key

HMI keys on the front of the IED


Function Press to close or energize a breaker or disconnector.

IEC05000101 V1 EN

Press to open a breaker or disconnector.


IEC05000102 V1 EN

Press to open two sub menus: Key operation and IED information.
IEC05000103 V1 EN

Press to clear entries, cancel commands or edit.


IEC05000104 V1 EN

Press to open the main menu and to move to the default screen.
IEC05000105 V1 EN

Press to set the IED in local or remote control mode.


IEC05000106 V1 EN

Press to open the reset screen.


IEC05000107 V1 EN

Press to start the editing mode and confirm setting changes, when in editing mode.
IEC05000108 V1 EN

Table continues on next page

49 Technical reference manual

Section 3 Local HMI


Key Function

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Press to navigate forward between screens and move right in editing mode.
IEC05000109 V1 EN

Press to navigate backwards between screens and move left in editing mode.
IEC05000110 V1 EN

Press to move up in the single line diagram and in the menu tree.
IEC05000111 V1 EN

Press to move down in the single line diagram and in the menu tree.
IEC05000112 V1 EN

3.5
3.5.1

LED
Introduction
The LED module is a unidirectional means of communicating. This means that events may occur that activate a LED in order to draw the operators attention to something that has occurred and needs some sort of action.

3.5.2

Status indication LEDs


The three LEDs above the LCD provide information as shown in the table below.
LED Indication Green: Steady Flashing Dark Yellow: Steady Flashing Red: Steady Trip command issued Dist. rep. triggered Terminal in test mode In service Internal failure No power supply Information

3.5.3

Indication LEDs
The LED indication module comprising 15 LEDs is standard in 670 series. Its main purpose is to present an immediate visual information for protection indications or alarm signals.

50 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 3 Local HMI

Alarm indication LEDs and hardware associated LEDs are located on the right hand side of the front panel. Alarm LEDs are located on the right of the LCD screen and show steady or flashing light. Steady light indicates normal operation. Flashing light indicates alarm.

Alarm LEDs can be configured in PCM600 and depend on the binary logic. Therefore they can not be configured on the local HMI. Typical examples of alarm LEDs Bay controller failure CB close blocked Interlocking bypassed SF6 Gas refill Position error CB spring charge alarm Oil temperature alarm Thermal overload trip

The RJ45 port has a yellow LED indicating that communication has been established between the IED and a computer. The Local/Remote key on the front panel has two LEDs indicating whether local or remote control of the IED is active.

3.6
3.6.1

Local HMI related functions


Introduction
The local HMI can be adapted to the application configuration and to user preferences. Function block LocalHMI Function block LEDGEN Setting parameters

51 Technical reference manual

Section 3 Local HMI 3.6.2


Table 8:
Name Language DisplayTimeout AutoRepeat ContrastLevel DefaultScreen EvListSrtOrder SymbolFont

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

General setting parameters


SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) English OptionalLanguage 10 - 120 Off On -10 - 20 0-0 Latest on top Oldest on top IEC ANSI Unit Min % Step 10 1 1 Default English 60 On 0 0 Latest on top IEC Description Local HMI language Local HMI display timeout Activation of auto-repeat (On) or not (Off) Contrast level for display Default screen Sort order of event list Symbol font for Single Line Diagram

3.6.3
3.6.3.1

Status LEDs
Design
The function block LocalHMI controls and supplies information about the status of the status indication LEDs. The input and output signals of local HMI are configured with PCM600. The function block can be used if any of the signals are required in a configuration logic. See section "Status indication LEDs" for information about the LEDs.

3.6.3.2

Function block
LocalHMI CLRLEDS HMI-ON RED-S YELLOW-S YELLOW-F CLRPULSE LEDSCLRD IEC05000773-2-en.vsd
IEC05000773 V2 EN

Figure 11:

LocalHMI function block

3.6.3.3

Input and output signals


Table 9:
Name CLRLEDS

LocalHMI Input signals


Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs

52 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 3 Local HMI

Table 10:
Name HMI-ON RED-S YELLOW-S YELLOW-F CLRPULSE LEDSCLRD

LocalHMI Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Backlight of the LCD display is active Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCDHMI are cleared Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not active

3.6.4
3.6.4.1

Indication LEDs
Introduction
The function block LEDGEN controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of LEDGEN are configured with PCM600. The input signal for each LED is selected individually with the Signal Matrix Tool in PCM600. LEDs (number 16) for trip indications are red. LEDs (number 715) for start indications are yellow.

Each indication LED on the local HMI can be set individually to operate in six different sequences Two sequences operate as follow type. Four sequences operate as latch type. Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with reset functionality. Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as signaling system in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality.

The light from the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flashing (-F). See the technical reference manual for more information.

3.6.4.2

Design
The information on the LEDs is stored at loss of the auxiliary power to the IED in some of the modes of LEDGEN. The latest LED picture appears immediately after the IED is successfully restarted.

Operating modes
Collecting mode
53 Technical reference manual

Section 3 Local HMI

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

LEDs which are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.

Re-starting mode In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed.

Acknowledgment/reset
From local HMI Active indications can be acknowledged or reset manually. Manual acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledged or reset is performed via the reset button and menus on the local HMI. See the operator's manual for more information.

From function input Active indications can also be acknowledged or reset from an input, RESET, to the function. This input can, for example, be configured to a binary input operated from an external push button. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment or reset only affects indications active at the moment when the button is first pressed.

Automatic reset Automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for restarting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications will be indicated with a steady light.

Operating sequences

The operating sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follows the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the corresponding input signal until it is reset.

54 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 3 Local HMI

Figure 12 show the function of available sequences that are selectable for each LED separately. The acknowledgment or reset function is not applicable for sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type). Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode. Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-starting mode.

The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F = Flashing. At the activation of the input signal, the indication operates according to the selected sequence diagrams. In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the characteristics as shown in figure 12.
= No indication = Steady light = Flash
en05000506.vsd
IEC05000506 V1 EN

Figure 12:

Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S) This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating signal

LED
IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN

Figure 13:

Operating sequence 1 (Follow-S)

Sequence 2 (Follow-F) This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of showing steady light. Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if

55 Technical reference manual

Section 3 Local HMI

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

the signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light.
Activating signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN

Figure 14:

Operating sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F) This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have been alternated. Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset that is, immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating signal

LED

Reset
IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN

Figure 15:

Operating sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)

Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S) In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing

56 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 3 Local HMI

of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences. Definition of a disturbance A disturbance is defined to last from the first LED set as LatchedReset-S is activated until a settable time, tRestart, has elapsed after that all activating signals for the LEDs set as LatchedReset-S have reset. However if all activating signals have reset and some signal again becomes active before tRestart has elapsed, the tRestart timer does not restart the timing sequence. A new disturbance start will be issued first when all signals have reset after tRestart has elapsed. A diagram of this functionality is shown in figure 16.
From disturbance length control per LED set to sequence 6

New disturbance

&

tRestart t

& 1 &

en01000237.vsd
IEC01000237 V1 EN

Figure 16:

Activation of new disturbance

In order not to have a lock-up of the indications in the case of a persisting signal each LED is provided with a timer, tMax, after which time the influence on the definition of a disturbance of that specific LED is inhibited. This functionality is shown i diagram in figure 17.
Activating signal To LED

AND tMax t

To disturbance length control

en05000507.vsd
IEC05000507 V1 EN

Figure 17:

Length control of activating signals

Timing diagram for sequence 6 Figure 18 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

57 Technical reference manual

Section 3 Local HMI

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Disturbance
tRestart

Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset


IEC01000239 V2 EN

IEC01000239_2-en.vsd

Figure 18:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance

Figure 19 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.
Disturbance tRestart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2 Disturbance tRestart

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset


IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN

Figure 19:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

58 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 3 Local HMI

Figure 20 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
Disturbance tRestart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset


IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN

Figure 20:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 21 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.


Disturbance tRestart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset


IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN

Figure 21:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset


59

Technical reference manual

Section 3 Local HMI


3.6.4.3 Function block
LEDGEN BLOCK RESET LEDTEST NEWIND ACK

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

IEC05000508_2_en.vsd
IEC05000508 V2 EN

Figure 22:

LEDGEN function block

3.6.4.4

Input and output signals


Table 11:
Name BLOCK RESET LEDTEST

LEDGEN Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 Description Input to block the operation of the LED-unit Input to acknowledge/reset the indications of the LED-unit Input for external LED test

Table 12:
Name NEWIND ACK

LEDGEN Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description A new signal on any of the indication inputs occurs A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged

3.6.4.5
Table 13:
Name Operation tRestart tMax SeqTypeLED1

Setting parameters
LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.0 - 100.0 0.0 - 100.0 Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Unit s s Step 0.1 0.1 Default Off 0.0 0.0 Follow-S Description Operation mode for the LED function Defines the disturbance length Maximum time for the definition of a disturbance Sequence type for LED 1

SeqTypeLED2

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 2

Table continues on next page

60 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 3 Local HMI


Values (Range) Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Unit Step Default Follow-S Description Sequence type for LED 3

Name SeqTypeLED3

SeqTypeLED4

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 4

SeqTypeLED5

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 5

SeqTypeLED6

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 6

SeqTypeLED7

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 7

SeqTypeLED8

Follow-S

sequence type for LED 8

SeqTypeLED9

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 9

SeqTypeLED10

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 10

SeqTypeLED11

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 11

Table continues on next page

61 Technical reference manual

Section 3 Local HMI


Name SeqTypeLED12 Values (Range) Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Unit Step Default Follow-S Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Sequence type for LED 12

SeqTypeLED13

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 13

SeqTypeLED14

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 14

SeqTypeLED15

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 15

62 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions

Section 4

Basic IED functions

About this chapter


This chapter presents functions that are basic to all 670 series IEDs. Typical functions in this category are time synchronization, self supervision and test mode.

4.1

Authorization
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED: local, through the local HMI remote, through the communication ports

4.1.1

Principle of operation
There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas of the IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 14. Be sure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required when writing particular data to the IED from PCM600. The meaning of the legends used in the table: R= Read W= Write - = No access rights

Table 14:
Access rights

Pre-defined user types


Guest R Super User R/W SPA Guest R System Operator R/W Protection Engineer R/W Design Engineer R/W User Administrator R

Basic setting possibilities (change setting group, control settings, limit supervision) Advanced setting possibilities (for example protection settings) Basic control possibilities (process control, no bypass) Table continues on next page

R R

R/W R/W

R R/W

R R/W

R/W R/W

R/W R/W

R R

63 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions


Access rights Advanced control possibilities (process control including interlock trigg) Basic command handling (for example clear LEDs, manual trigg) Advanced command handling (for example clear disturbance record) Basic configuration possibilities (I/ O-configuration in SMT) Advanced configuration possibilities (application configuration including SMT, GDE and CMT) File loading (database loading from XML-file) File dumping (database dumping to XML-file) File transfer (FTP file transfer) File transfer (limited) (FTP file transfer) File Transfer (SPA File Transfer) Database access for normal user User administration (user management FTP File Transfer) User administration (user management SPA File Transfer) System Operator R/W Protection Engineer R/W

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Guest R

Super User R/W

SPA Guest R/W

Design Engineer R/W

User Administrator R

R R R R

R/W R/W R/W R/W

R R R R

R/W R R R

R/W R/W R R

R/W R/W R/W R/W

R R/W R/W R/W

R R R -

R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W

R R R -

R/W R/W R/W R -

R/W R/W R/W R -

R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R -

R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W -

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED, there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI. Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names and passwords. The maximum of characters in a password is 18.

At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group to be able to write users, created in PCM600, to IED.

4.1.1.1

Authorization handling in the IED


At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED until a user has been created with the IED User Management..

64 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions

Once a user is created and downloaded to the IED, that user can perform a Log on, introducing the password assigned in the tool. If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: No user defined! If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main menu/Settings/General Settings/HMI/Screen/Display Timeout) elapses, the IED returns to Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 60 minutes at delivery. If there are one or more users created with the IED User Management and downloaded into the IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a Log on or when the user attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the Log on window will appear. The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the E key, the user can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and down arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the E key again. When it comes to password, upon pressing the E key, the following character will show up: $. The user must scroll for every letter in the password. After all the letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose OK and press the E key again. If everything is alright at a voluntary Log on, the local HMI returns to the Authorization screen. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a password protected setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the Log on has failed, then the Log on window opens again, until either the user makes it right or presses Cancel.

4.2
4.2.1

Self supervision with internal event list


Introduction
Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal system events, generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events are saved in an internal event list.

4.2.2

Principle of operation
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes: Normal micro-processor watchdog function. Checking of digitized measuring signals. Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

65 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

The self-supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI, from the Event Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system. Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the selfsupervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main menu/Diagnostics/Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/ General. The information from the self-supervision function is also available in the Event Viewer in PCM600. A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function of this output relay is an OR-function between the INT-FAIL signal see figure 24 and a couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 23

IEC04000520 V1 EN

Figure 23:

Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact

66 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions

IO fail IO stopped IO started

OR

Set Reset e.g. IOM2 Error e.g. IO (n) Error

e.g. BIM 1 Error

OR OR OR

LON ERROR FTF fatal error Watchdog RTE fatal error RTE Appl-fail RTE OK IEC61850 not ready RTCERROR RTC OK TIMESYNCHERROR Time reset SYNCH OK Settings changed Set Reset OR Set Reset 1 second pulse Set Reset OR

Internal FAIL

NUMFAIL Internal WARN OR NUMWARNING RTCERROR

TIMESYNCHERROR SETCHGD

en04000519-1.vsd
IEC04000519 V2 EN

Figure 24:

Software self-supervision, IES (IntErrorSign) function block

Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. The signals from the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions if required/desired. Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in the Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the time synchronization block TIME.

4.2.2.1

Internal signals
Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the IED. As they provide information about the internal status of the IED, they are also called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups. Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see Table 15. Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware configuration, see Table 16.

Explanations of internal signals are listed in Table 17.

67 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Table 15:
Name of signal FAIL WARNING NUMFAIL NUMWARNING RTCERROR

Self-supervision's standard internal signals


Description Internal Fail status Internal Warning status CPU module Fail status CPU module Warning status Real Time Clock status Time Synchronization status Runtime Execution Error status IEC 61850 Error status SW Watchdog Error status LON/Mip Device Error status Runtime Application Error status Settings changed Setting groups changed Fault Tolerant Filesystem status

TIMESYNCHERROR RTEERROR IEC61850ERROR WATCHDOG LMDERROR APPERROR SETCHGD SETGRPCHGD FTFERROR

Table 16:
Card PSM ADOne BIM BOM IOM MIM LDCM

Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals


Name of signal PSM-Error ADOne-Error BIM-Error BOM-Error IOM-Error MIM-Error LDCM-Error Description Power Supply Module Error status Analog In Module Error status Binary In Module Error status Binary Out Module Error status In/Out Module Error status Millampere Input Module Error status Line Differential Communication Error status

Table 17:
Name of signal FAIL

Explanations of internal signals


Reasons for activation This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; NUMFAIL, LMDERROR, WATCHDOG, APPERROR, RTEERROR, FTFERROR, or any of the HW dependent signals This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; RTCERROR, IEC61850ERROR, TIMESYNCHERROR This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; WATCHDOG, APPERROR, RTEERROR, FTFERROR This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; RTCERROR, IEC61850ERROR This signal will be active when there is a hardware error with the real time clock.

WARNING

NUMFAIL

NUMWARNING RTCERROR Table continues on next page 68

Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions


Name of signal TIMESYNCHERROR Reasons for activation This signal will be active when the source of the time synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make a time reset. This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do some actions with the application threads. The actions can be loading of settings or parameters for components, changing of setting groups, loading or unloading of application threads. This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not succeed in some actions like reading IEC 61850 configuration, startup, for example This signal will be activated when the terminal has been under too heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems background task is used for the measurements. LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an unrecoverable error state. This signal will be active if one or more of the application threads are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states can be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for example This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list if any settings are changed. This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list if any setting groups are changed. This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup file are corrupted and can not be recovered.

RTEERROR

IEC61850ERROR

WATCHDOG

LMDERROR APPERROR

SETCHGD SETGRPCHGD FTFERROR

4.2.2.2

Run-time model
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see Figure 25.
ADx ADx_Low
x1 u1 x2

ADx_High
x1 u1 x2

ADx Controller

IEC05000296-3-en.vsd
IEC05000296 V3 EN

Figure 25:

Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the IED.

69 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converter(s) with different amplification makes it possible to supervise the A/D converters under normal conditions where the signals from the two A/D converters should be identical. An alarm is given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it improves the dynamic performance of the A/D conversion. The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller function. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input signals. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is the validation part that checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected. Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU, that is the signal that has the most suitable signal level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times higher ADx_HI. When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of the two A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed and an alarm will be given for A/D converter failure. The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.

4.2.3

Function block

IEC09000787 V1 EN

Figure 26:

INTERRSIG function block

4.2.4

Output signals
Table 18:
Name FAIL WARNING CPUFAIL CPUWARN

INTERRSIG Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Internal fail Internal warning CPU fail CPU warning

4.2.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

70 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions Technical data


Table 19:
Data Recording manner List size

4.2.6

Self supervision with internal event list


Value Continuous, event controlled 1000 events, first in-first out

4.3
4.3.1

Time synchronization
Introduction
The time synchronization source selector is used to select a common source of absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a control and a protection system. This makes it possible to compare event and disturbance data between all IEDs in a station automation system. A common source shall be used for IED and merging unit when IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus communication is used. Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time synchronization source.

4.3.2
4.3.2.1

Principle of operation
General concepts Time definitions

The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time the clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the time gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to compensate for them.

Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

The time system is based on a software clock, which can be adjusted from external time sources and a hardware clock. The protection and control modules will be timed from a hardware clock, which runs independently from the software clock. See figure 27

71 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

External Synchronization sources Off LON SPA Min. pulse GPS SNTP DNP IRIG-B PPS TimeRegulator (Setting, see technical reference manual)

Time tagging and general synchronisation Protection and control functions

Communication

Events

SW-time Connected when GPS-time is used for differential protection

Off GPS IRIG-B PPS

TimeRegulator (fast or slow)

Synchronization for differential protection (ECHO-mode or GPS) HW-time

A/D converter

Diff.communication

Transducers* *IEC 61850-9-2


IEC08000287-2-en.vsd

IEC08000287 V2 EN

Figure 27:

Design of time system (clock synchronization)

All time tagging is performed by the software clock. When for example a status signal is changed in the protection system with the function based on free running hardware clock, the event is time tagged by the software clock when it reaches the event recorder. Thus the hardware clock can run independently. The echo mode for the differential protection is based on the hardware clock. Thus, there is no need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock. The synchronization of the hardware clock and the software clock is necessary only when GPS or IRIG B 00X with optical fibre, IEEE 1344 is used for differential protection. The two clock systems are synchronized by a special clock synchronization unit with two modes, fast and slow. A special feature, an automatic fast clock time regulator is used. The automatic fast mode makes the synchronization time as short as possible during start up or at interruptions/ disturbances in the GPS timing. The setting fast or slow is also available on the local HMI. If a GPS clock is used for 670 series IEDs other than line differential RED670, the hardware and software clocks are not synchronized

72 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions


Fast clock synchronization mode
At startup and after interruptions in the GPS or IRIG B time signal, the clock deviation between the GPS time and the internal differential time system can be substantial. A new startup is also required after for example maintenance of the auxiliary voltage system. When the time difference is >16s, the differential function is blocked and the time regulator for the hardware clock automatically uses a fast mode to synchronize the clock systems. The time adjustment is made with an exponential function, that is, big time adjustment steps in the beginning, then smaller steps until a time deviation between the GPS time and the differential time system of >16s has been reached. Then the differential function is enabled and the synchronization remains in fast mode or switches to slow mode, depending on the setting.

Slow clock synchronization mode


During normal service, a setting with slow synchronization mode is normally used, which prevents the hardware clock to make too big time steps, >16s, emanating from the differential protection requirement of correct timing.

Synchronization principle

From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A function is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.

Synchronization from a higher level

Function

Optional synchronization of modules at a lower level

IEC09000342-1-en.vsd
IEC09000342 V1 EN

Figure 28:

Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the synchronization decreases as well. A function can have several potential sources of synchronization, with different maximum errors. This gives the function the possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:

73 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

The maximum error of the last used synchronization message The time since the last used synchronization message The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.

4.3.2.2

Real-time clock (RTC) operation


The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.

Real-time clock at power off

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed realtime clock that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time the time will be lost completely. At IED startup, the internal time is free running. If the RTC is still alive since the last up time, the time in the IED will be accurate (may drift 35 ppm), but if the RTC power has been lost during power off (will happen after 5 days), the IED time will start at 1970-01-01. For more information, please refer to section "Time synchronization startup procedure" and section "Binary synchronization example".

Real-time clock at startup

Time synchronization startup procedure

The first message that contains the full time (as for instance LON, SNTP and GPS) gives an accurate time to the IED. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three things happens with each of the coming synchronization messages configured as fine: If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, has an offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly for synchronization, that is, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero offset at the next coming time message. If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other messages, a spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message. If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following message also has a large offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in the synchronization message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 100 milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into a safe state and the clock is set to the correct time. If the offset is lower than the threshold, the clock is adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset is removed. With an adjustment of 1000 ppm, it takes 100 seconds or 1.7 minutes to remove an offset of 100 milliseconds.

Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and only an offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.

74 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions


Rate accuracy

In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is constant. Normally, it takes 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.

Time-out on synchronization sources

All synchronization interfaces has a time-out and a configured interface must receive time-messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR). Normally, the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.

4.3.2.3

Synchronization alternatives
Three main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. The synchronization message is applied: via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message including date and time as a minute pulse connected to a binary input via GPS

The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing time in the IEDs.

Synchronization via SNTP

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an IED to an SNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet network that connects IEDs together in an IEC 61850 network. For SNTP to operate properly, there must be an SNTP server present, preferably in the same station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1 ms accuracy for binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server. SNTP server requirements The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5 switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not recommended.

Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM)

On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages are sent. Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, that is, year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds. Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.

75 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

IEC60870-5-103 is not used to synchronize the IED, but instead the offset between the local time in the IED and the time received from 103 is added to all times (in events and so on) sent via 103. In this way the IED acts as if it is synchronized from various 103 sessions at the same time. Actually, there is a local time for each 103 session. The SLM module is located on the AD conversion Module (ADM).

Synchronization via Built-in-GPS

The built in GPS clock modules receives and decodes time information from the global positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time synchronization Module (GTM).

Synchronization via binary input

The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be generated from, for example station master clock. If the station master clock is not synchronized from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the substation. Both positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This signal is also considered as a fine time synchronization signal. The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED. The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input. If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation and if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minute pulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minute pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in the IED. The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As only the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after the last flank. Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency. Pulse data: Period time (a) should be 60 seconds. Pulse length (b): Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms. Maximum pulse length is optional.

Amplitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".

Deviations in the period time larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.

76 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions

a b

c
en05000251.vsd
IEC05000251 V1 EN

Figure 29:

Binary minute pulses

The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given. If contact bounce occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce. If the minute pulses are perfect, for example, it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses, contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effecting the system. If contact bounce occurs more than 50 ms, for example, it is less than 59950 ms between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse will not be accepted. Binary synchronization example An IED is configured to use only binary input, and a valid binary input is applied to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time and the minute pulse is used to synchronize the IED thereafter. The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the previous minute pulse, so the first minute pulse is not used at all. The second minute pulse will probably be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time and will reset the time so that the fourth minute pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three minutes, the time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or the RTC backup still keeps the time since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed for instance for an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum the error rate in the internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse automatically is rejected. The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will either synchronize the time, if the time offset is more than 100 ms, or adjust the time, if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought to a safe state before the time is set. If the time is adjusted, the time will reach its destination within 1.7 minutes. Synchronization via IRIG-B The IRIG-B interface to the IED supplies two possible synchronization methods, IRIG-B and PPS.

77 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local time of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there numbers stating if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted. To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG-B module, one galvanic BNC connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be supplied via the galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via either the galvanic interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means a number in the range of 1-7. 00 means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIGB module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. 12 means that a 1 kHz modulation is used. In this case the information must go into the module via the BNC connector. If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information of the year. If x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time within the year, and year information has to come from PCM600 or local HMI. The IRIG-B module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the timezone. It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG-B module. In this case, send also the local time in the messages, as this local time plus the TZ Offset supplied in the message equals UTC at all times. PPS An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG-B module. The PPS signal is a transition from dark to light, that occurs 1 second +/- 2 s after another PPS signal. The allowed jitter is <2 s. If jitter is >2 s a TSYNCERR signal will be generated.

4.3.2.4

Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization


For the time synchronization of the process bus communication (IEC 61850-9-2LE protocol) an optical PPS or IRIG-B signal can be used. This signal should emanate from either an external GPS clock, or from the merging unit. An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG-B module.

78 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions Function block


TIMEERR TSYNCERR RTCERR IEC05000425-2-en.vsd
IEC05000425 V2 EN

4.3.3

Figure 30:

TIMEERR function block

4.3.4

Output signals
Table 20:
Name TSYNCERR RTCERR

TIMEERR Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Time synchronization error Real time clock error

4.3.5

Setting parameters
Path in the local HMI is located under Main menu/Setting/Time Path in PCM600 is located under Main menu/Settings/Time/Synchronization

Table 21:
Name CoarseSyncSrc

TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) Off SPA LON SNTP DNP Off SPA LON BIN GPS GPS+SPA GPS+LON GPS+BIN SNTP GPS+SNTP IRIG-B GPS+IRIG-B PPS Off SNTP-Server Slow Fast Unit Step Default Off Description Coarse time synchronization source

FineSyncSource

Off

Fine time synchronization source

SyncMaster TimeAdjustRate

Off Fast

Activate IED as synchronization master Adjust rate for time synchronization

Table continues on next page

79 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions


Name HWSyncSrc Values (Range) Off GPS IRIG-B PPS NoSynch Synch Class T5 (1us) Class T4 (4us) Unspecified Unit Step Default Off Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Hardware time synchronization source

AppSynch SyncAccLevel

NoSynch Unspecified

Time synchronization mode for application Wanted time synchronization accuracy

Table 22:
Name ModulePosition BinaryInput BinDetection

SYNCHBIN Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) 3 - 16 1 - 16 PositiveEdge NegativeEdge Unit Step 1 1 Default 3 1 PositiveEdge Description Hardware position of IO module for time synchronization Binary input number for time synchronization Positive or negative edge detection

Table 23:
Name ServerIP-Add RedServIP-Add

SYNCHSNTP Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) 0 - 18 0 - 18 Unit IP Address IP Address Step 1 1 Default 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Description Server IP-address Redundant server IP-address

80 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions

Table 24:
Name MonthInYear

DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) January February March April May June July August September October November December Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Last First Second Third Fourth 0 - 172800 Unit Step Default March Description Month in year when daylight time starts

DayInWeek

Sunday

Day in week when daylight time starts

WeekInMonth

Last

Week in month when daylight time starts

UTCTimeOfDay

3600

UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight time starts

Table 25:
Name MonthInYear

DSTEND Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) January February March April May June July August September October November December Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Last First Second Third Fourth 0 - 172800 Unit Step Default October Description Month in year when daylight time ends

DayInWeek

Sunday

Day in week when daylight time ends

WeekInMonth

Last

Week in month when daylight time ends

UTCTimeOfDay

3600

UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight time ends

81 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Table 26:
Name NoHalfHourUTC

TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) -24 - 24 Unit Step 1 Default 0 Description Number of half-hours from UTC

Table 27:
Name SynchType TimeDomain Encoding

SYNCHIRIG-B Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) BNC Opto LocalTime UTC IRIG-B 1344 1344TZ MinusTZ PlusTZ Unit Step Default Opto LocalTime IRIG-B Description Type of synchronization Time domain Type of encoding

TimeZoneAs1344

PlusTZ

Time zone as in 1344 standard

4.3.6

Technical data
Table 28:
Function Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse synchronization), events and sampled measurement values Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement values

Time synchronization, time tagging


Value 1 ms 1.0 ms typically 1.0 ms typically

4.4
4.4.1

Parameter setting groups


Introduction
Use the six different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different power system conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets, either from the local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can cope with a variety of power system scenarios.

4.4.2

Principle of operation
Parameter setting groups ActiveGroup function has six functional inputs, each corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these inputs changes the active setting group. Seven functional output signals are available for configuration purposes, so that up to date information on the active setting group is always available.

82 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions

A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating the corresponding input to the ActiveGroup function block. Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary inputs in the IED. To do this PCM600 must be used. The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms. More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group two are set to activate, group two will be the one activated. Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a pulse. The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to switch between.
ACTIVATE GROUP 6 ACTIVATE GROUP 5 ACTIVATE GROUP 4 ACTIVATE GROUP 3 ACTIVATE GROUP 2 +RL2 ACTIVATE GROUP 1 IOx-Bly1 IOx-Bly2 IOx-Bly3 IOx-Bly4 IOx-Bly5 IOx-Bly6 ActiveGroup ACTGRP1 GRP1 ACTGRP2 ACTGRP3 ACTGRP4 ACTGRP5 ACTGRP6 GRP2 GRP3 GRP4 GRP5 GRP6 SETCHGD

en05000119.vsd
IEC05000119 V2 EN

Figure 31:

Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which group that is active. SETGRPS function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will be shown on the Parameter Setting Tool.

83 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions 4.4.3 Function block


ActiveGroup ACTGRP1 GRP1 ACTGRP2 GRP2 ACTGRP3 GRP3 ACTGRP4 GRP4 ACTGRP5 GRP5 ACTGRP6 GRP6 SETCHGD IEC05000433_2_en.vsd
IEC05000433 V2 EN

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Figure 32:

ActiveGroup function block

SETGRPS MAXSETGR IEC05000716_2_en.vsd


IEC05000716 V2 EN

Figure 33:

SETGRPS function block

4.4.4

Input and output signals


Table 29:
Name ACTGRP1 ACTGRP2 ACTGRP3 ACTGRP4 ACTGRP5 ACTGRP6

ActiveGroup Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Selects setting group 1 as active Selects setting group 2 as active Selects setting group 3 as active Selects setting group 4 as active Selects setting group 5 as active Selects setting group 6 as active

Table 30:
Name GRP1 GRP2 GRP3 GRP4 GRP5 GRP6 SETCHGD

ActiveGroup Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Setting group 1 is active Setting group 2 is active Setting group 3 is active Setting group 4 is active Setting group 5 is active Setting group 6 is active Pulse when setting changed

84 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions Setting parameters

4.4.5
Table 31:
Name t

ActiveGroup Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) 0.0 - 10.0 Unit s Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Description Pulse length of pulse when setting changed

Table 32:
Name ActiveSetGrp

SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) SettingGroup1 SettingGroup2 SettingGroup3 SettingGroup4 SettingGroup5 SettingGroup6 1-6 Unit Step Default SettingGroup1 Description ActiveSettingGroup

MAXSETGR

No

Max number of setting groups 1-6

4.5
4.5.1

ChangeLock function CHNGLCK


Introduction
Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is used to block further changes to the IED configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to block inadvertent IED configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.

4.5.2

Principle of operation
The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT. The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED: Monitoring Reading events Resetting events Reading disturbance data Clear disturbances Reset LEDs Reset counters and other runtime component states Control operations Set system time Enter and exit from test mode Change of active setting group

85 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
Binary input 1 0 Function Activated Deactivated

4.5.3

Function block
CHNGLCK LOCK IEC09000946-1-en.vsd
IEC09000946 V1 EN

Figure 34:

CHNGLCK function block

4.5.4

Input and output signals


Table 33:
Name LOCK

CHNGLCK Input signals


Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Parameter change lock

4.5.5
Table 34:
Name Operation

Setting parameters
CHNGLCK Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) LockHMI and Com LockHMI, EnableCom EnableHMI, LockCom Unit Step Default LockHMI and Com Description Operation mode of change lock

4.6
4.6.1

Test mode functionality TEST


Introduction
When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE is activated, all the functions in the IED are automatically blocked. It is then possible to unblock every function(s) individually from the local HMI to perform required tests. When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes normal operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed and later restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection functions blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will

86 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions

be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus mistakes are avoided.

4.6.2

Principle of operation
Put the IED into test mode to test functions in the IED. Set the IED in test mode by configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE. setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under Main menu/TEST/IED test mode.

While the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is activated. The outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the Test mode: On state input from configuration (OUTPUT output is activated) or setting from local HMI (SETTING output is activated). While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions are blocked. Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality and event signalling. Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (output ACTIVE is activated), see example in figure 35. When leaving the test mode, that is entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes are possible. The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the blockings were not reset. The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no outputs will be activated. When a binary input is used to set the IED in test mode and a parameter, that requires restart of the application, is changed, the IED will re-enter test mode and all functions will be blocked, also functions that were unblocked before the change. During the reentering to test mode, all functions will be temporarily unblocked for a short time, which might lead to unwanted operations. This is only valid if the IED is put in TEST mode by a binary input, not by local HMI. The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions when a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30) can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TESTMODE function block. Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block. A typical example from the undervoltage function is shown in figure 35.
87 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a maintenance test.

Disconnection

Normal voltage U1< U2<

tBlkUV1 < t1,t1Min IntBlkStVal1 IntBlkStVal2 Time Block step 1 Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
IEC05000466 V1 EN

tBlkUV2 < t2,t2Min

Figure 35:

Example of blocking the time delayed undervoltage protection function.

4.6.3

Function block
TESTMODE INPUT ACTIVE OUTPUT SETTING NOEVENT

IEC09000219-1.vsd
IEC09000219 V1 EN

Figure 36:

TESTMODE function block

88 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions Input and output signals


Table 35:
Name INPUT

4.6.4

TESTMODE Input signals


Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Sets terminal in test mode when active

Table 36:
Name ACTIVE OUTPUT SETTING NOEVENT

TESTMODE Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Terminal in test mode when active Test input is active Test mode setting is (On) or not (Off) Event disabled during testmode

4.6.5
Table 37:
Name TestMode EventDisable CmdTestBit

Setting parameters
TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Off On Off On Unit Step Default Off Off Off Description Test mode in operation (On) or not (Off) Event disable during testmode Command bit for test required or not during testmode

4.7
4.7.1

IED identifiers
Introduction
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country. Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

89 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions 4.7.2


Table 38:
Name StationName StationNumber ObjectName ObjectNumber UnitName UnitNumber

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Setting parameters
TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 0 - 18 0 - 99999 0 - 18 0 - 99999 0 - 18 0 - 99999 Unit Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default Station name 0 Object name 0 Unit name 0 Description Station name Station number Object name Object number Unit name Unit number

4.8
4.8.1

Product information
Introduction
The Product identifiers function identifies the IED. The function has seven pre-set, settings that are unchangeable but nevertheless very important: IEDProdType ProductDef FirmwareVer SerialNo OrderingNo ProductionDate

The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product identifiers They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance).

4.8.2

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

4.8.3

Factory defined settings


The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are found in the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product identifiers The following identifiers are available:

90 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions

IEDProdType Describes the type of the IED (like REL, REC or RET). Example: REL670 Describes the firmware version. Example: 1.4.51 Firmware versions numbers are running independently from the release production numbers. For every release numbers (like 1.5.0.17) there can be one or more firmware versions, depending on the small issues corrected in between releases. Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128 (meaning line protection). FirmwareVer

IEDMainFunType

SerialNo OrderingNo ProductionDate

4.9
4.9.1

Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI


Introduction
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function is used within the Application Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the application manual to get information about how binary inputs are brought in for one IED configuration.

4.9.2

Principle of operation
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function , see figure 37, receives its inputs from the real (hardware) binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, BI1 to BI10. The inputs and outputs, as well as the whole block, can be given a user defined name. These names will be represented in SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and SMBI function. The input/ output user defined name will also appear on the respective output/input signal.

91 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions 4.9.3 Function block


SMBI ^VIN1 ^VIN2 ^VIN3 ^VIN4 ^VIN5 ^VIN6 ^VIN7 ^VIN8 ^VIN9 ^VIN10 ^BI1 ^BI2 ^BI3 ^BI4 ^BI5 ^BI6 ^BI7 ^BI8 ^BI9 ^BI10 IEC05000434-2-en.vsd
IEC05000434 V2 EN

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Figure 37:

SMBI function block

4.9.4

Input and output signals


Table 39:
Name VIn1 VIn2 VIn3 VIn4 VIn5 VIn6 VIn7 VIn8 VIn9 VIn10

SMBI Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description SMT Connect input SMT Connect input SMT Connect input SMT Connect input SMT Connect input SMT Connect input SMT Connect input SMT Connect input SMT Connect input SMT Connect input

Table 40:
Name BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10

SMBI Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Binary input 1 Binary input 2 Binary input 3 Binary input 4 Binary input 5 Binary input 6 Binary input 7 Binary input 8 Binary input 9 Binary input 10

92 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions

4.10
4.10.1

Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO


Introduction
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function is used within the Application Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the application manual to get information about how binary inputs are sent from one IED configuration.

4.10.2

Principle of operation
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function , see figure 38, receives logical signal from the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). The inputs in SMBO are BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the whole function block, can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and the SMBO. It is important that SMBO inputs are connected when SMBOs are connected to physical outputs through the Signal Matrix Tool. If SMBOs are connected (in SMT) but their inputs not, all the physical outputs will be set by default. This might cause malfunction of primary equipment and/or injury to personnel.

4.10.3

Function block
SMBO BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 ^BO1 ^BO2 ^BO3 ^BO4 ^BO5 ^BO6 ^BO7 ^BO8 ^BO9 ^BO10 IEC05000439-2-en.vsd
IEC05000439 V2 EN

Figure 38:

SMBO function block

93 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions 4.10.4 Input and output signals


Table 41:
Name BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

SMBO Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO2 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO3 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO4 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO5 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO6 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO7 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO8 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO9 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO10 in Signal Matrix Tool

4.11
4.11.1

Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI


Introduction
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function is used within the Application Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the application manual to get information about how milliamp (mA) inputs are brought in for one IED configuration.

4.11.2

Principle of operation
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function, see figure 39, receives its inputs from the real (hardware) mA inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its analog outputs, named AI1 to AI6. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be tag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT. The outputs on SMMI are normally connected to the IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function for further use of the mA signals.

94 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions Function block


SMMI ^VIN1 ^VIN2 ^VIN3 ^VIN4 ^VIN5 ^VIN6 AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6 IEC05000440-2-en.vsd
IEC05000440 V2 EN

4.11.3

Figure 39:

SMMI function block

4.11.4

Input and output signals


Table 42:
Name VIn1 VIn2 VIn3 VIn4 VIn5 VIn6

SMMI Input signals


Type REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description SMT connected milliampere input SMT connected milliampere input SMT connected milliampere input SMT connected milliampere input SMT connected milliampere input SMT connected milliampere input

Table 43:
Name AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6

SMMI Output signals


Type REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL Description Analog milliampere input 1 Analog milliampere input 2 Analog milliampere input 3 Analog milliampere input 4 Analog milliampere input 5 Analog milliampere input 6

4.12
4.12.1

Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI


Introduction
Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function, processes the analog signals connected to it and gives information about all aspects of the analog signals connected, like the RMS value, phase angle, frequency, harmonic content, sequence components and so on. This information is

95 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

then used by the respective functions in ACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring). The SMAI function is used within PCM600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool or the Application Configuration tool.

4.12.2

Principle of operation
Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value), either voltage or current, see figure 41 and figure 42. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. 244 values in total). The BLOCK input will reset all outputs to 0. The output signal AI1 to AI4 are direct output of the, in SMT, connected input to GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN, x=1-12. AIN is always the neutral current, calculated residual sum or the signal connected to GRPxN. Note that function block will always calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if the input is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few exceptions shall always be connected to AI3P.

4.12.3

Frequency values
The frequency functions includes a functionality based on level of positive sequence voltage, IntBlockLevel, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid or not. If positive sequence voltage is lower than IntBlockLevel the function is blocked. IntBlockLevel, is set in % of UBase/3 If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph at least two of the inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be connected in order to calculate positive sequence voltage. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be connected in order to calculate positive sequence voltage. If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph the user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 to the same voltage input as shown in figure 40 to make SMAI calculating a positive sequence voltage (that is input voltage/3).

IEC10000060-1-en.vsd
IEC10000060 V1 EN

Figure 40:
96

Connection example

Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions

The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N. If only one phase-earth voltage is available, the same type of connection can be used but the SMAI ConnectionType setting must still be Ph-Ph and this has to be accounted for when setting IntBlockLevel. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N and the same voltage is connected to all three SMAI inputs, the positive sequence voltage will be zero and the frequency functions will not work properly.

The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be used for Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF), Underfrequency protection (SAPTUF) and Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) due to that all other information except frequency and positive sequence voltage might be wrongly calculated.

4.12.4

Function block
SMAI1 BLOCK DFTSPFC ^GRP1L1 ^GRP1L2 ^GRP1L3 ^GRP1N TYPE SPFCOUT AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN IEC05000705-2-en.vsd
IEC05000705 V2 EN

Figure 41:
SMAI2 BLOCK ^GRP2L1 ^GRP2L2 ^GRP2L3 ^GRP2N TYPE

SMAI1 function block

AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN IEC07000130-2-en.vsd

IEC07000130 V2 EN

Figure 42:

SMAI2 function block

97 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions 4.12.5 Input and output signals


Table 44:
Name BLOCK DFTSPFC GRP1L1 GRP1L2 GRP1L3 GRP1N

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

SMAI1 Input signals


Type BOOLEAN REAL STRING STRING STRING STRING Default 0 20.0 Description Block group 1 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT calculation Sample input to be used for group 1 phase L1 calculations Sample input to be used for group 1 phase L2 calculations Sample input to be used for group 1 phase L3 calculations Sample input to be used for group 1 residual calculations

Table 45:
Name SPFCOUT AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN

SMAI1 Output signals


Type REAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL Description Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT reference function Group 1 analog input 3-phase group Group 1 analog input 1 Group 1 analog input 2 Group 1 analog input 3 Group 1 analog input 4 Group 1 analog input residual for disturbance recorder

Table 46:
Name BLOCK GRP2L1 GRP2L2 GRP2L3 GRP2N

SMAI2 Input signals


Type BOOLEAN STRING STRING STRING STRING Default 0 Description Block group 2 Sample input to be used for group 2 phase L1 calculations Sample input to be used for group 2 phase L2 calculations Sample input to be used for group 2 phase L3 calculations Sample input to be used for group 2 residual calculations

98 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions

Table 47:
Name AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN

SMAI2 Output signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL Description Group 2 analog input 3-phase group Group 2 analog input 1 Group 2 analog input 2 Group 2 analog input 3 Group 2 analog input 4 Group 2 analog input residual for disturbance recorder

4.12.6

Setting parameters
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal nominal frequency DFT reference is then the reference.

Table 48:
Name DFTRefExtOut

SMAI1 Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref Ph-N Ph-Ph 1-2 Unit Step Default InternalDFTRef Description DFT reference for external output

DFTReference

InternalDFTRef

DFT reference

ConnectionType TYPE

Ch

Ph-N 1

Input connection type 1=Voltage, 2=Current

99 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Table 49:
Name Negation

SMAI1 Non group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) Off NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N 5 - 200 0.05 - 2000.00 Unit Step Default Off Description Negation

MinValFreqMeas UBase

% kV

1 0.05

10 400.00

Limit for frequency calculation in % of UBase Base voltage

Table 50:
Name DFTReference

SMAI2 Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref Ph-N Ph-Ph 1-2 Unit Step Default InternalDFTRef Description DFT reference

ConnectionType TYPE

Ch

Ph-N 1

Input connection type 1=Voltage, 2=Current

Table 51:
Name Negation

SMAI2 Non group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) Off NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N 5 - 200 0.05 - 2000.00 Unit Step Default Off Description Negation

MinValFreqMeas UBase

% kV

1 0.05

10 400.00

Limit for frequency calculation in % of UBase Base voltage

4.13

Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM

100 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions Introduction


Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of three-phase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.

4.13.1

4.13.2

Principle of operation
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI). In the same way, the BLOCK input will reset all the outputs of the function to 0.

4.13.3

Function block
3PHSUM BLOCK DFTSPFC G1AI3P* G2AI3P* AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 IEC05000441-2-en.vsd
IEC05000441 V2 EN

Figure 43:

3PHSUM function block

4.13.4

Input and output signals


Table 52:
Name BLOCK DFTSPFC G1AI3P G2AI3P

3PHSUM Input signals


Type BOOLEAN REAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL Default 0 0 Description Block Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT calculation Group 1 analog input 3-phase group Group 2 analog input 3-phase group

Table 53:
Name AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4

3PHSUM Output signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL Description Group analog input 3-phase group Group 1 analog input Group 2 analog input Group 3 analog input Group 4 analog input

101 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions 4.13.5 Setting parameters

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

Table 54:
Name SummationType

3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) Group1+Group2 Group1-Group2 Group2-Group1 -(Group1+Group2) InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 External DFT ref Unit Step Default Group1+Group2 Description Summation type

DFTReference

InternalDFTRef

DFT reference

Table 55:
Name FreqMeasMinVal UBase

3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 5 - 200 0.05 - 2000.00 Unit % kV Step 1 0.05 Default 10 400.00 Description Amplitude limit for frequency calculation in % of Ubase Base voltage

4.14
4.14.1

Authority status ATHSTAT


Introduction
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function is an indication function block for user logon activity.

4.14.2

Principle of operation
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED and the user authorization: the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was blocked (the output USRBLKED) the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or LOGGEDON) is activated. The output can for example, be connected on Event (EVENT) function block for LON/SPA.The signals are also available on IEC 61850 station bus.

102 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions Function block


ATHSTAT USRBLKED LOGGEDON IEC06000503-2-en.vsd
IEC06000503 V2 EN

4.14.3

Figure 44:

ATHSTAT function block

4.14.4

Output signals
Table 56:
Name USRBLKED LOGGEDON

ATHSTAT Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description At least one user is blocked by invalid password At least one user is logged on

4.14.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

4.15
4.15.1

Denial of service DOS


Introduction
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSOEMAB and DOSOEMCD) are designed to limit overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic. The communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that too heavy network loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.

4.15.2

Principle of operation
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSOEMAB and DOSOEMCD) measures the IED load from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs control and protection functionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following outputs: LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication

103 Technical reference manual

Section 4 Basic IED functions 4.15.3 Function blocks


DOSFRNT LINKUP WARNING ALARM IEC09000749-1-en.vsd
IEC09000749 V1 EN

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Figure 45:

DOSFRNT function block

DOSOEMAB LINKUP WARNING ALARM IEC09000750-1-en.vsd


IEC09000750 V1 EN

Figure 46:

DOSOEMAB function block

DOSOEMCD LINKUP WARNING ALARM IEC09000751-1-en.vsd


IEC09000751 V1 EN

Figure 47:

DOSOEMCD function block

4.15.4

Signals
Table 57:
Name LINKUP WARNING ALARM

DOSFRNT Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Ethernet link status Frame rate is higher than normal state Frame rate is higher than throttle state

Table 58:
Name LINKUP WARNING ALARM

DOSOEMAB Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Ethernet link status Frame rate is higher than normal state Frame rate is higher than throttle state

Table 59:
Name LINKUP WARNING ALARM 104

DOSOEMCD Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Ethernet link status Frame rate is higher than normal state Frame rate is higher than throttle state

Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 4 Basic IED functions Settings


The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

4.15.5

105 Technical reference manual

106

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 5 Differential protection

Section 5

Differential protection

About this chapter


This chapter describes the measuring principles, functions and parameters used in differential protection.

5.1
5.1.1

1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF


Identification
Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number

1Ph High impedance differential protection

HZPDIF

Id
SYMBOL-CC V2 EN

87

5.1.2

Introduction
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection (HZPDIF) function can be used when the involved CT cores have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing characteristics. It utilizes an external CT current summation by wiring, a series resistor, and a voltage dependent resistor which are mounted externally connected to the IED. HZPDIF can be used to protect tee-feeders or busbars. Six single phase function blocks are available to allow application for two three-phase zones busbar protection.

5.1.3

Principle of operation
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection (HZPDIF) function is based on one current input with external stabilizing resistor and voltage dependent resistor. Three functions can be used to provide a three phase differential protection function. The stabilizing resistor value is calculated from the IED function operating value UR calculated to achieve through fault stability. The supplied stabilizing resistor has a link to allow setting of the correct resistance value . See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.

107 Technical reference manual

Section 5 Differential protection


5.1.3.1 Logic diagram

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance differential protection function HZPDIF, see figure 48. It is a simple one step IED function with an additional lower alarm level. By activating inputs, the HZPDIF function can either be blocked completely, or only the trip output.

IEC05000301 V1 EN

Figure 48:

Logic diagram for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF

5.1.4

Function block
HZPDIF ISI* BLOCK BLKTR TRIP ALARM MEASVOLT IEC05000363-2-en.vsd
IEC05000363 V2 EN

Figure 49:

HZPDIF function block

5.1.5

Input and output signals


Table 60:
Name ISI BLOCK BLKTR

HZPDIF Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 Description Group signal for current input Block of function Block of trip

108 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 5 Differential protection

Table 61:
Name TRIP ALARM MEASVOLT

HZPDIF Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL Description Trip signal Alarm signal Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side

5.1.6
Table 62:
Name Operation U>Alarm tAlarm U>Trip SeriesResistor

Setting parameters
HZPDIF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 2 - 500 0.000 - 60.000 5 - 900 10 - 20000 Unit V s V ohm Step 1 0.001 1 1 Default Off 10 5.000 100 250 Description Operation Off / On Alarm voltage level in volts on CT secondary side Time delay to activate alarm Operate voltage level in volts on CT secondary side Value of series resistor in Ohms

5.1.7

Technical data
Table 63:
Function Operate voltage Reset ratio Maximum continuous power Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time

HZPDIF technical data


Range or value (20-400) V I=U/R >95% U>Trip2/SeriesResistor 200 W Accuracy 1.0% of Ir -

10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud 105 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Ud 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud

109 Technical reference manual

110

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

Section 6

Current protection

About this chapter


This chapter describes current protection functions. These include functions like Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection, Four step phase overcurrent protection, Pole discordance protection and Residual overcurrent protection.

6.1

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3phase output PHPIOC


Function description Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output IEC 61850 identification PHPIOC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 50

3I>>
SYMBOL-Z V1 EN

6.1.1

Introduction
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.

6.1.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the fundamental frequency components, as well as sampled values of each phase current. These phase current values are fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output function PHPIOC. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function (IP>>). If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRLn (n=1,2,3) for this phase and the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases. There is an operation mode (OpMode) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the parameter is set to 1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the parameter is set to 2 out of 3 at least two phase signals must be activated for trip.

111 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current (StValMult) via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents. PHPIOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.

6.1.3

Function block
PHPIOC I3P* BLOCK ENMULT TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 IEC04000391-2-en.vsd
IEC04000391 V2 EN

Figure 50:

PHPIOC function block

6.1.4

Input and output signals


Table 64:
Name I3P BLOCK ENMULT

PHPIOC Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 Description Three phase current Block of function Enable current start value multiplier

Table 65:
Name TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3

PHPIOC Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Trip signal from any phase Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3

6.1.5
Table 66:
Name Operation IBase OpMode IP>>

Setting parameters
PHPIOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 2 out of 3 1 out of 3 1 - 2500 Unit A %IB Step 1 1 Default Off 3000 1 out of 3 200 Description Operation Off / On Base current Select operation mode 2-out of 3 / 1-out of 3 Operate phase current level in % of IBase

112 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

Table 67:
Name StValMult

PHPIOC Group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 0.5 - 5.0 Unit Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Description Multiplier for operate current level

6.1.6

Technical data
Table 68:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Dynamic overreach

PHPIOC technical data


Range or value (1-2500)% of lBase > 95% 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset 35 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Iset 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset < 5% at t = 100 ms Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir -

6.2

Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC


Function description Four step phase overcurrent protection IEC 61850 identification OC4PTOC
4 4

IEC 60617 identification


3I> alt

ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 51/67

TOC-REVA V1 EN

6.2.1

Introduction
The four step phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC has an inverse or definite time delay independent for step 1 and 4 separately. Step 2 and 3 are always definite time delayed. All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an optional user defined time characteristic. The directional function is voltage polarized with memory. The function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps. A 2nd harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.
113

Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection 6.2.2 Principle of operation

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

The Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC is divided into four different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3 and 4, an operation mode is set by DirModex: Off/Non-directional/Forward/ Reverse. The protection design can be decomposed in four parts: The direction element The harmonic Restraint Blocking function The four step over current function The mode selection If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter DirModex shall be left to default value, Non-directional.

faultState I3P U3P

Direction Element

dirPh1Flt dirPh2Flt dirPh3Flt

4 step over current element One element for each step

faultState

START

TRIP

I3P

Harmonic Restraint Element

harmRestrBlock

enableDir Mode Selection enableStep1-4 DirectionalMode1-4

en05000740.vsd
IEC05000740 V1 EN

Figure 51:

Functional overview of OC4PTOC

114 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

A common setting for all steps, StartPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3. The sampled analogue phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function block. Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output function OC4PTOC, it is possible to select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to select either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS). If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS option is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in addition to the fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from the current DC component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected current values are fed to OC4PTOC. In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If a phase current is larger than the set operation current, outputs START, STx, STL1, STL2 and STL3 are, without delay, activated. Output signals STL1, STL2 and STL3 are common for all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the activation. The START signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall be noted that the selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the operation of directional part of OC4PTOC. Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the local HMI for OC4PTOC function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in service operational checking of the function. A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain current level. The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as current angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%). The following combinations are used.
Phase-phase short circuit:

U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2
EQUATION1449 V1 EN

I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
(Equation 1)

U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3
EQUATION1450 V1 EN

I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
(Equation 2)

Table continues on next page 115 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1
EQUATION1451 V1 EN

I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
(Equation 3)

Phase-earth short circuit:

U refL1 = U L1
EQUATION1452 V1 EN

I dirL1 = I L1
(Equation 4)

U refL 2 = U L 2
EQUATION1453 V1 EN

I dirL 2 = I L 2
(Equation 5)

U refL 3 = U L 3
EQUATION1454 V1 EN

I dirL 3 = I L 3
(Equation 6)

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 4% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults. For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination. The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored. After 100 ms, the following occurs: If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals in. If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures. If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the reverse direction remains in operation.

If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function and an angle window AngleROA.

116 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

Reverse

Uref RCA

ROA

ROA

Forward

Idir

en05000745.vsd
IEC05000745 V1 EN

Figure 52:

Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

The default value of AngleRCA is 65. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle sector from AngleRCA for directional borders. A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set: IminOpPhSel. If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section "Inverse characteristics". All four steps in OC4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The binary input BLKSTx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.

117 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

|IOP| Ix>

Characteristx=DefTime
a b AND a>b

AND

OR

tx

TRx

STx

BLKSTx BLOCK

txmin
AND

Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse DirModex=Off DirModex=Non-directional DirModex=Forward DirModex=Reverse FORWARD_Int


AND OR OR

STAGEx_DIR_Int

REVERSE_Int

AND

IEC12000008-1-en.vsd IEC12000008-1-en.vsd
IEC12000008 V1 EN

Figure 53:

Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC

Different types of reset time can be selected as described in section "Inverse characteristics". There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (IxMult x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching state. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

118 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection Function block


OC4PTOC I3P* U3P* BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 TRIP TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 TR3L1 TR3L2 TR3L3 TR4L1 TR4L2 TR4L3 START ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 STL1 STL2 STL3 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 ST3L1 ST3L2 ST3L3 ST4L1 ST4L2 ST4L3 2NDHARM DIRL1 DIRL2 DIRL3 IEC06000187-2-en.vsd
IEC06000187 V2 EN

6.2.3

Figure 54:

OC4PTOC function block

6.2.4

Input and output signals


Table 69:
Name I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 BLKST2

OC4PTOC Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block of trip Block of Step1 Block of Step2

Table continues on next page

119 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection


Name BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Block of Step3 Block of Step4

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4

Table 70:
Name TRIP TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 TR3L1 TR3L2 TR3L3 TR4L1 TR4L2 TR4L3 START ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 STL1 STL2

OC4PTOC Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Trip Common trip signal from step1 Common trip signal from step2 Common trip signal from step3 Common trip signal from step4 Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3 Trip signal from step1 phase L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L2 Trip signal from step1 phase L3 Trip signal from step2 phase L1 Trip signal from step2 phase L2 Trip signal from step2 phase L3 Trip signal from step3 phase L1 Trip signal from step3 phase L2 Trip signal from step3 phase L3 Trip signal from step4 phase L1 Trip signal from step4 phase L2 Trip signal from step4 phase L3 General start signal Common start signal from step1 Common start signal from step2 Common start signal from step3 Common start signal from step4 Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2

Table continues on next page

120 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection


Name STL3 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 ST3L1 ST3L2 ST3L3 ST4L1 ST4L2 ST4L3 2NDHARM DIRL1 DIRL2 DIRL3 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER Description Start signal from phase L3 Start signal from step1 phase L1 Start signal from step1 phase L2 Start signal from step1 phase L3 Start signal from step2 phase L1 Start signal from step2 phase L2 Start signal from step2 phase L3 Start signal from step3 phase L1 Start signal from step3 phase L2 Start signal from step3 phase L3 Start signal from step4 phase L1 Start signal from step4 phase L2 Start signal from step4 phase L3 Block from second harmonic detection Direction for phase1 Direction for phase2 Direction for phase3

6.2.5
Table 71:
Name Operation IBase UBase AngleRCA AngleROA StartPhSel

Setting parameters
OC4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 40 - 65 40 - 89 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse Unit A kV Deg Deg Step 1 0.05 1 1 Default Off 3000 400.00 55 80 1 out of 3 Description Operation Off / On Base current Base voltage Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Relay operation angle (ROA) Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

DirMode1

Non-directional

Table continues on next page

121 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection


Name Characterist1 Values (Range) ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1 - 10000 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 Unit Step Default ANSI Def. Time Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Selection of time delay curve type for step 1

I1> t1 k1 IMin1 t1Min I1Mult DirMode2

%IB s %IB s -

1 0.001 0.01 1 0.001 0.1 -

1000 0.000 0.05 100 0.000 2.0 Non-directional

Phase current operate level for step1 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Minimum operate current for step1 in % of IBase Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Multiplier for current operate level for step 1 Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

Characterist2

ANSI Def. Time

Selection of time delay curve type for step 2

I2> t2

%IB s

1 0.001

500 0.400

Phase current operate level for step2 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 2

Table continues on next page

122 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection


Values (Range) 0.05 - 999.00 1 - 10000 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1 - 10000 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse Unit %IB s Step 0.01 1 0.001 0.1 Default 0.05 50 0.000 2.0 Non-directional Description Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Minimum operate current for step2 in % of IBase Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Multiplier for current operate level for step 2 Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

Name k2 IMin2 t2Min I2Mult DirMode3

Characterist3

ANSI Def. Time

Selection of time delay curve type for step 3

I3> t3 k3 IMin3 t3Min I3Mult DirMode4

%IB s %IB s -

1 0.001 0.01 1 0.001 0.1 -

250 0.800 0.05 33 0.000 2.0 Non-directional

Phase current operate level for step3 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 3 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 3 Minimum operate current for step3 in % of IBase Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 3 Multiplier for current operate level for step 3 Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

Table continues on next page

123 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection


Name Characterist4 Values (Range) ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1 - 10000 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Unit Step Default ANSI Def. Time Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Selection of time delay curve type for step 4

I4> t4 k4 IMin4 t4Min I4Mult

%IB s %IB s -

1 0.001 0.01 1 0.001 0.1

175 2.000 0.05 17 0.000 2.0

Phase current operate level for step4 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 4 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 4 Minimum operate current for step4 in % of IBase Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 4 Multiplier for current operate level for step 4

Table 72:
Name IMinOpPhSel 2ndHarmStab ResetTypeCrv1

OC4PTOC Group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 1 - 100 5 - 100 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 Unit %IB %IB Step 1 1 Default 7 20 Instantaneous Description Minimum current for phase selection in % of IBase Operate level of 2nd harm restrain op in % of Fundamental Selection of reset curve type for step 1

tReset1 tPCrv1 tACrv1 tBCrv1 tCCrv1 tPRCrv1

s -

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001

0.020 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 0.500

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1

Table continues on next page

124 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection


Values (Range) 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off On Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off On Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off On Unit Step 0.001 0.1 Default 13.500 1.0 Off Instantaneous Description Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain Selection of reset curve type for step 2

Name tTRCrv1 tCRCrv1 HarmRestrain1 ResetTypeCrv2

tReset2 tPCrv2 tACrv2 tBCrv2 tCCrv2 tPRCrv2 tTRCrv2 tCRCrv2 HarmRestrain2 ResetTypeCrv3

s -

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 -

0.020 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0 Off Instantaneous

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain Selection of reset curve type for step 3

tReset3 tPCrv3 tACrv3 tBCrv3 tCCrv3 tPRCrv3 tTRCrv3 tCRCrv3 HarmRestrain3

s -

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 -

0.020 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0 Off

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 3 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Enable block of step3 from harmonic restrain

Table continues on next page

125 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection


Name ResetTypeCrv4 Values (Range) Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off On Unit Step Default Instantaneous Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Selection of reset curve type for step 4

tReset4 tPCrv4 tACrv4 tBCrv4 tCCrv4 tPRCrv4 tTRCrv4 tCRCrv4 HarmRestrain4

s -

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 -

0.020 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0 Off

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 4 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain

Table 73:
Name MeasType

OC4PTOC Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) DFT RMS Unit Step Default DFT Description Selection between DFT and RMS measurement

6.2.6

Technical data
Table 74:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Min. operating current Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Maximum forward angle Minimum forward angle 2nd harmonic blocking Independent time delay Minimum operate time Table continues on next page

OC4PTOC technical data


Setting range (1-2500)% of lBase > 95% (1-100)% of lBase (-70.0 -50.0) degrees (40.070.0) degrees (75.090.0) degrees (5100)% of fundamental (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees 2.0% of Ir 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

126 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection


Function Inverse characteristics, see table 614, table 615 and table 616 Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Setting range 19 curve types Accuracy See table 614, table 615 and table 616 -

25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically

6.3

Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC


Function description Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection IEC 61850 identification EFPIOC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 50N

IN>>
IEF V1 EN

6.3.1

Introduction
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC has a low transient overreach and short tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous earth-fault protection, with the reach limited to less than the typical eighty percent of the line at minimum source impedance. EFPIOC can be configured to measure the residual current from the three-phase current inputs or the current from a separate current input. EFPIOC can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.

6.3.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current, as well as from the sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This current value is fed to the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC). In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the function (IN>>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRIP. There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.

127 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

EFPIOC function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be activated during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.

6.3.3

Function block
EFPIOC I3P* BLOCK BLKAR MULTEN TRIP

IEC06000269-2-en.vsd
IEC06000269 V2 EN

Figure 55:

EFPIOC function block

6.3.4

Input and output signals


Table 75:
Name I3P BLOCK BLKAR MULTEN

EFPIOC Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 Description Three phase currents Block of function Block input for auto reclose Enable current multiplier

Table 76:
Name TRIP

EFPIOC Output signals


Type BOOLEAN Description Trip signal

6.3.5
Table 77:
Name Operation IBase IN>>

Setting parameters
EFPIOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 1 - 2500 Unit A %IB Step 1 1 Default Off 3000 200 Description Operation Off / On Base current Operate residual current level in % of IBase

Table 78:
Name StValMult

EFPIOC Group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 0.5 - 5.0 Unit Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Description Multiplier for operate current level

128 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection Technical data


Table 79:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Dynamic overreach

6.3.6

EFPIOC technical data


Range or value (1-2500)% of lBase > 95% 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset 35 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Iset 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset < 5% at t = 100 ms Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir -

6.4

Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero, negative sequence direction EF4PTOC
Function description Four step residual overcurrent protection IEC 61850 identification EF4PTOC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 51N/67N

IN 4 4 alt

TEF-REVA V1 EN

6.4.1

Introduction
The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately. All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined characteristic. EF4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps. IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or negative sequence. Second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step. EF4PTOC can be used as main protection for phase-to-earth faults.

129 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

EF4PTOC can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit failure. Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weak-end infeed functionality are available as well. EF4PTOC can be configured to measure the residual current from the three-phase current inputs or the current from a separate current input.

6.4.2

Principle of operation
This function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool: 1. 2. 3. I3P, input used for Operating Quantity. U3P, input used for Voltage Polarizing Quantity. I3PPOL, input used for Current Polarizing Quantity.

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the Configuration Tool within PCM600.

6.4.2.1

Operating quantity within the function


The function always uses Residual Current (3I0) for its operating quantity. The residual current can be: 1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function input I3P). This dedicated IED CT input can be for example, connected to: parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases (Holm-Green connection). one single core balance, current instrument transformer (cable CT). one single current instrument transformer located between power system star point and earth (that is, current transformer located in the star point of a star connected transformer winding). one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a protected object (that is, current transformer located between two star points of double star shunt capacitor bank).

2.

calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula (will take I2 from same SMAI AI3P connected to I3PDIR input (same SMAI AI3P connected to I3P input)):

130 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

If zero sequence current is selected,

Iop = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3


EQUATION1874 V2 EN

(Equation 7)

where: IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC protection to compare it with the set operation current value of the four steps (IN1>, IN2>, IN3> or IN4>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in nondirectional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal STINx (x=step 1-4) for this step and a common START signal.

6.4.2.2

Internal polarizing
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse). The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.

Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected the protection will use either the residual voltage -3U0 or the negative sequence voltage -3U2 as polarizing quantity U3P. This voltage can be: 1. directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function input U3P). This dedicated IED VT input shall be then connected to open delta winding of a three phase main VT. calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED (when the fourth analog input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC analog function input U3P is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of the IED in PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate -3U2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

2.

UPol = -3U 0 = -(UL1 + UL2 + UL3)


EQUATION1875 V2 EN

(Equation 9)

131 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

where: UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages. In order to use this, all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.

The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived. This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating directional current, in order to determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse). In order to enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter UpolMin. It shall be noted that residual voltage (-3U0) or negative sequence voltage (-3U2) is used to determine the location of the earth fault. This insures the required inversion of the polarizing voltage within the earth-fault function.

Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use an external residual current (3I0) as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be: 1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function input I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then typically connected to one single current transformer located between power system star point and earth (current transformer located in the star point of a star connected transformer winding). For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT input can be connected to parallel connection of current transformers in all three phases (Holm-Green connection).

2.

calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function analog input I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

IPol = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3


EQUATION2018 V2 EN

(Equation 11)

where: IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

132 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This phasor is then multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance in order to calculate equivalent polarizing voltage UIPol in accordance with the following formula:
UIPol = Z 0s IPol = (RNPol + j XNPol) IPol
EQUATION1877 V2 EN

(Equation 12)

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse). In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.

Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
UTotPol = UUPol + UIPol = -3U 0 + Z 0 s IPol = -3U 0 + ( RNPol + jXNPol ) IPol
EQUATION1878 V3 EN

(Equation 13)

Upol and Ipol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence component depending upon the user selection. Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with the phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault (Forward/Reverse).

6.4.2.3

External polarizing for earth-fault function


The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx to provide external directional control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the following functions if available in the IED: 1. 2. Distance protection directional function. Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose protection function.

6.4.2.4

Base quantities within the protection


The base quantities shall be entered as setting parameters for every earth-fault function. Base current (IBase) shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes. Base voltage (UBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV.

133 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection


6.4.2.5 Internal earth-fault protection structure
The protection is internally divided into the following parts: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Four residual overcurrent steps. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated directional comparison step for communication based earth-fault protection schemes (permissive or blocking). Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking during switching of parallel transformers. Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of breaker problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

6.4.2.6

Four residual overcurrent steps


Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as measuring quantity. Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in facilities: Directional mode can be set to Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By this parameter setting the directional mode of the step is selected. It shall be noted that the directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the residual overcurrent step itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common directional supervision element. Residual current start value. Type of operating characteristic (inverse or definite time). By this parameter setting it is possible to select inverse or definite time delay for the earth-fault protection. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves please refer to section "Inverse characteristics". Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset / ANSI Reset). By this parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the step. For the complete list of available reset curves please refer to section "Inverse time characteristics". Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined. Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (On/Off). By this parameter setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic content in the residual current exceeds the preset level. Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value 1.

Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 56.
134 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

BLKTR IMinx

X
|IOP|

T F

Characteristx=DefTime
b a a b AND a>b OR a>b

tx t

AND

TRINx

INxMult INx> BLKSTx BLOCK

T F

AND

STINx

AND

Inverse
AND

Characteristx=Inverse txmin 2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int


OR

HarmRestrainx=Off DirModex=Off DirModex=Non-directional DirModex=Forward DirModex=Reverse FORWARD_Int


AND OR OR

STEPx_DIR_Int

REVERSE_Int

AND

IEC10000008-3-en.vsd

IEC10000008 V3 EN

Figure 56:

Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x, where x = step 1, 2, 3 or 4

The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output signals for respective step, and STINx and TRINx, can be blocked from the binary input BLKSTx. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

6.4.2.7

Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function


It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent steps shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional supervision element and the integrated directional comparison function. The protection has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current lop is always used. The polarizinwcg method is determined by the parameter setting polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the following three ways: 1. 2. 3. When polMethod = Voltage, UPol will be used as polarizing quantity. When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity. WhenpolMethod = Dual, UPol + IPol ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as shown in figure 57, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.

135 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Operating area

STRV
0.6 * IN>DIR Characteristic for reverse release of measuring steps -RCA -85 deg Characteristic for STRV
40% of IN>DIR

RCA +85 deg

RCA 65

Upol = -3U 0

-RCA +85 deg

RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward release of measuring steps

IN>DIR

STFW
I op = 3I0 Operating area Characteristic for STFW
IEC11000243 V1 EN

IEC11000243-1-en.ai

Figure 57:

Operating characteristic for earth-fault directional element using the zero sequence components

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are: Directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than 40% of I>Dir and directional condition is fulfilled in set direction. Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward and reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will set EF4PTOC function output binary signals: 1. 2. STFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is bigger than setting parameter I>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in forward direction. STRV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is bigger than 60% of setting parameter I>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in reverse direction.

136 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

These signals shall be used for communication based earth-fault teleprotection communication schemes (permissive or blocking). Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step is shown in figure 58:
| IopDir |

a a>b b

REVERSE_Int
a

AND

STRV

0.6 I>Dir 0.4

X
a>b b

FORWARD_Int

AND

STFW

FWD polMethod=Voltage polMethod=Dual polMethod=Current IPol 0.0 RNPol XNPol BLOCK OR T F X UIPol 0.0 T F STAGE1_DIR_Int STAGE2_DIR_Int STAGE3_DIR_Int STAGE4_DIR_Int AngleRCA
Directional Characteristic

AND

FORWARD_Int

OR UPol

UPolMin T 0.0 F IPolMin I3PDIR UTotPol

RVS

AND

REVERSE_Int

Complex Number

OR AND

IEC07000067-5-en.vsd

IEC07000067 V5 EN

Figure 58:

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step

6.4.2.8

Second harmonic blocking element


A harmonic restrain of the Four step residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC can be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the residual current exceeds the pre-set level (defined by parameter setting 2ndHarmStab) any of the four residual overcurrent stages can be selectively blocked by a parameter setting HarmRestrainx. When 2nd harmonic restraint feature is active the EF4PTOC function output signal 2NDHARMD will be set to logical value one.

137 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking can be set in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be required to stabilize EF4PTOC during switching of parallel transformers in the station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers will be in phase opposition. The summation of the two currents will thus give a small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current will however be significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing, will be a little delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore we will have high 2nd harmonic current component initially. After a short period this current will however be small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking will reset. If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal will be latched as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current level. This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic sealin feature will be activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously fulfilled: 1. 2. 3. Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf = On. Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70ms. Residual current magnitude is higher than the set start value for one of the four residual overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting UseStartValue it is possible to select which one of the four start values that will be used (IN1> or IN2> or IN3> or IN4>).

Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking signal will be sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined by parameter setting UseStartValue (see condition 3 above). Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in figure 59.

138 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

BLOCK

IOP

Extract second harmonic current component Extract fundamental current component

a>b

OR

2NDHARMD

2ndHarmStab

q-1

t=70ms t BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
a b a>b

OR

AN D

OR

2ndH_BLOCK_Int

UseStartValue IN1> IN2> IN3> IN4>

en07000068-2.vsd
IEC07000068 V2 EN

Figure 59:

Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers feature

6.4.2.9

Switch on to fault feature


Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault logic (SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate either SOTF or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk to close it onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing sequence. The SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations. The time during which SOTF and Under-Time logics will be active after activation is defined by the setting parameter t4U. The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected by setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse. The setting parameter ActivationSOTF can be set for activation of CB position open change, CB position closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual current start from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set delay tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time (default 200 ms). The Under-Time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The UnderTime logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF

139 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

function. The Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can occur at breaker closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB poles immediately after switching of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter ActUnderTime. In case of a start from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time (default 300 ms). Practically the Under-Time logic acts as circuit breaker pole-discordance protection, but it is only active immediately after breaker switching. The UnderTime logic can only be used in solidly or low impedance grounded systems.
SOTF

Open t4U Closed Close command


AND AND

ActivationSOTF
tSOTF
t

STIN2 STIN3 StepForSOTF

OperationMode BLOCK UNDERTIME tUnderTime 2nd Harmonic OFF SOTF UnderTime


AND

TRIP SOTF or UnderTime

HarmResSOFT

OR

Open Close
OR

t4U Close command STIN4


IEC06000643-3-en.vsd
IEC06000643 V3 EN

ActUnderTime

AND

Figure 60:

Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features

EF4PTOC Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF4PTOC function is shown in figure 61:

140 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

Directional Check Element

signal to communication scheme

INPol 3U0 3I0 DirMode enableDir

Direction Element

operatingCurrent earthFaultDirection angleValid

4 step over current element One element for each step

TRIP

3I0

Harmonic Restraint Element

harmRestrBlock

start step 2, 3 and 4 Blocking at parallel transformers SwitchOnToFault CB pos or cmd TRIP

Mode Selection

DirMode enableDir enableStep1-4 DirectionalMode1-4

en06000376.vsd
IEC06000376 V1 EN

Figure 61:

Functional overview of EF4PTOC

6.4.3

Function block
EF4PTOC I3P* U3P* I3PPOL* BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 CBPOS CLOSECB OPENCB TRIP TRIN1 TRIN2 TRIN3 TRIN4 TRSOTF START STIN1 STIN2 STIN3 STIN4 STSOTF STFW STRV 2NDHARMD

IEC06000424-2-en.vsd
IEC06000424 V2 EN

Figure 62:

EF4PTOC function block

141 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection 6.4.4 Input and output signals


Table 80:
Name I3P U3P I3PPOL BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 CBPOS CLOSECB OPENCB

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

EF4PTOC Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Three Phase Current Group Connection Three Phase Voltage Group Connection Three Phase Polarisation Current General block Block of trip Block of step 1 (Start and trip) Block of step 2 (Start and trip) Block of step 3 (Start and trip) Block of step 4 (Start and trip) When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4 Breaker position Breaker close command Breaker open command

Table 81:
Name TRIP TRIN1 TRIN2 TRIN3 TRIN4 TRSOTF START STIN1 STIN2 STIN3 STIN4 STSOTF

EF4PTOC Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Trip Trip signal from step 1 Trip signal from step 2 Trip signal from step 3 Trip signal from step 4 Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault function General start signal Start signal step 1 Start signal step 2 Start signal step 3 Start signal step 4 Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault function

Table continues on next page

142 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection


Name STFW STRV 2NDHARMD Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Forward directional start signal Reverse directional start signal 2nd harmonic block signal

6.4.5
Table 82:
Name Operation IBase UBase AngleRCA polMethod

Setting parameters
EF4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 -180 - 180 Voltage Current Dual 1 - 100 2 - 100 0.50 - 1000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 1 - 100 5 - 100 Off On IN1> IN2> IN3> IN4> Off SOTF UnderTime SOTF&UnderTime Open Closed CloseCommand Step 2 Step 3 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit A kV Deg Step 1 0.05 1 Default Off 3000 400 65 Voltage Description Operation Off / On Base value for current settings Base value for voltage settings Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Type of polarization

UPolMin IPolMin RNPol XNPol IN>Dir 2ndHarmStab BlkParTransf UseStartValue

%UB %IB ohm ohm %IB % -

1 1 0.01 0.01 1 1 -

1 5 5.00 40.00 10 20 Off IN4>

Minimum voltage level for polarization in % of UBase Minimum current level for polarization in % of IBase Real part of source Z to be used for current polarisation Imaginary part of source Z to be used for current polarisation Residual current level for Direction release in % of IBase Second harmonic restrain operation in % of IN amplitude Enable blocking at parallel transformers Current level blk at parallel transf (step1, 2, 3 or 4)

SOTF

Off

SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/ Undertime/SOTF&Undertime)

ActivationSOTF

Open

Select signal that shall activate SOTF

StepForSOTF HarmResSOTF tSOTF t4U

s s

0.001 0.001

Step 2 Off 0.200 1.000

Selection of step used for SOTF Enable harmonic restrain function in SOTF Time delay for SOTF Switch-onto-fault active time

Table continues on next page 143 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection


Name ActUnderTime tUnderTime DirMode1 Values (Range) CB position CB command 0.000 - 60.000 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1.00 - 10000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 Unit s Step 0.001 Default CB position 0.300 Non-directional Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Select signal to activate under time (CB Pos/CBCommand) Time delay for under time Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

Characterist1

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay curve type for step 1

IN1> t1 k1 IMin1 t1Min IN1Mult ResetTypeCrv1

%IB s %IB s -

1 0.001 0.01 1.00 0.001 0.1 -

100 0.000 0.05 100.00 0.000 2.0 Instantaneous

Operate residual current level for step 1 in % of IBase Independent (defenite) time delay of step 1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 1 Minimum current for step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 1 Reset curve type for step 1

tReset1 HarmRestrain1 tPCrv1 tACrv1 tBCrv1 tCCrv1 tPRCrv1

s -

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001

0.020 On 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 0.500

Reset time delay for step 1 Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1

Table continues on next page

144 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection


Values (Range) 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1.00 - 10000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 Unit Step 0.001 0.1 Default 13.500 1.0 Non-directional Description Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

Name tTRCrv1 tCRCrv1 DirMode2

Characterist2

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay curve type for step 2

IN2> t2 k2 IMin2 t2Min IN2Mult ResetTypeCrv2

%IB s %IB s -

1 0.001 0.01 1.00 0.001 0.1 -

50 0.400 0.05 50 0.000 2.0 Instantaneous

Operate residual current level for step 2 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 2 Minimum current for step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves step 2 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 2 Reset curve type for step 2

tReset2 HarmRestrain2 tPCrv2 tACrv2 tBCrv2 tCCrv2

s -

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1

0.020 On 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0

Reset time delay for step 2 Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2

Table continues on next page

145 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection


Name tPRCrv2 tTRCrv2 tCRCrv2 DirMode3 Values (Range) 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1.00 - 10000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 Unit Step 0.001 0.001 0.1 Default 0.500 13.500 1.0 Non-directional Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

Characterist3

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay curve type for step 3

IN3> t3 k3 IMin3 t3Min IN3Mult ResetTypeCrv3

%IB s %IB s -

1 0.001 0.01 1.00 0.001 0.1 -

33 0.800 0.05 33 0.000 2.0 Instantaneous

Operate residual current level for step 3 in % of IBase Independent time delay of step 3 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 3 Minimum current for step 3 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 3 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 3 Reset curve type for step 3

tReset3 HarmRestrain3 tPCrv3 tACrv3 tBCrv3 tCCrv3

s -

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1

0.020 On 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0

Reset time delay for step 3 Enable block of step 3 from harmonic restrain Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 3

Table continues on next page

146 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection


Values (Range) 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1.00 - 10000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 Unit Step 0.001 0.001 0.1 Default 0.500 13.500 1.0 Non-directional Description Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

Name tPRCrv3 tTRCrv3 tCRCrv3 DirMode4

Characterist4

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay curve type for step 4

IN4> t4 k4 IMin4 t4Min IN4Mult ResetTypeCrv4

%IB s %IB s -

1 0.001 0.01 1.00 0.001 0.1 -

17 1.200 0.05 17 0.000 2.0 Instantaneous

Operate residual current level for step 4 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 4 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 4 Minimum current for step 4 Minimum operate time in inverse curves step 4 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 4 Reset curve type for step 4

tReset4 HarmRestrain4 tPCrv4 tACrv4 tBCrv4

s -

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01

0.020 On 1.000 13.500 0.00

Reset time delay for step 4 Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter A for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4

Table continues on next page

147 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection


Name tCCrv4 tPRCrv4 tTRCrv4 tCRCrv4 Values (Range) 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Unit Step 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 Default 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve step 4

6.4.6

Technical data
Table 83:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Operate current for directional comparison Timers Inverse characteristics, see table 614, table 615 and table 616 Second harmonic restrain operation Relay characteristic angle Minimum polarizing voltage Minimum polarizing current Real part of source Z used for current polarization Imaginary part of source Z used for current polarization Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

EF4PTOC technical data


Range or value (1-2500)% of lBase > 95% (1100)% of lBase (0.000-60.000) s 18 curve types (5100)% of fundamental (-180 to 180) degrees (1100)% of UBase (1-30)% of IBase (0.50-1000.00) W/phase (0.503000.00) W/phase 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I < Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir 0.5% 10 ms See table 614, table 615 and table 616 2.0% of Ir 2.0 degrees 0.5% of Ur 0.25 % of Ir -

6.5

Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC

148 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection


Function description Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection IEC 61850 identification NS4PTOC
4 4 alt

IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number

I2

46I2

IEC10000053 V1 EN

6.5.1

Introduction
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC) has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately. All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined characteristic. The directional function is voltage polarized or dual polarized. NS4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps. NS4PTOC can be used as main protection for unsymmetrical fault; phase-phase short circuits, phase-phase-earth short circuits and single phase earth faults. NS4PTOC can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit failure. Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. The same logic as for directional zero sequence current can be used. Current reversal and weakend infeed functionality are available.

6.5.2

Principle of operation
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool: 1. 2. 3. I3P, input used for Operating Quantity. U3P, input used for Voltage Polarizing Quantity. I3PPOL, input used for Polarizing Quantity.

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the Configuration Tool within PCM600.

6.5.2.1

Operating quantity within the function


Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function always uses negative sequence current (I2) for its operating quantity. The negative
149

Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

sequence current is calculated from three-phase current input within the IED. The pre-processing block calculates I2 from the first three inputs into the preprocessing block by using the following formula:
I2 = 1 3 IL1 + a IL 2 + a IL 3
2

)
(Equation 14)

EQUATION2266 V2 EN

where: IL1, IL2 and IL3 a a2 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents. is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1120 deg similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1240 deg

The negative sequence current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the negative sequence current is derived. The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC protection to compare it with the set operation current value of the four steps (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If the negative sequence current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal, without delay, activates the output signal STx (x=1 - 4) for this step and a common START signal.

6.5.2.2

Internal polarizing facility of the function


A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse). Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function can be set to use voltage polarizing or dual polarizing.

Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected, NS4PTOC uses the negative sequence voltage -U2 as polarizing quantity U3P. This voltage is calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED. The pre-processing block calculates -U2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
UPol = -U 2 = EQUATION2267 V2 EN

1 (UL1 + a 2 UL 2 + a UL3 ) 3

150 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

where: UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages. To use this all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.

The negative sequence voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the negative sequence voltage is derived. This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage must be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting UpolMin. Note that U2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the required inversion of the polarizing voltage within the function.

Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected, the function uses the vectorial sum of the voltage based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
UTotPol = UUPol + UIPol = -U 2 + ZPol IPol = -U 2 + ( RPol + jXPol ) IPol
IECEQUATION2315 V1 EN

(Equation 15)

Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol is used, together with the phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction to the fault (Forward/ Reverse).

6.5.2.3

External polarizing for negative sequence function


The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x indicates the relevant step within the protection) to provide external directional control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the following functions if available in the IED: Distance protection directional function Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose protection function

6.5.2.4

Base quantities within the function


The base quantities must be entered as setting parameters for every function. Base current (IBase) must be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes. In line protections the primary rated current of the CT is chosen.
151

Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Base voltage UBase must be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV. In line protections the primary rated voltage of the VT is chosen.

6.5.2.5

Internal negative sequence protection structure


The protection is internally divided into the following parts: Four negative sequence overcurrent steps Directional supervision element for negative sequence overcurrent steps with integrated directional comparison step for communication based negative sequence protection schemes (permissive or blocking)

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

6.5.2.6

Four negative sequence overcurrent stages


Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 (negative sequence current) as measuring quantity. Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built-in facilities: Operating mode (Off/ Non-directional /Forward / Reverse). By this parameter setting the operating mode of the stage is selected. Note that the directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the overcurrent stage itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common Directional Supervision Element described in the next paragraph. Negative sequence current pickup value. Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter setting it is possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for negative sequence overcurrent function. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves, refer to Chapter "Inverse time characteristics" Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI reset).By this parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For the complete list of available reset curves, refer to Chapter "Inverse time characteristics" Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined. Multiplier for scaling of the set negative sequence current pickup value by external binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase negative sequence current pickup value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value 1.

Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in the following figure:

152 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

BLKTR Characteristx=DefTime
a b a>b

|IOP| ENMULTx IxMult Ix> BLKSTx BLOCK

AND

OR

tx

AND

TRx

T F

AND

STx

txmin
AND

Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse DirModex=Off DirModex=Non-directional DirModex=Forward DirModex=Reverse FORWARD_Int


AND OR OR

STAGEx_DIR_Int

REVERSE_Int

AND

IEC09000683-3-en.vsd
IEC09000683 V2 EN

Figure 63:

Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4

NS4PTOC can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals from NS4PTOC for each stage can be blocked from the binary input BLKSTx. The trip signals from NS4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

6.5.2.7

Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function


At least one of the four negative sequence overcurrent steps must be set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional supervision element and the integrated directional comparison function. NS4PTOC has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current Iop is always used. The polarizing method is determined by the setting polMethod. The polarizing quantity can be selected by NS4PTOC in one of the following two ways: When polMethod=Voltage, UVPol is used as polarizing quantity When polMethod=Dual, UTotPol is used as polarizing quantity

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as shown in figure 57, to determine the direction of the fault.

153 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Reverse Area

AngleRCA

Upol=-U2

Forward Area Iop = I2

IEC10000031-1-en.vsd
IEC10000031 V1 EN

Figure 64:

Operating characteristic for fault directional element

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are: Directional element is internally enable to operate as soon as IOp is bigger than 40% of I>Dir and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction. Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward and reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, set NS4PTOC output binary signals: 1. 2. STFW=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in forward area, see fig 57 (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than setting I>Dir) STRV=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in the reverse area, see fig 57. (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting I>Dir)

These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection communication schemes (permissive or blocking).

154 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step is shown in figure 58:
|Iop| a a> b b STRV

REVERSE_Int

AND

0.6 I>Dir 0.4

X a a> b b X FORWARD_Int AND STFW

FWD polMethod=Voltage polMethod=Dual OR UPol


D i r e c ti o n a l t C h a r a c e ri s ti c

AngleRCA UPolMin T 0.0 F IPolMin Iop UTotPol UIPol 0.0 T F

AND

FORWARD_Int

IPol

RVS RNPol XNPol Complex Number X

AND

REVERSE_Int

STAGE1_DIR_Int STAGE2_DIR_Int STAGE3_DIR_Int STAGE4_DIR_Int

OR AND

BLOCK

IEC07000067-4-en.vsd
IEC07000067-4 V1 EN

Figure 65:

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step

155 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection 6.5.3 Function block


NS4PTOC I3P* U3P* I3PPOL* BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 TRIP TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 START ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 STFW STRV IEC10000054-1-en.vsd
IEC10000054 V1 EN

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Figure 66:

NS4PTOC function block

6.5.4

Input and output signals


Table 84:
Name I3P U3P I3PPOL BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4

NS4PTOC Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Negative Sequence 3 phase current Negative Sequence 3 phase voltage Negative Sequence 3 phase polarisation current General block Block of trip Block of step 1 (Start and trip) Block of step 2 (Start and trip) Block of step 3 (Start and trip) Block of step 4 (Start and trip) When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4

156 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

Table 85:
Name TRIP TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 START ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 STFW STRV

NS4PTOC Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Trip Trip signal from step 1 Trip signal from step 2 Trip signal from step 3 Trip signal from step 4 General start signal Start signal step 1 Start signal step 2 Start signal step 3 Start signal step 4 Forward directional start signal Reverse directional start signal

6.5.5
Table 86:
Name Operation IBase UBase AngleRCA polMethod UPolMin IPolMin RPol XPol I>Dir DirMode1

Setting parameters
NS4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 -180 - 180 Voltage Dual 1 - 100 2 - 100 0.50 - 1000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 1 - 100 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse Unit A kV Deg %UB %IB ohm ohm %IB Step 1 0.05 1 1 1 0.01 0.01 1 Default Off 3000 400 65 Voltage 5 5 5.00 40.00 10 Non-directional Description Operation Off / On Base value for current settings Base value for voltage settings Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Type of polarization Minimum voltage level for polarization in % of UBase Minimum current level for polarization in % of IBase Real part of neg. seq. source imp. to be used for current polarisation Imaginary part of neg. seq. source imp. to be used for current polarisation Neg. seq. curr. I2 level for Direction release in % of IBase Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

Table continues on next page

157 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection


Name Characterist1 Values (Range) ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1.00 - 10000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse Unit Step Default ANSI Def. Time Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Time delay curve type for step 1

I1> t1 k1 IMin1 t1Min I1Mult ResetTypeCrv1

%IB s %IB s -

1 0.001 0.01 1.00 0.001 0.1 -

100 0.000 0.05 100.00 0.000 2.0 Instantaneous

Operate neg. seq. curr. I2 level for step 1 in % of IBase Independent (defenite) time delay of step 1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 1 Minimum current for step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 1 Reset curve type for step 1

tReset1 tPCrv1 tACrv1 tBCrv1 tCCrv1 tPRCrv1 tTRCrv1 tCRCrv1 DirMode2

s -

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 -

0.020 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0 Non-directional

Reset time delay for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

Table continues on next page

158 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection


Values (Range) ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1.00 - 10000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse Unit Step Default ANSI Def. Time Description Time delay curve type for step 2

Name Characterist2

I2> t2 k2 IMin2 t2Min I2Mult ResetTypeCrv2

%IB s %IB s -

1 0.001 0.01 1.00 0.001 0.1 -

50 0.400 0.05 50 0.000 2.0 Instantaneous

Operate neg. seq. curr. I2 level for step 2 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 2 Minimum current for step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves step 2 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 2 Reset curve type for step 2

tReset2 tPCrv2 tACrv2 tBCrv2 tCCrv2 tPRCrv2 tTRCrv2 tCRCrv2 DirMode3

s -

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 -

0.020 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0 Non-directional

Reset time delay for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

Table continues on next page

159 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection


Name Characterist3 Values (Range) ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1.00 - 10000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse Unit Step Default ANSI Def. Time Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Time delay curve type for step 3

I3> t3 k3 IMin3 t3Min I3Mult ResetTypeCrv3

%IB s %IB s -

1 0.001 0.01 1.00 0.001 0.1 -

33 0.800 0.05 33 0.000 2.0 Instantaneous

Operate neg. seq. curr. I2 level for step 3 in % of IBase Independent time delay of step 3 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 3 Minimum current for step 3 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 3 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 3 Reset curve type for step 3

tReset3 tPCrv3 tACrv3 tBCrv3 tCCrv3 tPRCrv3 tTRCrv3 tCRCrv3 DirMode4

s -

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 -

0.020 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0 Non-directional

Reset time delay for step 3 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

Table continues on next page

160 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection


Values (Range) ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1.00 - 10000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Unit Step Default ANSI Def. Time Description Time delay curve type for step 4

Name Characterist4

I4> t4 k4 IMin4 t4Min I4Mult ResetTypeCrv4

%IB s %IB s -

1 0.001 0.01 1.00 0.001 0.1 -

17 1.200 0.05 17 0.000 2.0 Instantaneous

Operate neg. seq. curr. I2 level for step 4 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 4 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 4 Minimum current for step 4 Minimum operate time in inverse curves step 4 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 4 Reset curve type for step 4

tReset4 tPCrv4 tACrv4 tBCrv4 tCCrv4 tPRCrv4 tTRCrv4 tCRCrv4

s -

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1

0.020 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0

Reset time delay for step 4 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter A for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve step 4

161 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection 6.5.6 Technical data


Table 87:
Function Operate value, negative sequence current, step 1-4 Reset ratio Timers Inverse characteristics, see table 614, table 615 and table 616 Minimum operate current for step 1 - 4 Operate value, negative current for directional release Relay characteristic angle Minimum polarizing voltage Minimum polarizing current Real part of negative sequence source impedance used for current polarization Imaginary part of negative sequence source impedance used for current polarization Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time, start function Impulse margin time, start function Transient overreach

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

NS4PTOC technical data


Range or value (1-2500)% of lBase > 95% (0.000-60.000) s 18 curve types (1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase (1100)% of IBase (-180 to 180) degrees (1100)% of UBase (2-100)% of IBase (0.50-1000.00) W/phase Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 0.5% 10 ms See table 614, table 615 and table 616 1.0% of Ir at I < Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir 2.0 degrees 0.5% of Ur 1.0% of Ir -

(0.503000.00) W/phase

25 ms typically at 0.5 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0.5 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically <10% at = 100 ms

6.6

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE


Function description Sensitive directional residual over current and power protection IEC 61850 identification SDEPSDE IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 67N

6.6.1

Introduction
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase-to-earth fault current is significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth-

162 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

fault protection is that the magnitude of the phase-to-earth fault current is almost independent of the fault location in the network. Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-toearth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the residual voltage (-3U0), compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively, the function can be set to strict 3I0 level with a check of angle 3I0 and cos . Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phaseto-earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual power component 3I0 3U0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle. A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or inverse time delay. A back-up neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional sensitive back-up protection. In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always has -90 phase shift compared to the reference residual voltage. The characteristic angle is chosen to -90 in such a network. In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil earthed, with a parallel resistor, the active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for the earth-fault detection. In such networks the characteristic angle is chosen to 0. As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location the selectivity of the earth-fault protection is achieved by time selectivity. When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider the following facts: Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better sensitivity. The setting possibilities of this function are down to 0.25 % of IBase, 1 A or 5 A. This sensitivity is in most cases sufficient in high impedance network applications, if the measuring CT ratio is not too high. Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed networks, with large capacitive earth-fault current In some power systems a medium size neutral point resistor is used, for example, in low impedance earthed system. Such a resistor will give a resistive earth-fault current component of about 200 - 400 A at a zero resistive phase-to-

163 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

earth fault. In such a system the directional residual power protection gives better possibilities for selectivity enabled by inverse time power characteristics.

6.6.2
6.6.2.1

Principle of operation
Function inputs
The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P and U3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage is taken from preprocessor blocks. The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub-functions included:

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0cos


is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage. Uref = -3U0 ejRCADir, that is -3U0 rotated by the set characteristic angle RCADir (=ang(3I0)-ang(Uref) ). RCADir is normally set equal to 0 in a high impedance earthed network with a neutral point resistor as the active current component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is set equal to -90 in an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The function operates when 3I0cos gets larger than the set value.
RCADir = 0 , ROADir = 0

3I0

= ang(3I0 ) ang(3Uref )

3I0 cos

3U0 = Uref

IEC06000648-3-en.vsd
IEC06000648 V3 EN

Figure 67:

RCADir set to 0

164 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection


Uref

RCADir = 90 , ROADir = 90

3I0

3I0 cos
= ang (3I0 ) ang (Uref )

3U0

IEC06000649_3_en.vsd
IEC06000649 V3 EN

Figure 68:

RCADir set to -90

For trip, both the residual current 3I0cos and the release voltage 3U0, must be larger than the set levels: INCosPhi> and UNRel>. Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR. When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated. If the output signals are active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The trip from this sub-function has definite time delay. There is a possibility to increase the operate level for currents where the angle is larger than a set value as shown in figure 69. This is equivalent to blocking of the function if > ROADir. This option is used to handle angle error for the instrument transformers.

165 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

RCADir = 0o

3I0

Operate area

j 3I0 cos j -3U0 = Uref

ROADir

IEC06000650_2_en.vsd
IEC06000650 V2 EN

Figure 69:

Characteristic with ROADir restriction

The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as 3I0cos ( + 180) the set value. It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the figure 70:

166 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

RCADir = 0

Operate area

-3U0 =Uref

Instrument transformer angle error

RCAcomp Characteristic after angle compensation

3I0 (prim)

3I0 (to prot)

en06000651.vsd
IEC06000651 V2 EN

Figure 70:

Explanation of RCAComp

Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 3U0 cos


is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (=ang(3I0)ang(Uref) ). Uref = -3U0 e-jRCA. The function operates when 3I0 3U0 cos gets larger than the set value. For trip, both the residual power 3I0 3U0 cos , the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN>, INRel> and UNRel>). Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR. When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated. If the output signals are active after the set delay tDef or after the inverse time delay (setting kSN) the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as 3I0 3U0cos ( + 180) the set value.

167 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay. The inverse time delay is defined as:
t inv = kSN (3I0 3U 0 cos j(reference)) 3I0 3U 0 cos j(measured)
(Equation 16)

EQUATION1942 V2 EN

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and


The function will operate if the residual current is larger that the set value and the angle = ang(3I0)-ang(Uref) is within the sector RCADir ROADir
RCADir = 0 ROADir = 80

Operate area 3I0 -3U0

IEC06000652-3-en.vsd
IEC06000652 V3 EN

Figure 71:

Example of characteristic

For trip, both the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels INDir> and UNREL> and the angle shall be in the set sector ROADir and RCADir. Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR. When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated. If the output signals are active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The function indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180 ROADir This variant has definite time delay.

168 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection


Directional functions

For all the directional functions there are directional start signals STFW: fault in the forward direction, and STRV: start in the reverse direction. Even if the directional function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction a fault in the reverse direction will give the start signal STRV. Also if the directional function is set to operate for faults in the reverse direction a fault in the forward direction will give the start signal STFW.

Non-directional earth fault current protection

This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle. The function will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as alternative or back-up to distance protection with phase preference logic. To assure selectivity the distance protection can block the non-directional earth fault current function via the input BLKNDN. The non-directional function is using the calculated residual current, derived as sum of the phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect cross-country faults with high residual current, also when dedicated core balance CT for the sensitive earth fault protection will saturate. This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay. The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC 60255-3. For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level (INNonDir>). Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN. When the function is activated binary output signal STNDIN is activated. If the output signal is active after the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time delay the binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN are activated.

Residual overvoltage release and protection

The directional function shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher than a set level. There shall also be a separate trip, with its own definite time delay, from this level set voltage level. For trip, the residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set level (UN>). Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKUN. When the function is activated binary output signal STUN is activated. If the output signals are active after the set delay tUNNonDir TRIP and TRUN are activated. A simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in figure 72.

169 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

INNonDir> t UN> t
OpMODE=3I0cosfi

STNDIN TRNDIN STUN TRUN

IN> INcosPhi>
OpMODE=3I03U0cosfi

&

& INUNcosPhi> Phi in RCA +- ROA


OpMODE=3I0 and fi

&
t

STARTDIRIN

SN TimeChar = InvTime

&

TRDIRIN

&
TimeChar = DefTime

&

DirMode = Forward Forward DirMode = Reverse Reverse

&

1 STFW

& STRV
en06000653.vsd

IEC06000653 V2 EN

Figure 72:

Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive earth-fault current protection

6.6.3

Function block
SDEPSDE I3P* U3P* BLOCK BLKTR BLKTRDIR BLKNDN BLKUN TRIP TRDIRIN TRNDIN TRUN START STDIRIN STNDIN STUN STFW STRV STDIR UNREL IEC07000032-2-en.vsd
IEC07000032 V2 EN

Figure 73:

SDEPSDE function block

170 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection Input and output signals


Table 88:
Name I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKTRDIR BLKNDN BLKUN

6.6.4

SDEPSDE Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 Description Group signal for current Group signal for voltage Blocks all the outputs of the function Blocks the operate outputs of the function Blocks the directional operate outputs of the function Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs

Table 89:
Name TRIP TRDIRIN TRNDIN TRUN START STDIRIN STNDIN STUN STFW STRV STDIR UNREL

SDEPSDE Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN Description General trip of the function Trip of the directional residual over current function Trip of non directional residual over current Trip of non directional residual over voltage General start of the function Start of the directional residual over current function Start of non directional residual over current Start of non directional residual over voltage Start of directional function for a fault in forward direction Start of directional function for a fault in reverse direction Direction of fault. A general signal common to all three mode of residual over current protection Residual voltage release of operation of all directional modes

171 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection 6.6.5


Table 90:
Name Operation OpMode

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Setting parameters
SDEPSDE Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 3I0Cosfi 3I03U0Cosfi 3I0 and fi Forward Reverse -179 - 180 -10.0 - 10.0 0 - 90 0.25 - 200.00 0.25 - 200.00 0.25 - 200.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.03 - 200.00 0.00 - 2.00 Off On 1.00 - 400.00 0.000 - 60.000 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type Unit Step Default Off 3I0Cosfi Description Operation Off / On Selection of operation mode for protection

DirMode RCADir RCAComp ROADir INCosPhi> SN> INDir> tDef SRef kSN OpINNonDir> INNonDir> tINNonDir TimeChar

Deg Deg Deg %IB %SB %IB s %SB %IB s -

1 0.1 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 -

Forward -90 0.0 90 1.00 10.00 5.00 0.100 10.00 0.10 Off 10.00 1.000 IEC Norm. inv.

Direction of operation forward or reverse Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg Relay characteristic angle compensation Relay open angle ROA used as release in phase mode, in deg Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res over current, in %Ib Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv time count, in %Sb Set level for directional residual over current prot, in %Ib Definite time delay directional residual overcurrent, in sec Reference value of res power for inverse time count, in %Sb Time multiplier setting for directional residual power mode Operation of non-directional residual overcurrent protection Set level for non directional residual over current, in %Ib Time delay for non-directional residual over current, in sec Operation curve selection for IDMT operation

Table continues on next page

172 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection


Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 0.00 - 2.00 Off On 1.00 - 200.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.25 - 200.00 0.01 - 200.00 Unit s %UB s %IB %UB Step 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.01 0.01 Default 0.040 1.00 Off 20.00 0.100 1.00 3.00 Description Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves, in sec IDMT time mult for non-dir res over current protection Operation of non-directional residual overvoltage protection Set level for non-directional residual over voltage, in %Ub Time delay for non-directional residual over voltage, in sec Residual release current for all directional modes, in %Ib Residual release voltage for all direction modes, in %Ub

Name tMin kIN OpUN> UN> tUN INRel> UNRel>

Table 91:
Name tReset tPCrv tACrv tBCrv tCCrv ResetTypeCrv

SDEPSDE Group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 Immediate IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Unit s Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 Default 0.040 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 IEC Reset Description Time delay used for reset of definite timers, in sec Setting P for customer programmable curve Setting A for customer programmable curve Setting B for customer programmable curve Setting C for customer programmable curve Reset mode when current drops off.

tPRCrv tTRCrv tCRCrv

0.001 0.001 0.1

0.500 13.500 1.0

Setting PR for customer programmable curve Setting TR for customer programmable curve Setting CR for customer programmable curve

Table 92:
Name IBase UBase SBase

SDEPSDE Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 200000000.00 Unit A kV kVA Step 1 0.05 0.05 Default 100 63.50 6350.00 Description Base Current, in A Base Voltage, in kV Phase to Neutral Base Power, in kVA. IBase*Ubase

173 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Table 93:
Name RotResU

SDEPSDE Non group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 0 deg 180 deg Unit Step Default 180 deg Description Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if necessary

6.6.6

Technical data
Table 94:
Function Operate level for 3I0cosj directional residual overcurrent

SDEPSDE technical data


Range or value (0.25-200.00)% of lBase Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir At low setting: (0.25-1.00)% of Ir: 0.05% of Ir (1.00-5.00)% of Ir: 0.1% of Ir

Operate level for 3I03U0 cosj directional residual power

(0.25-200.00)% of SBase

1.0% of Sr at S Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr At low setting: (0.25-5.00)% of SBase 10% of set value

Operate level for 3I0 and j residual overcurrent

(0.25-200.00)% of lBase

1.0% of Ir at Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir At low setting: (0.25-1.00)% of Ir: 0.05% of Ir (1.00-5.00)% of Ir: 0.1% of Ir

Operate level for nondirectional overcurrent

(1.00-400.00)% of lBase

1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir At low setting <5% of Ir: 0.1% of Ir

Operate level for nondirectional residual overvoltage Residual release current for all directional modes

(1.00-200.00)% of UBase

0.5% of Ur at UUr 0.5% of U at U > Ur 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir At low setting: (0.25-1.00)% of Ir: 0.05% of Ir (1.00-5.00)% of Ir: 0.1% of Ir

(0.25-200.00)% of lBase

Residual release voltage for all directional modes Reset ratio Timers Inverse characteristics, see table 614, table 615 and table 616 Relay characteristic angle RCA Table continues on next page 174

(0.01-200.00)% of UBase > 95% (0.000-60.000) s 19 curve types

0.5% of Ur at UUr 0.5% of U at U > Ur 0.5% 10 ms See table 614, table 615 and table 616 2.0 degrees

(-179 to 180) degrees

Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection


Function Relay open angle ROA Operate time, non-directional residual over current Reset time, non-directional residual over current Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Range or value (0-90) degrees 60 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 60 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 150 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 50 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset Accuracy 2.0 degrees -

6.7

Thermal overload protection, one time constant LPTTR


Function description Thermal overload protection, one time constant IEC 61850 identification LPTTR IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 26

SYMBOL-A V1 EN

6.7.1

Introduction
The increasing utilizing of the power system closer to the thermal limits has generated a need of a thermal overload protection also for power lines. A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the introduction of the thermal overload protection can allow the protected circuit to operate closer to the thermal limits. The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2t characteristic with settable time constant and a thermal memory.. An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the line is tripped.

6.7.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the RMS value is derived. These phase current values are fed to the thermal overload protection, one time constant function LPTTR.. From the largest of the three-phase currents a final temperature is calculated according to the expression:

175 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Q final

I = I ref

T ref
(Equation 17)

EQUATION1167 V1 EN

where: I Iref Tref is the largest phase current, is a given reference current and is steady state temperature rise corresponding to Iref

The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature. If this temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level, TripTemp, a START output signal is activated. The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final
EQUATION1168 V1 EN

Dt - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t

(Equation 18)

where: Qn Qn-1 Qfinal Dt is the calculated present temperature, is the calculated temperature at the previous time step, is the calculated final temperature with the actual current, is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)

The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The ambient temperature can be taken from a separate sensor or can be given a constant value. The calculated component temperature is available as a real figure signal, TEMP. When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the output signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set. There is also a calculation of the present time to operate with the present current. This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation temperature:

176 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

Q - Qoperate toperate = -t ln final Q final - Q n


EQUATION1169 V1 EN

(Equation 19)

The calculated time to trip is available as a real figure signal, TTRIP. After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection, there can be a lockout to reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting ReclTemp. The time to lockout release is calculated that is, a calculation of the cooling time to a set value. The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.

Q - Qlockout _ release tlockout _ release = -t ln final Q final - Q n


EQUATION1170 V1 EN

(Equation 20)

Here the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature. The calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure signal, TENRECL. In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines. This is often used for cable lines where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting the parameter IMult to the number of parallel lines (cables) the actual current on one line is used in the protection algorithm. To activate this option the input ENMULT must be activated. The protection has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level.

177 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Final Temp > TripTemp

START

Calculation of actual temperature

actual temperature

IL1, IL2, IL3

Calculation of final temperature Actual Temp > AlarmTemp ALARM

TRIP Actual Temp > TripTemp Lockout logic

LOCKOUT

Actual Temp < Recl Temp

Calculation of time to trip

TTRIP

Calculation of time to reset of lockout

TENRECL

IEC09000637_1_en.vsd
IEC09000637 V1 EN

Figure 74:

Functional overview of LPTTR

6.7.3

Function block
LPTTR I3P* BLOCK BLKTR ENMULT AMBTEMP SENSFLT RESET TRIP START ALARM LOCKOUT

IEC04000396-2-en.vsd
IEC04000396 V3 EN

Figure 75:

LPTTR function block

178 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection Input and output signals


Table 95:
Name I3P BLOCK BLKTR ENMULT AMBTEMP SENSFLT RESET

6.7.4

LPTTR Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Group connection Block of function Block of trip Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or more lines Ambient temperature from external temperature sensor Validity status of ambient temperature sensor Reset of internal thermal load counter

Table 96:
Name TRIP START ALARM LOCKOUT

LPTTR Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Trip Start Signal Alarm signal Lockout signal

6.7.5
Table 97:
Name Operation IBase TRef IRef IMult Tau AlarmTemp TripTemp ReclTemp tPulse

Setting parameters
LPTTR Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0 - 99999 0 - 600 0 - 400 1-5 0 - 1000 0 - 200 0 - 600 0 - 600 0.05 - 0.30 Unit A Deg %IB Min Deg Deg Deg s Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 Default Off 3000 90 100 1 45 80 90 75 0.1 Description Operation Off / On Base current in A End temperature rise above ambient of the line when loaded with IRef The load current (in %of IBase) leading to TRef temperature Current multiplier when function is used for two or more lines Time constant of the line in minutes. Temperature level for start (alarm) Temperature level for trip Temperature for reset of lockout after trip Operate pulse length. Minimum one execution cycle

Table continues on next page

179 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection


Name AmbiSens DefaultAmbTemp DefaultTemp Values (Range) Off On -50 - 250 -50 - 600 Unit Deg Deg Step 1 1 Default Off 20 50 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

External temperature sensor availiable Ambient temperature used when AmbiSens is set to Off. Temperature raise above ambient temperature at startup

6.7.6

Technical data
Table 98:
Function Reference current Reference temperature Operate time:

LPTTRtechnical data
Range or value (0-400)% of IBase (0-400)C, (0 - 600)F Time constant t = (01000) minutes Accuracy 1.0% of Ir 1.0C, 2F IEC 60255-8, 5% + 200 ms

I 2 - I p2 t = t ln 2 I - Ib 2
EQUATION1356 V1 EN

(Equation 21)

I = actual measured current Ip = load current before overload occurs Ib = base current, IBase Alarm temperature Trip temperature Reset level temperature (0-200)C, (0-400)F (0-400)C, (0-600)F (0-400)C, (0-600)F 2.0% of heat content trip 2.0% of heat content trip 2.0% of heat content trip

6.8

Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR


Function description Thermal overload protection, two time constants IEC 61850 identification TRPTTR IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 49

SYMBOL-A V1 EN

6.8.1

Introduction
If a power transformer or generator reaches very high temperatures the equipment might be damaged. The insulation within the transformer/generator will have forced ageing. As a consequence of this the risk of internal phase-to-phase or phase-

180 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

to-earth faults will increase. High temperature will degrade the quality of the transformer/generator insulation. The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the transformer/ generator (temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal model of the transformer/generator with two time constants, which is based on current measurement. Two warning levels are available. This enables actions in the power system to be done before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to increase to the trip value, the protection initiates a trip of the protected transformer/ generator.

6.8.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the true RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the Thermal overload protection, two time constants (TRPTTR). From the largest of the three phase currents a relative final temperature (heat content) is calculated according to the expression:

Q final

I = I ref

EQUATION1171 V1 EN

(Equation 22)

where: I Iref is the largest phase current is a given reference current

If this calculated relative temperature is larger than the relative temperature level corresponding to the set operate (trip) current a start output signal START is activated. The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

181 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

If

Q final > Q n
EQUATION1172 V1 EN

(Equation 23)

Dt Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t
EQUATION1173 V1 EN

(Equation 24)

If

Q final < Qn
EQUATION1174 V1 EN

(Equation 25)
Dt

Qn = Q final - ( Q final - Q n -1 ) e
EQUATION1175 V1 EN

(Equation 26)

where: Qn Qn-1 Qfinal Dt t is the calculated present temperature is the calculated temperature at the previous time step is the calculated final (steady state) temperature with the actual current is the time step between calculation of the actual and final temperature is the set thermal time constant Tau1 or Tau2 for the protected transformer

The calculated transformer relative temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure HEATCONT. When the transformer temperature reaches any of the set alarm levels Alarm1 or Alarm2 the corresponding output signals ALARM1 or ALARM2 are activated. When the temperature of the object reaches the set trip level which corresponds to continuous current equal to ITrip the output signal TRIP is activated. There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current. This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation temperature:

Q - Qoperate toperate = -t ln final Q final - Q n


EQUATION1176 V1 EN

(Equation 27)

The calculated time to trip can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure TTRIP. After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection, there can be a lockout to reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated

182 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

when the temperature of the object is above the set lockout release temperature setting ResLo. The time to lockout release is calculated, That is, a calculation of the cooling time to a set value.

Q - Qlockout _ release tlockout _ release = -t ln final Q final - Q n


EQUATION1177 V1 EN

(Equation 28)

In the above equation, the final temperature is calculated according to equation 22. Since the transformer normally is disconnected, the current I is zero and thereby the final is also zero. The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure, TRESLO. When the current is so high that it has given a start signal START, the estimated time to trip is continuously calculated and given as analogue output TTRIP. If this calculated time get less than the setting time Warning, set in minutes, the output WARNING is activated. In case of trip a pulse with a set duration tPulse is activated.

183 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Final Temp > TripTemp

START

Calculation of heat content

actual heat comtent

I3P Calculation of final temperature

Actual Temp > Alarm1,Alarm2 Temp

ALARM1 ALARM2

Current base used TRIP Actual Temp > TripTemp Binary input: Forced cooling On/Off S R Actual Temp < Recl Temp LOCKOUT

Management of setting parameters: Tau, IBase

Tau used

Calculation of time to trip

time to trip warning if time to trip < set value

Calculation of time to reset of lockout

time to reset of lockout

en05000833.vsd
IEC05000833 V1 EN

Figure 76:

Functional overview of TRPTTR

184 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection Function block


TRPTTR I3P* BLOCK COOLING ENMULT RESET TRIP START ALARM1 ALARM2 LOCKOUT WARNING IEC06000272_2_en.vsd
IEC06000272 V2 EN

6.8.3

Figure 77:

TRPTTR function block

6.8.4

Input and output signals


Table 99:
Name I3P BLOCK COOLING ENMULT RESET

TRPTTR Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 Description Group signal for current input Block of function Cooling input Off / On. Changes Ib setting and time constant Enable Multiplier for currentReference setting Reset of function

Table 100:
Name TRIP START ALARM1 ALARM2 LOCKOUT WARNING

TRPTTR Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Trip Signal Start signal First level alarm signal Second level alarm signal Lockout signal Warning signal: Trip within set warning time

6.8.5
Table 101:
Name Operation IBase IRef IRefMult

Setting parameters
TRPTTR Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 10.0 - 1000.0 0.01 - 10.00 Unit A %IB Step 1 1.0 0.01 Default Off 3000 100.0 1.00 Description Operation Off / On Base current in A Reference current in % of IBASE Multiplication Factor for reference current

Table continues on next page

185 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection


Name IBase1 IBase2 Tau1 Tau2 IHighTau1 Tau1High ILowTau1 Tau1Low IHighTau2 Tau2High ILowTau2 Tau2Low ITrip Alarm1 Alarm2 ResLo ThetaInit Warning tPulse Values (Range) 30.0 - 250.0 30.0 - 250.0 1.0 - 500.0 1.0 - 500.0 30.0 - 250.0 5 - 2000 30.0 - 250.0 5 - 2000 30.0 - 250.0 5 - 2000 30.0 - 250.0 5 - 2000 50.0 - 250.0 50.0 - 99.0 50.0 - 99.0 10.0 - 95.0 0.0 - 95.0 1.0 - 500.0 0.01 - 0.30 Unit %IB %IB Min Min %IB1 %tC1 %IB1 %tC1 %IB2 %tC2 %IB2 %tC2 %IBx %Itr %Itr %Itr % Min s Step 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1 1.0 1 1.0 1 1.0 1 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.1 0.01 Default 100.0 100.0 60.0 60.0 100.0 100 100.0 100 100.0 100 100.0 100 110.0 80.0 90.0 60.0 50.0 30.0 0.10 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Base current,IBase1 without Cooling inpout in % of IBASE Base Current,IBase2, with Cooling input ON in % of IBASE Time constant without cooling input in min, with IBase1 Time constant with cooling input in min, with IBase2 Current Sett, in % of IBase1 for rescaling TC1 by TC1-IHIGH Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is > IHIGH-TC1 Current Set, in % of IBase1 for rescaling TC1 by TC1-ILOW Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is < ILOW-TC1 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling TC2 by TC2-IHIGH Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is >IHIGH-TC2 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling TC2 by TC2-ILOW Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is < ILOW-TC2 Steady state operate current level in % of IBasex First alarm level in % of heat content trip value Second alarm level in % of heat content trip value Lockout reset level in % of heat content trip value Initial Heat content, in % of heat content trip value Time setting, below which warning would be set (in min) Length of the pulse for trip signal (in msec).

186 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection Technical data


Table 102:
Function Base current 1 and 2 Operate time:

6.8.6

TRPTTR technical data


Range or value (30250)% of IBase Ip = load current before overload occurs Time constant = (1500) minutes Accuracy 1.0% of Ir IEC 602558, 5% + 200 ms

I 2 - I p2 t = t ln 2 I - Ib 2
EQUATION1356 V1 EN

(Equation 29)

I = Imeasured Alarm level 1 and 2 Operate current Reset level temperature (5099)% of heat content trip value (50250)% of IBase (1095)% of heat content trip 2.0% of heat content trip 1.0% of Ir 2.0% of heat content trip

6.9

Breaker failure protection CCRBRF


Function description Breaker failure protection IEC 61850 identification CCRBRF IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 50BF

3I>BF
SYMBOL-U V1 EN

6.9.1

Introduction
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures fast back-up tripping of surrounding breakers in case the own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF can be current based, contact based, or an adaptive combination of these two conditions. Current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve high security against unnecessary operation. Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small. CCRBRF can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single phase tripping applications. For the three-phase version of CCRBRF the current criteria can be set to operate only if two out of four for example, two phases or one phase plus the residual current start. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip command.

187 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

CCRBRF function can be programmed to give a single- or three-phase re-trip of the own breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect initiation due to mistakes during testing.

6.9.2

Principle of operation
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF is initiated from protection trip command, either from protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices. The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase selective start signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second attempt to open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time delay. For transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used. The re-trip function can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line protection. The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With the current check the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the operate current level. The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will start the back-up trip timer. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected by the function, by detection of either low current through RMS evaluation and a special adapted current algorithm or by open contact indication. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening, that is, fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current and/or contact detection has not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip is initiated. Further the following possibilities are available: The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the backup trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the backup trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed breaker. In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/ or residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection. The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the setting of phase current detection. It is possible to have different back-up time delays for single-phase faults and for multi-phase faults. The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this option activated for small load currents only. It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if the circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.

188 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

START STL1

30 ms
OR

BFP Started L1
150 ms
AND S R OR

BLOCK Reset L1

SR

AND

Time out L1

Retrip Time Out L1 BackupTrip L1


OR

IEC09000976-1-en.vsd
IEC09000976 V1 EN

Figure 78:
IP>

Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF starting logic

a b

a>b
OR AND

FunctionMode

Current Contact

OR

Reset L1

Time out L1
Current and Contact
OR AND

Current High L1
CB Closed L1
OR

IL1

AND

BFP Started L1
a

I>BlkCont CBCLDL1

a>b

AND

OR

AND

AND

AND

Contact Closed L1

IEC09000977-1-en.vsd
IEC09000977 V1 EN

Figure 79:

Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF, CB position evaluation

BFP Started L1

t1
t

Retrip Time Out L1


AND

From other phases

TRRETL3 TRRETL2
OR

TRRET TRRETL1

RetripMode

200 ms
OR OR

No CBPos Check
1

OR

AND

CBFLT

CB Pos Check CB Closed L1

AND

IEC09000978-1-en.vsd

IEC09000978 V2 EN

Figure 80:

Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function

189 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

IN IN> BUTripMode
1

a b

a>b

AND

From other phases CBFLT

2 out of 4 1 out of 4 1 out of 3 Current High L2 Current High L3

Contact Closed L1
OR OR

Current High L1
AND

AND

t2

BFP Started L1

t2MPh
AND
t

OR

AND

Backup Trip L1

OR

AND

OR

200 ms
OR OR

From other phases

BFP Started L2 BFP Started L3

From other Backup Trip L2 phases Backup Trip L3


2 of 3

TRBU

200 ms t3
S AND R

SR

OR

TRBU2

IEC09000979-2-en.vsd

IEC09000979 V2 EN

Figure 81:

Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip logic function

Internal logical signals Current High L1, Current High L2, Current High L3 have logical value 1 when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter IP>.

6.9.3

Function block
CCRBRF I3P* BLOCK START STL1 STL2 STL3 CBCLDL1 CBCLDL2 CBCLDL3 CBFLT TRBU TRBU2 TRRET TRRETL1 TRRETL2 TRRETL3 CBALARM

IEC06000188-2-en.vsd
IEC06000188 V2 EN

Figure 82:

CCRBRF function block

190 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection Input and output signals


Table 103:
Name I3P BLOCK START STL1 STL2 STL3 CBCLDL1 CBCLDL2 CBCLDL3 CBFLT

6.9.4

CCRBRF Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 Description Three phase group signal for current inputs Block of function Three phase start of breaker failure protection function Start signal of phase L1 Start signal of phase L2 Start signal of phase L3 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1 Circuit breaker closed in phase L2 Circuit breaker closed in phase L3 CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantaneously

Table 104:
Name TRBU TRBU2 TRRET TRRETL1 TRRETL2 TRRETL3 CBALARM

CCRBRF Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection function Retrip by breaker failure protection function Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L1 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L2 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L3 Alarm for faulty circuit breaker

6.9.5
Table 105:
Name Operation IBase FunctionMode

Setting parameters
CCRBRF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 Current Contact Current&Contact Unit A Step 1 Default Off 3000 Current Description Operation Off / On Base current Detection principle for back-up trip

Table continues on next page

191 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection


Name BuTripMode Values (Range) 2 out of 4 1 out of 3 1 out of 4 Retrip Off CB Pos Check No CBPos Check 5 - 200 2 - 200 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit Step Default 1 out of 3 Description Back-up trip mode

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

RetripMode

Retrip Off

Operation mode of re-trip logic

IP> IN> t1 t2 t2MPh tPulse

%IB %IB s s s s

1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

10 10 0.000 0.150 0.150 0.200

Operate phase current level in % of IBase Operate residual current level in % of IBase Time delay of re-trip Time delay of back-up trip Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase start Trip pulse duration

Table 106:
Name I>BlkCont t3 tCBAlarm

CCRBRF Group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 5 - 200 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit %IB s s Step 1 0.001 0.001 Default 20 0.030 5.000 Description Current for blocking of CB contact operation in % of IBase Additional time delay to t2 for a second back-up trip Time delay for CB faulty signal

6.9.6

Technical data
Table 107:
Function Operate phase current Reset ratio, phase current Operate residual current Reset ratio, residual current Phase current level for blocking of contact function Reset ratio Timers Operate time for current detection Reset time for current detection

CCRBRF technical data


Range or value (5-200)% of lBase > 95% (2-200)% of lBase > 95% (5-200)% of lBase Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 0.5% 10 ms -

> 95% (0.000-60.000) s 10 ms typically 15 ms maximum

192 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

6.10

Stub protection STBPTOC


Function description Stub protection IEC 61850 identification STBPTOC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 50STB

3I>STUB
SYMBOL-T V1 EN

6.10.1

Introduction
When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line disconnector is opened in multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers will mostly be outside on the disconnected part. The primary line distance protection will thus not be able to operate and must be blocked. The stub protection STBPTOC covers the zone between the current transformers and the open disconnector. The three-phase instantaneous overcurrent function is released from a normally open, NO (b) auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.

6.10.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to a comparator in the stub protection function STBPTOC. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operating current value of the function I>. If a phase current is larger than the set operating current the signal from the comparator for this phase is activated. This signal will, in combination with the release signal from line disconnection (RELEASE input), activate the timer for the TRIP signal. If the fault current remains during the timer delay t, the TRIP output signal is activated. The function can be blocked by activation of the BLOCK input.

193 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION

BLOCK TRIP

STIL1 STIL2 STIL3 RELEASE OR

AND

en05000731.vsd
IEC05000731 V1 EN

Figure 83:

Simplified logic diagram for Stub protection

6.10.3

Function block
STBPTOC I3P* BLOCK BLKTR RELEASE TRIP START

IEC05000678-2-en.vsd
IEC05000678 V2 EN

Figure 84:

STBPTOC function block

6.10.4

Input and output signals


Table 108:
Name I3P BLOCK BLKTR RELEASE

STBPTOC Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 Description Three phase currents Block of function Block of trip Release of stub protection

Table 109:
Name TRIP START

STBPTOC Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Trip General start

194 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection Setting parameters

6.10.5
Table 110:
Name Operation IBase ReleaseMode I>

STBPTOC Group settings (basic)


Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 Release Continuous 1 - 2500 Unit A %IB Step 1 1 Default Off 3000 Release 200 Description Operation Off / On Base current Release of stub protection Operate current level in % of IBase

Table 111:
Name t

STBPTOC Group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 Unit s Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Description Time delay

6.10.6

Technical data
Table 112:
Function Operating current Reset ratio Definite time Operate time, start function Reset time, startfunction Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

STBPTOC technical data


Range or value (1-2500)% of IBase > 95% (0.000-60.000) s 20 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 0.5% 10 ms -

6.11

Pole discordance protection CCRPLD


Function description Pole discordance protection IEC 61850 identification CCRPLD IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 52PD

PD
SYMBOL-S V1 EN

195 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection 6.11.1 Introduction

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative sequence current functions. Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation persists the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation. The Polediscordance protection function CCRPLD operates based on information from auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional criteria from unsymmetrical phase currents when required.

6.11.2

Principle of operation
The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discordance is indicated, see figure 85.
circuit breaker

Pole discordance signal from circuit breaker


en05000287.vsd
IEC05000287 V2 EN

Figure 85:

Pole discordance external detection logic

This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay. There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED, see figure 86.

196 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

C.B.

poleOneClosed from C.B. poleTwoClosed from C.B. poleThreeClosed from C.B. + poleOneOpened from C.B. poleTwoOpened from C.B. poleThreeOpened from C.B.
en05000288.vsd
IEC05000288 V1 EN

Figure 86:

Pole discordance signals for internal logic

In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole discordance the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay. Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current measurement. The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. The smallest and the largest phase current are derived. If the smallest phase current is lower than the setting CurrUnsymLevel times the largest phase current the settable trip timer (tTrip) is started. The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP signal is a pulse 150 ms long. The current based pole discordance function can be set to be active either continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open or close command. The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing function, so that the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences with a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used. The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based Pole discordance protection function CCRPLD is shown in figure 87.

197 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

BLOCK BLKDBYAR OR

PolPosAuxCont POLE1OPN POLE1CL POLE2OPN POLE2CL POLE3OPN POLE3CL AND Discordance detection AND OR PD Signal from CB EXTPDIND CLOSECMD OPENCMD OR AND Unsymmetry current detection en05000747.vsd
IEC05000747 V1 EN

t t

150 ms TRIP

AND

t+200 ms

Figure 87:

Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function CCRPLD contact and current based

CCRPLDis blocked if: The IED is in TEST mode and CCRPLD has been blocked from the local HMI The input signal BLOCK is high The input signal BLKDBYAR is high

The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance protection. It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single phase autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal 1PT1 on SMBRRECfunction block. If the autoreclosing function is an external device, then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input in the IED and this binary input is connected to a signalization 1phase autoreclosing in progress from the external autoreclosing device. If the pole discordance protection is enabled, then two different criteria can generate a trip signal TRIP: Pole discordance signaling from the circuit breaker. Unsymmetrical current detection.

198 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection


Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker
If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close the pole discordance status, then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole discordance signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for each phase connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval tTrip (0-60 s), a 150 ms trip pulse command TRIP is generated by the Polediscordance function.

6.11.2.1

6.11.2.2

Unsymmetrical current detection


Unsymmetrical current indicated if: any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the three phases. the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevel of IBase.

If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time delay tTrip if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions. The pole discordance protection is informed that a trip or close command has been given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field (that is from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may be software connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (that is close command from a control function or a general trip from integrated protections).

6.11.3

Function block
CCRPLD I3P* BLOCK BLKDBYAR CLOSECMD OPENCMD EXTPDIND POLE1OPN POLE1CL POLE2OPN POLE2CL POLE3OPN POLE3CL TRIP START

IEC06000275-2-en.vsd
IEC06000275 V2 EN

Figure 88:

CCRPLD function block

199 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection 6.11.4 Input and output signals


Table 113:
Name I3P BLOCK BLKDBYAR CLOSECMD OPENCMD EXTPDIND POLE1OPN POLE1CL POLE2OPN POLE2CL POLE3OPN POLE3CL

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

CCRPLD Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Description Three phase currents Block of function Block of function at CB single phase auto reclosing cycle Close order to CB Open order to CB Pole discordance signal from CB logic Pole one opened indication from CB Pole one closed indication from CB Pole two opened indication from CB Pole two closed indication from CB Pole three opened indication from CB Pole three closed indication from CB

Table 114:
Name TRIP START

CCRPLD Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Trip signal to CB Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay

6.11.5
Table 115:
Name Operation IBase tTrip ContSel

Setting parameters
CCRPLD Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.000 - 60.000 Off PD signal from CB Pole pos aux cont. Off CB oper monitor Continuous monitor 0 - 100 0 - 100 Unit s Step 1 0.001 Default Off 3000 0.300 Off Description Operation Off / On Base current Time delay between trip condition and trip signal Contact function selection

CurrSel

Off

Current function selection

CurrUnsymLevel CurrRelLevel

% %IB

1 1

80 10

Unsym magn of lowest phase current compared to the highest. Current magnitude for release of the function in % of IBase

200 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection Technical data


Table 116:
Function Operate current Time delay

6.11.6

CCRPLD technical data


Range or value (0100)% of IBase (0.000-60.000) s Accuracy 1.0% of Ir 0.5% 10 ms

6.12

Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP


Function description Directional underpower protection IEC 61850 identification GUPPDUP IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 37

P<
SYMBOL-LL V1 EN

6.12.1

Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy. Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system. Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself. Figure 89 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine. When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).

201 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Underpower IED Q

Overpower IED Q

Operate Line Margin

Operate Line Margin

Operating point without turbine torque

Operating point without turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN

Figure 89:

Protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

6.12.2

Principle of operation
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in figure 90. The function has two stages with individual settings.

Chosen current phasors Complex power calculation

P Derivation of S(composant) in Char angle S(angle) S(angle) < Power1 t TRIP1 START1

Chosen voltage phasors

S(angle) < Power2

TRIP2 START2

P = POWRE Q = POWIM

IEC09000018-2-en.vsd
IEC09000018 V2 EN

Figure 90:

Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 117.

202 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

Table 117:
Set value: Mode L1, L2, L3

Complex power calculation


Formula used for complex power calculation

S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN

(Equation 30)

Arone

S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN

(Equation 31)

PosSeq

S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
EQUATION1699 V1 EN

(Equation 32)

L1L2

S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN

(Equation 33)

L2L3

S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN

(Equation 34)

L3L1

S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN

(Equation 35)

L1

S = 3 U L1 I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN

(Equation 36)

L2

S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN

(Equation 37)

L3

S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN

(Equation 38)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for monitoring and fault recording. The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated. The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). For directional underpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. For directional overpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated. To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + droppower1(2)). For generator low forward power protection the power setting is very

203 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

low, normally down to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2) For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the droppower1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value. If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value, the function will reset after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out and that the timer of the stage will reset.

6.12.2.1

Low pass filtering


In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
EQUATION1959 V1 EN

(Equation 39)

Where S Sold is a new measured value to be used for the protection function is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle k TD is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k=0.92 in case of slow operating functions.

6.12.2.2

Calibration of analog inputs


Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 91.

204 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

IEC05000652 V2 EN

Figure 91:

Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals. Analog outputs (Monitored data) from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.

6.12.3

Function block
GUPPDUP I3P* U3P* BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2 TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START START1 START2 P PPERCENT Q QPERCENT IEC07000027-2-en.vsd
IEC07000027 V2 EN

Figure 92:

GUPPDUP function block

205 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection 6.12.4 Input and output signals


Table 118:
Name I3P U3P BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

GUPPDUP Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 Description Current group connection Voltage group connection Block of function Block of stage 1 Block of stage 2

Table 119:
Name TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START START1 START2 P PPERCENT Q QPERCENT

GUPPDUP Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL REAL REAL REAL Description Common trip signal Trip of stage 1 Trip of stage 2 Common start Start of stage 1 Start of stage 2 Active Power in MW Active power in % of SBASE Reactive power in Mvar Reactive power in % of SBASE

6.12.5
Table 120:
Name Operation OpMode1 Power1 Angle1 TripDelay1 DropDelay1 OpMode2 Power2 Angle2 TripDelay2 DropDelay2 206

Setting parameters
GUPPDUP Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Off UnderPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Off UnderPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Unit %SB Deg s s %SB Deg s s Step 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 Default Off UnderPower 1.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 UnderPower 1.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 Description Operation Off / On Operation mode 1 Power setting for stage 1 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 1 Trip delay for stage 1 Drop delay for stage 1 Operation mode 2 Power setting for stage 2 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 2 Trip delay for stage 2 Drop delay for stage 2

Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

Table 121:
Name k Hysteresis1 Hysteresis2 IAmpComp5 IAmpComp30 IAmpComp100 UAmpComp5 UAmpComp30 UAmpComp100 IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100

GUPPDUP Group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 0.000 - 0.999 0.2 - 5.0 0.2 - 5.0 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 Unit pu pu % % % % % % Deg Deg Deg Step 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.000 0.5 0.5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Description Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, P and Q Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % Sbase Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % Sbase Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir

Table 122:
Name IBase UBase Mode

GUPPDUP Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 L1, L2, L3 Arone Pos Seq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1 L2 L3 Unit A kV Step 1 0.05 Default 3000 400.00 Pos Seq Description Base setting for current level Base setting for voltage level Selection of measured current and voltage

6.12.6

Technical data
Table 123:
Function Power level

GUPPDUP technical data


Range or value (0.0500.0)% of SBase At low setting: (0.5-2.0)% of SBase (2.0-10)% of SBase Accuracy 1.0% of Sr at S < Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr < 50% of set value < 20% of set value 2 degrees 0.5% 10 ms

Characteristic angle Timers

(-180.0180.0) degrees (0.00-6000.00) s

207 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

6.13

Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP


Function description Directional overpower protection IEC 61850 identification GOPPDOP IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 32

P>
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942 V1 EN

6.13.1

Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy. Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system. Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself. Figure 93 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1%. When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).

208 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

Underpower IED Q

Overpower IED Q

Operate Line Margin

Operate Line Margin

Operating point without turbine torque

Operating point without turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN

Figure 93:

Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

6.13.2

Principle of operation
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in figure 94. The function has two stages with individual settings.

Chosen current phasors Complex power calculation

P Derivation of S(composant) in Char angle S(angle) S(angle) > Power1 t TRIP1 START1

Chosen voltage phasors

S(angle) > Power2

TRIP2 START2

P = POWRE Q = POWIM

IEC06000567-2-en.vsd
IEC06000567 V2 EN

Figure 94:

Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 124.

209 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Table 124:
Set value: Mode L1, L2, L3

Complex power calculation


Formula used for complex power calculation

S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN

(Equation 40)

Arone

S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN

(Equation 41)

PosSeq

S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
EQUATION1699 V1 EN

(Equation 42)

L1L2

S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN

(Equation 43)

L2L3

S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN

(Equation 44)

L3L1

S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN

(Equation 45)

L1

S = 3 U L1 I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN

(Equation 46)

L2

S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN

(Equation 47)

L3

S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN

(Equation 48)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for monitoring and fault recording. The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated. The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). A start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated. To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) droppower1(2)). For generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be

210 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) Hysteresis1(2) For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the droppower1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value. If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out ant that the timer of the stage will reset.

6.13.2.1

Low pass filtering


In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
EQUATION1959 V1 EN

(Equation 49)

Where S Sold is a new measured value to be used for the protection function is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.92 in case of slow operating functions.

6.13.2.2

Calibration of analog inputs


Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 95.

211 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

IEC05000652 V2 EN

Figure 95:

Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals. Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.

6.13.3

Function block
GOPPDOP I3P* U3P* BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2 TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START START1 START2 P PPERCENT Q QPERCENT IEC07000028-2-en.vsd
IEC07000028 V2 EN

Figure 96:

GOPPDOP function block

212 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection Input and output signals


Table 125:
Name I3P U3P BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2

6.13.4

GOPPDOP Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 Description Current group connection Voltage group connection Block of function Block of stage 1 Block of stage 2

Table 126:
Name TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START START1 START2 P PPERCENT Q QPERCENT

GOPPDOP Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL REAL REAL REAL Description Common trip signal Trip of stage 1 Trip of stage 2 Common start Start of stage 1 Start of stage 2 Active Power in MW Active power in % of SBASE Reactive power in Mvar Reactive power in % of SBASE

6.13.5
Table 127:
Name Operation OpMode1 Power1 Angle1 TripDelay1 DropDelay1 OpMode2 Power2 Angle2 TripDelay2 DropDelay2

Setting parameters
GOPPDOP Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Off OverPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Off OverPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Unit %SB Deg s s %SB Deg s s Step 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 Default Off OverPower 120.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 OverPower 120.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 Description Operation Off / On Operation mode 1 Power setting for stage 1 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 1 Trip delay for stage 1 Drop delay for stage 1 Operation mode 2 Power setting for stage 2 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 2 Trip delay for stage 2 Drop delay for stage 2 213

Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Table 128:
Name k Hysteresis1 Hysteresis2 IAmpComp5 IAmpComp30 IAmpComp100 UAmpComp5 UAmpComp30 UAmpComp100 IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100

GOPPDOP Group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 0.000 - 0.999 0.2 - 5.0 0.2 - 5.0 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 Unit pu pu % % % % % % Deg Deg Deg Step 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.000 0.5 0.5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Description Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, P and Q Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of Sbase Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of Sbase Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir

Table 129:
Name IBase UBase Mode

GOPPDOP Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 L1, L2, L3 Arone Pos Seq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1 L2 L3 Unit A kV Step 1 0.05 Default 3000 400.00 Pos Seq Description Base setting for current level Base setting for voltage level Selection of measured current and voltage

214 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection Technical data


Table 130:
Function Power level

6.13.6

GOPPDOP technical data


Range or value (0.0500.0)% of Sbase At low setting: (0.5-2.0)% of Sbase (2.0-10)% of Sbase Accuracy 1.0% of Sr at S < Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr < 50% of set value < 20% of set value 2 degrees 0.5% 10 ms

Characteristic angle Timers

(-180.0180.0) degrees (0.00-6000.00) s

6.14

Broken conductor check BRCPTOC


Function description Broken conductor check IEC 61850 identification BRCPTOC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 46

6.14.1

Introduction
Conventional protection functions can not detect the broken conductor condition. Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC) function, consisting of continuous current unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED is connected will give alarm or trip at detecting broken conductors.

6.14.2

Principle of operation
Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC) detects a broken conductor condition by detecting the asymmetry between currents in the three phases. The currentmeasuring elements continuously measure the three-phase currents. The current asymmetry signal output START is set on if: The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the phase with the highest current is greater than set percentage Iub> of the highest phase current The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>. The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value IP>

The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel lines. If a conductor breaks in one phase on one line, the parallel line will experience an increase in current in the same phase. This might result in the first

215 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

two conditions being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period longer than the set time tOper the TRIP output is activated. The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in figure 97 BRCPTOC is disabled (blocked) if: The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the local HMI test menu (BlockBRC=Yes). The input signal BLOCK is high.

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices, or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED itself to receive a block command from internal functions. The output trip signal TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to the circuit breaker or for alarm purpose only.
TEST TEST-ACTIVE

&
Block BRCPTOC=Yes START

BLOCK

=1

Function Enable & t t


TRIP

Unsymmetrical Current Detection STI IL1<50%IP> IL2<50%IP> IL3<50%IP>

=1

IEC09000158-2-en.vsd
IEC09000158 V2 EN

Figure 97:

Simplified logic diagram for Broken conductor check BRCPTOC

216 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection Function block


BRCPTOC I3P* BLOCK BLKTR TRIP START

6.14.3

IEC07000034-2-en.vsd
IEC07000034 V2 EN

Figure 98:

BRCPTOC function block

6.14.4

Input and output signals


Table 131:
Name I3P BLOCK BLKTR

BRCPTOC Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 Description Group signal for current input Block of function Blocks the operate output

Table 132:
Name TRIP START

BRCPTOC Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Operate signal of the protection logic Start signal of the protection logic

6.14.5
Table 133:
Name Operation IBase Iub> IP> tOper

Setting parameters
BRCPTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0 - 99999 50 - 90 5 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 Unit A %IM %IB s Step 1 1 1 0.001 Default Off 3000 50 20 5.000 Description Operation Off / On IBase Unbalance current operation value in percent of max current Minimum phase current for operation of Iub> in % of Ibase Operate time delay

Table 134:
Name tReset

BRCPTOC Group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 0.010 - 60.000 Unit s Step 0.001 Default 0.100 Description Time delay in reset

217 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection 6.14.6 Technical data


Table 135:
Function Minimum phase current for operation Unbalance current operation Timer

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

BRCPTOC technical data


Range or value (5100)% of IBase (0100)% of maximum current (0.00-6000.00) s Accuracy 0.1% of Ir 0.1% of Ir 0.5% 10 ms

6.15

Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC


Function description Capacitor bank protection IEC 61850 identification CBPGAPC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -

6.15.1

Introduction
Shunt Capacitor Banks (SCB) are used in a power system to provide reactive power compensation and power factor correction. They are as well used as integral parts of Static Var Compensators (SVC) or Harmonic Filters installations. Capacitor bank protection (CBPGAPC) function is specially designed to provide protection and supervision features for SCBs.

6.15.2

Principle of operation
Capacitor bank protection (CBPGAPC) function measures the SCB three-phase current. CBPGAPC function has the following built-in features: Overcurrent stage Undercurrent stage Reconnection inhibit Harmonic overload Reactive power overload

6.15.2.1

Measured quantities
Three-phase input current from the SCB is connected via the preprocessing block to CBPGAPC function. From this preprocessing block CBPGAPC function obtains the following quantities for every phase: Current sample values with sampling rate of 1 kHz in 50 Hz power system and 1.2 kHz in 60 Hz power system (that is, 20 samples in fundamental power system cycle). These samples correspond to the instantaneous current

218 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

waveform of the protected SCB and in further text will be marked with symbol i~ Equivalent RMS current value based on Peak Current measurement. This value is obtained as maximum absolute current sample value over last power system cycle divided by 2 and in further text will be marked with symbol IpeakRMS Equivalent true RMS current value based on the following formula:
N

TRMS

i
m =1

~m

N
(Equation 50)

EQUATION2232 V1 EN

where N is used number of samples in one power system cycle (that is, 20) and i~m are last N samples of the current waveform. In further text this equivalent true rms current quantity will be marked with symbol ITRMS. Note that the measured IpeakRMS value is available as a service value in primary amperes for every phase from the function. From the measured SCB currents, voltage value across every SCB phase is calculated. This is done by continuous integration of the measured current waveform by using the following principal equation:

u (t ) =

1 C

i ( t ) t

EQUATION2233 V1 EN

(Equation 51)

Where: u(t) i(t) C is voltage waveform across capacitor is capacitor current waveform is capacitance in Farads

By using this integration procedure and subsequent filtering the following quantities for every phase are calculated within the function: Voltage sample values with rate of 1 kHz in 50 Hz power system and 1.2 kHz in 60 Hz power system (that is, 20 samples in fundamental power system cycle). These samples correspond to the instantaneous voltage waveform across the protected SCB and in further text will be marked with symbol u~ Equivalent rms voltage value based on Peak Voltage measurement. This value is obtained as maximum absolute voltage sample value over last power system cycle divided by 2 and in further text will be marked with symbol UpeakRMS Equivalent true RMS voltage value based on the following formula:

219 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

TRMS

u
m =1

2 ~m

N
(Equation 52)

EQUATION2234 V1 EN

Where: N u~m is used number of samples in one power system cycle (for example, 20) are last N samples of the voltage waveform

In further text this equivalent true RMS voltage quantity will be marked with symbol UTRMS Some additional filtering of the calculated voltage quantities is additionally performed within the function in order to avoid equivalent RMS voltage values overshooting during capacitor switching. In order to avoid dependence of the current integration on exact value of the protected capacitor bank capacitance the whole integration process is done in per unit system. In order to convert measured current in primary amperes into per unit value the base current for the protected capacitor bank shall be known. This value is set as parameter IBase and it represents the rated SCB current in primary amperes at fundamental frequency. This value is calculated for a three-phase SCB as follows:

IBase =
EQUATION2235 V1 EN

1000 Q [ MVAr ] 3 U [ kV ]
(Equation 53)

Where:

IBase Q[MVAr] U[kV]

is base current for the function in primary amperes is shunt capacitor bank MVAr rating is shunt capacitor bank rated phase-to-phase voltage in kV

Once the base current is known the internal voltage calculations can be performed. Note that the calculated UpeakRMS value is available as a service value in percent for every phase from the function. Generated reactive power (Q) by the capacitor bank is calculated within the function for every phase as given by the following equation:

Q =U

TRMS

TRMS

EQUATION2236 V1 EN

(Equation 54)

220 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

Where: Q UTRMS ITRMS is generated reactive power in per-unit is capacitor equivalent true RMS voltage in per-unit is capacitor equivalent true RMS current in per-unit

Additional filtering of the calculated Q quantity is performed within the function in order to avoid overshooting during capacitor switching. Note that the calculated Q value is available as a service value in percent for every phase from the function. Simplified logic diagram about used analog quantities within one phase of the capacitor bank protection function are shown in figure 99.
I3P I PeakRMS [A] Overcurrent Undercurrent I TRMS[A] Reconnection Inhibit

TRMS FILTER i~ [A]


IBase

UTRMS[pu]

Reactive Power Overload

u~ [pu]

PEAK FILTER

UPeakRMS[pu]

Harmonic Overload

IEC09000746.vsd
IEC09000746 V1 EN

Figure 99:

Simplified logic diagram about used analog quantities within one phase

6.15.2.2

Reconnection inhibit feature


This feature determines that capacitor banks are disconnected from the power system and is used to prevent reconnection of a charged capacitor bank to a live network. The IRMS values of the three phase currents are compared with the IRecnInhibit< parameter in order to determine when the capacitor bank is energized or disconnected. The simplified logic diagram is shown in fig 100.

221 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

currentRMS
IRecnInhibit<

a b a>b

0.02 s t CapBank Energised

NOT

CAPDISC Phx

IEC08000345-1-en.vsd
IEC08000345 V1 EN

Figure 100:

Capacitor bank energization check for one phase. Similar for all three phases

When SCB is disconnected in all three phases, the reconnection inhibit signal will be given. This signal will be active until the preset time elapsed and is used to inhibit the reconnection of charged capacitor bank to live network. The internal logic diagram for the inhibit feature is shown in figure 101.
CAPDISC
_ Ph1 CAPDISC

CAPDISC Ph2 CAPDISC Ph3

AND
Z
-2

tReconnInhibit
AND AND

RECNINH

Z-2

en08000346.vsd
IEC08000346 V1 EN

Figure 101:

Capacitor bank reconnection inhibit

6.15.2.3

Overcurrent feature
The overcurrent protection feature protects the capacitor bank from excessive current conditions. The sub function takes the current peakRMS value from the preprocessing block in the IED as input. The peakRMS value of the current is compared with the setting of parameter IOC>. Whenever the peakRMS value of the current crosses the set level the function sends a START signal as output. The signal is passed through the definite timer for giving the TRIP signal. Each phase will have its own START and TRIP signals for overcurrent. The internal logic for the overcurrent feature is shown in fig 102.

222 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

IPeakRMS IOC>

a b a>b tOC

AND

AND

TROC

OperationOC=On

STOC

BLKTR BLKOC BLOCK

OR

IEC08000350-1-en.vsd
IEC08000350 V1 EN

Figure 102:

Capacitor bank overcurrent protection

6.15.2.4

Undercurrent feature
Undercurrent protection feature is used to disconnect the capacitor bank from the rest of the power system when the voltage at the capacitor bank terminals is too low for too long period of time. This sub function uses the current peakRMS value from the preprocessing block in the IED as input. The peakRMS value of the current is compared to the set value of the parameter IUC<. Whenever the peakRMS value of the current falls below the set undercurrent level, the function will send a START signal as output. The function can be blocked when the current falls below the cut off level. The capacitor bank disconnected signals are used for this blocking. This feature will help to prevent trip operation when the capacitor bank is disconnected from the power system. The TRIP output signal is delayed by a definite timer. Each phase will have its own START and TRIP signals for undercurrent. The internal logic for the undercurrent feature is shown in fig 103.
IPeakRMS IUC< a b b>a tUC

AND
OperationUC=On BLKUC BLOCK CAPDISC BLKTR

AND

TRUC

STUC

OR

en08000351.vsd
IEC08000351 V1 EN

Figure 103:

Capacitor bank undercurrent protection

6.15.2.5

Capacitor harmonic overload feature


Harmonic overload protection feature will protect the capacitor from over load conditions caused by harmonics. The sub-function protects the capacitor in two

223 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

stages, first stage is Inverse time delay (IDMT) based and a second stage is based on Definite Time (DT) delay. IDMT curve has adjustable k factor and inverse time characteristic is shown in figure 104, where k = 1. The IDMT curve starts only when the equivalent RMS voltage value is higher than set value of parameter HOLIDMTU> and stays active until the value falls below the reset value.

Voltage Peak RMS [pu]

2.3 2.1 1.9 1.7 1.5 1.3 1.1 0.1 1 10 100 1000
IEC08000352-1-en.vsd

10000

Operate Time [s]


IEC08000352 V1 EN

Figure 104:

IDMT curve for harmonic overload (kHOLIDMT=1.0)

Main seven operating points for this IDMT curve are defined by IEC/ANSI standards and they are shown in above figure and summarized in the following table:
Table 136:
UpeakRMS [pu] Time [s] 1.15 1800

Main operating points for IDMT curve


1.2 300 1.3 60 1.4 15 1.7 1.0 2.0 0.3 2.2 0.12

Note the following regarding this IDMT curve: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. When parameter kHOLIDMT has different value from 1.0 operating time is proportionally changed (for example, when kHOLIDMT =0.9 operating times will be 90% of the values shown in above figure 104 and table 136) Between the seven main points in table 136, the operate time is calculate by using linear interpolation in the logarithmic scale Integration process is used to calculate the operate time for varying voltage condition By setting parameter tMinHOLIDMT =0.1s standard requirements for minimum operating time of 100ms for harmonic overload IDMT curve can be fluffed By setting parameter tMaxHOLIDMT =2000s operation for small harmonics overload condition when UpeakRMS is in-between 1.1pu and 1.2pu is assured

224 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection

Harmonic overload definite time curve has settings facilities for independent pickup and time delay. It can be used as separate tripping stage or as an alarm stage. Both of these two harmonic overload stages are active during capacitor bank energizing and are capable to properly measure and operate up to and including 9th harmonic. The internal logic for harmonic overload feature is shown in figure 105:
UPeakRMS [pu] HOLDTU> STHDTLx a a>b b tHOLDT OperationHOL=On

AND

OR

AND

TRHOL

BLKHOL BLOCK BLKTR

OR

OR

STHOL

OperationHOL=On UPeakRMS [pu] HOLIDMTU>

AND
a a>b b kHOLIDMT tMaxHOLIDMT tMinHOLIDMT UPeakRMS [pu] ST STHIDMLx
IDMT

TR

IEC09000752-1-en.vsd
IEC09000752 V1 EN

Figure 105:

Simplified logic diagram for harmonic overload

6.15.2.6

Capacitor reactive power overload feature


Reactive power overload protection feature will protect the capacitor bank from reactive power overload conditions. The sub-function will use the reactive power values as input. The reactive power input values are calculated from the true RMS value of voltage and current. The reactive power value is compared with the QOL> setting. When the reactive power value exceeds the QOL> setting the STQOL signal will be activated. The start signal is delayed by the definite timer before activating the TRQOL signal. The internal logic diagram for this feature is shown in figure 106.

225 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Q [pu] QOL>

a a>b b tQOL

OperationQOL=On

AND

AND
BLKTR BLKQOL BLOCK

TRQOL

OR

STQOL

en08000353.vsd
IEC08000353 V1 EN

Figure 106:

Capacitor bank reactive power overload protection

6.15.3

Function block
CBPGAPC I3P* BLOCK BLKTR BLKOC BLKUC BLKUCCUT BLKQOL BLKHOL TRIP TROC TRUC TRQOL TRHOL START STOC STUC STQOL STHOL STOCL1 STOCL2 STOCL3 STUCL1 STUCL2 STUCL3 STQOLL1 STQOLL2 STQOLL3 STHDTL1 STHDTL2 STHDTL3 STHIDML1 STHIDML2 STHIDML3 RECNINH

IEC08000500-1-en.vsd
IEC08000500 V1 EN

Figure 107:

CBPGAPC function block

226 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection Input and output signals


Table 137:
Name I3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKOC BLKUC BLKUCCUT BLKQOL BLKHOL

6.15.4

CBPGAPC Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Three Phase Current Input Block the complete function Block all operate output signals Block over current functionality Block under current functionality Block the under current functionality in cap cut off cond Block reactive power over load functionality Block harmonic over load functionality

Table 138:
Name TRIP TROC TRUC TRQOL TRHOL START STOC STUC STQOL STHOL STOCL1 STOCL2 STOCL3 STUCL1 STUCL2 STUCL3 STQOLL1 STQOLL2 STQOLL3 STHDTL1 STHDTL2

CBPGAPC Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description General trip signal Trip signal for over current Trip signal for under current Trip signal for reactive power over load Trip signal for harmonic over load General start signal Start signals for over current Start signal for under current Start signal for reactive power over load Start signal for harmonic over load Start signal for over current of phase L1 Start signal for over current of phase L2 Start signal for over current of phase L3 Start signal for under current of phase L1 Start signal for under current of phase L2 Start signal for under current of phase L3 Start signal for reactive power over load of phase L1 Start signal for reactive power over load of phase L2 Start signal for reactive power over load of phase L3 Start signal for harmonic over load DT stage of phase L1 Start signal for harmonic over load DT stage of phase L2

Table continues on next page 227 Technical reference manual

Section 6 Current protection


Name STHDTL3 STHIDML1 STHIDML2 STHIDML3 RECNINH Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Start signal for harmonic over load DT stage of phase L3 Start signal for harmonic over load IDMT stage of phase L1 Start signal for harmonic over load IDMT stage of phase L2 Start signal for harmonic over load IDMT stage of phase L3 Capacitor bank reconnection inhibit signal

6.15.5
Table 139:
Name Operation IBase OperationRecIn IRecnInhibit< tReconnInhibit OperationOC IOC> tOC OperationUC IUC< tUC OperationQOL QOL> tQOL OperationHOL HOLDTU> tHOLDT HOLIDMTU>

Setting parameters
CBPGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 Off On 4 - 1000 1.00 - 6000.00 Off On 0 - 900 0.00 - 6000.00 Off On 5 - 100 0.00 - 6000.00 Off On 5 - 900 1.00 - 6000.00 Off On 5 - 500 0.00 - 6000.00 80 - 200 Unit A %IB s %IB s %IB s % s % s % Step 1 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 Default Off 3000 On 10 300.00 On 135 30.00 Off 70 5.00 On 130 60.00 On 200 10.00 110 Description Operation Off/On Rated capacitor bank current Operation reconnection inhibit Off/On Cap bank cut off current level for inhibit in % of IBase Time delay for reconnected inhibit signal Operation over current Off/On Start level for over current operation, % of IBase Time delay for over current operation Operation under current Off/On Start level for under current operation, % of IBase Time delay for under current operation Operation reactive power over load Off/ On Start level for reactive power over load in % Time delay for reactive power overload operation Operation harmonic over load Off/On Start value of voltage for harmOvLoad for DT stage in % Time delay for minimum operation for harmonic overload Start value of voltage for harmOvLoad in IDMT stage in %

Table continues on next page

228 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 6 Current protection


Values (Range) 0.50 - 1.50 0.05 - 6000.00 0.05 - 60.00 Unit s s Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 Default 1.00 2000.00 0.10 Description Time multiplier for harmonic overload IDMT curve Maximum trip delay for harmonic overload Minimum trip delay for harmonic overload

Name kHOLIDMT tMaxHOLIDMT tMinHOLIDMT

6.15.6

Technical data
Table 140:
Function Operate value, overcurrent Reset ratio, overcurrent Operate time, start Reset time, start Critical impulse time, overcurrent protection start Impulse margin time, overcurrent protection start Operate value, undercurrent Reset ratio, undercurrent Operate value, reconnection inhibit function Operate value, reactive power overload function Operate value, voltage protection function for harmonic overload (Definite time) Operate value, voltage protection function for harmonic overload (Inverse time) Inverse time characteristic Maximum trip delay, harmonic overload IDMT Minimum trip delay, harmonic overload IDMT Timers

CBPGAPC technical data


Range or value (0-900)% of lBase >95% 10 ms typically 30 ms typically 2 ms typically at 0.5 to.2xIset 1 ms typically at 0.5 to 10xIset 15 ms typically (5-100)% of IBase <105% (4-1000)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I < Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir at I < Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Sr at S < Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr 0.5% of Ur at U<Ur 0.5% of U at U>Ur Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I < Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir -

(5-900)% (5-500)%

(80-200)%

0.5% of Ur at U<Ur 0.5% of U at U>Ur

According to IEC60871-1 (2005) and IEEE/ANSI C37.99 (2000) (0.05-6000.00) s (0.05-60.00) s (0.00-6000.00) s

10% + 50 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

229 Technical reference manual

230

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection

Section 7

Voltage protection

About this chapter


This chapter describes voltage related protection functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

7.1

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV


Function description Two step undervoltage protection IEC 61850 identification UV2PTUV IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 27

3U<
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN V2 EN

7.1.1

Introduction
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions. Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) function can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed back-up to primary protection. UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

7.1.2

Principle of operation
Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) is used to detect low power system voltage. UV2PTUV has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding START signal is generated. UV2PTUV can be set to START/TRIP based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If the voltage remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to disconnection of the related high voltage equipment, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking level the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is generated.The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for each step and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay.

231 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

UV2PTUV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase fundamental value, phase-to-earth true RMS value or phase-to-phase true RMS value. The choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phaseto-phase voltage. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage under:

U < (%) UBase(kV ) 3


EQUATION1429 V2 EN

(Equation 55)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:


U < (%) UBase(kV)
EQUATION1990 V1 EN

(Equation 56)

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root of three.

7.1.2.1

Measurement principle
Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV measures phase-to-earth or phaseto-phase voltages and compare against set values, U1< and U2<. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be lower than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal. To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

7.1.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available: inverse curve A inverse curve B customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

t=

k Un < -U Un <
(Equation 57)

EQUATION1431 V2 EN

232 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection

where: Un< U Set value for step 1 and step 2 Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:


t= k 480 Un < - U - 0.5 32 Un <
2.0

+ 0.055

EQUATION1432 V2 EN

(Equation 58)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

kA t= +D p Un < - U -C B Un <
EQUATION1433 V2 EN

(Equation 59)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un< down to Un< (1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un< (1.0 CrvSatn/ 100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn -C > 0 100


(Equation 60)

EQUATION1435 V1 EN

The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 21.3 "Inverse characteristics".

233 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Voltage

UL1 UL2 UL3

IDMT Voltage

Time
IEC12000186-1-en.vsd
IEC12000186 V1 EN

Figure 108:

Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2pickup for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Note that for the undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 109 and figure 110.

234 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection

tIReset1 Voltage

tIReset1
START HystAbs1 TRIP

Measured Voltage

U1<

Time START TRIP t

Time Integrator t

Frozen Timer

Instantaneous

Linearly decreased

Time
IEC05000010-4-en.vsd

IEC05000010 V4 EN

Figure 109:

Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different reset types

235 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Voltage START

tIReset1 tIReset1 START HystAbs1 TRIP Measured Voltage

U1<

Time START t

TRIP

Time Integrator t

Frozen Timer

Time Instantaneous Linearly decreased


IEC05000011-en-3.vsd
IEC05000011 V3 EN

Figure 110:

Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different reset types

Definite timer delay When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 111. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure 112 and figure 113 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

236 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection

ST1

U U1<

a a<b b

tReset1 t OFF Delay t

t1 TR1 AND ON Delay

IEC09000785-2-en.vsd
IEC09000785 V2 EN

Figure 111:

Detailed logic diagram for step 1, DT operation

U1<

START

TRIP tReset1

t1

IEC10000039-2-en.vsd
IEC10000039 V2 EN

Figure 112:

Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset

237 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

U1<

START

TRIP

tReset1

t1

IEC10000040-2-en.vsd
IEC10000040 V2 EN

Figure 113:

Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 operation

7.1.2.3

Blocking
It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV partially or completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: BLKTR1: BLKST1: BLKTR2: BLKST2: blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the START outputs of step 1, are blocked. The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking can also be set to Off resulting in no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2. In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get very low. The event will START both the under voltage function and the blocking function, as seen in figure 114. The delay of the blocking function must be set less than the time delay of under voltage function.

238 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection

Disconnection

Normal voltage U1< U2<

tBlkUV1 < t1,t1Min IntBlkStVal1 IntBlkStVal2 Time Block step 1 Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
IEC05000466 V1 EN

tBlkUV2 < t2,t2Min

Figure 114:

Blocking function

7.1.2.4

Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV is schematically shown in Figure 115.

239 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

UL1

Comparator
UL1 < U1<

UL2

Comparator
UL2 < U1<

Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 IntBlkStVal1


START

ST1L1
Phase 1

ST1L2
Phase 2 Phase 3

UL3

Comparator
UL3 < U1<

Start t1 t1Reset & Trip Output Logic Step 1

ST1L3 ST1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR1

OR

Time integrator MinVoltSelector


tIReset1 ResetTypeCrv1

TRIP

OR Comparator
UL1 < U2<

Comparator
UL2 < U2<

Comparator
UL3 < U2<

Voltage Phase Selector OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 IntBlkStVal2


START Time integrator tIReset2 ResetTypeCrv2

ST2L1
Phase 1

ST2L2
Phase 2 Phase 3

Start t2 t2Reset & Trip Output Logic Step 2

ST2L3 ST2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 TR2 OR START

OR

TRIP

MinVoltSelector

OR

OR

TRIP

IEC05000834-2-en.vsd
IEC05000834 V2 EN

Figure 115:

Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

240 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection Function block


UV2PTUV U3P* BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2 TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 START ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 IEC06000276-2-en.vsd
IEC06000276 V2 EN

7.1.3

Figure 116:

UV2PTUV function block

7.1.4

Input and output signals


Table 141:
Name U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2

UV2PTUV Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 Description Three phase voltages Block of function Block of operate signal, step 1 Block of step 1 Block of operate signal, step 2 Block of step 2

Table 142:
Name TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 START

UV2PTUV Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Trip Common trip signal from step1 Trip signal from step1 phase L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L2 Trip signal from step1 phase L3 Common trip signal from step2 Trip signal from step2 phase L1 Trip signal from step2 phase L2 Trip signal from step2 phase L3 General start signal

Table continues on next page

241 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection


Name ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Common start signal from step1 Start signal from step1 phase L1 Start signal from step1 phase L2 Start signal from step1 phase L3 Common start signal from step2 Start signal from step2 phase L1 Start signal from step2 phase L2 Start signal from step2 phase L3

7.1.5
Table 143:
Name Operation UBase OperationStep1 Characterist1

Setting parameters
UV2PTUV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 100 0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10 Off Block of trip Block all 1 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 0.0 - 100.0 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve Unit kV Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 On Definite time Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1

OpMode1

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 1 Definitive time delay of step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1

U1< t1 t1Min k1 IntBlkSel1

%UB s s -

1 0.01 0.001 0.01 -

70 5.00 5.000 0.05 Off

IntBlkStVal1 tBlkUV1 HystAbs1 OperationStep2 Characterist2

%UB s %UB -

1 0.001 0.1 -

20 0.000 0.5 On Definite time

Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of UBase, step 1 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1 Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2

Table continues on next page

242 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection


Values (Range) 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10 Off Block of trip Block all 1 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 0.0 - 100.0 Unit Step Default 1 out of 3 Description Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 2 Definitive time delay of step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2

Name OpMode2

U2< t2 t2Min k2 IntBlkSel2

%UB s s -

1 0.001 0.001 0.01 -

50 5.000 5.000 0.05 Off

IntBlkStVal2 tBlkUV2 HystAbs2

%UB s %UB

1 0.001 0.1

20 0.000 0.5

Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of UBase, step 2 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

Table 144:
Name tReset1 ResetTypeCrv1

UV2PTUV Group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.50 - 100.00 0.0 - 1.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 3.000 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000 Unit s Step 0.001 Default 0.025 Instantaneous Description Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for step 1 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for prog. under voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for step 2 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2

tIReset1 ACrv1 BCrv1 CCrv1 DCrv1 PCrv1 CrvSat1 tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2

s % s -

0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 1 0.001 -

0.025 1.000 1.00 0.0 0.000 1.000 0 0.025 Instantaneous

tIReset2 ACrv2

s -

0.001 0.001

0.025 1.000

Table continues on next page

243 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection


Name BCrv2 CCrv2 DCrv2 PCrv2 CrvSat2 Values (Range) 0.50 - 100.00 0.0 - 1.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 3.000 0 - 100 Unit % Step 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 1 Default 1.00 0.0 0.000 1.000 0 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for prog. under voltage IDMT curve, step 2

Table 145:
Name ConnType

UV2PTUV Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) PhN DFT PhPh RMS PhN RMS PhPh DFT Unit Step Default PhN DFT Description Group selector for connection type

7.1.6

Technical data
Table 146:
Function Operate voltage, low and high step Absolute hysteresis Internal blocking level, step 1 and step 2 Inverse time characteristics for step 1 and step 2, see table 618 Definite time delay, step 1 Definite time delays Minimum operate time, inverse characteristics Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

UV2PTUV technical data


Range or value (1100)% of UBase (0100)% of UBase (1100)% of UBase Accuracy 0.5% of Ur 0.5% of Ur 0.5% of Ur

See table 618

(0.00 - 6000.00) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.00060.000) s

0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

25 ms typically at 2 x Uset to 0 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 10 ms typically at 2 x Uset to 0 15 ms typically

244 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection

7.2

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV


Function description Two step overvoltage protection IEC 61850 identification OV2PTOV IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 59

3U>
SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN V2 EN

7.2.1

Introduction
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, open line ends on long lines etc. Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) function can be used to detect open line ends, normally then combined with a directional reactive over-power function to supervise the system voltage. When triggered, the function will cause an alarm, switch in reactors, or switch out capacitor banks. OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed. OV2PTOV has an extremely high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

7.2.2

Principle of operation
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV is used to detect high power system voltage. OV2PTOV has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or threephase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding START signal is issued. OV2PTOV can be set to START/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either, definite time delay or inverse time delay. The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage UBase, which is set in kV, phase-to-phase. OV2PTOV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase fundamental value, phase-to-earth RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value. The choice of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase-to-earth or phase-tophase voltage. OV2PTOV will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set

245 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

percentage of the set base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage over:

U > (%) UBase( kV ) 3


EQUATION1434 V1 EN

(Equation 61)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:


U > (%) UBase(kV)
EQUATION1993 V1 EN

(Equation 62)

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root of three.

7.2.2.1

Measurement principle
All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> and U2>. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal. To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

7.2.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available: inverse curve A inverse curve B inverse curve C customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

t=

k U -U > U>
(Equation 63)

IEC09000051 V1 EN

The type B curve is described as:

246 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection

t=

k 480

32 U - U > - 0.5 U >

2.0

- 0.035

IECEQUATION2287 V1 EN

(Equation 64)

The type C curve is described as:


t= k 480 + 0.035

32 U - U > - 0.5 U >

3.0

IECEQUATION2288 V1 EN

(Equation 65)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

t=

kA U -Un > -C B Un >


p

+D

EQUATION1439 V2 EN

(Equation 66)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U< down to U< (1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U< (1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn -C > 0 100


(Equation 67)

EQUATION1435 V1 EN

The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration, see figure 117. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics"

247 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Voltage IDMT Voltage

UL1 UL2 UL3

Time
IEC05000016-2-en.vsd
IEC05000016 V2 EN

Figure 117:

Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Trip signal issuing requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the START condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for each step is settable (HystAbs2) to allow an high and accurate reset of the function. It should be noted that for Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time..

248 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection

tIReset1 Voltage START tIReset1 TRIP

U1>

HystAbs1

Measured Voltage

Time START t

TRIP

Time Integrator Frozen Timer t

Linearly decreased

Instantaneous
IEC09000055 V2 EN

Time
IEC09000055-2-en.vsd

Figure 118:

Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

249 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Voltage START

tIReset1 START HystAbs1 TRIP

tIReset1

U1> Measured Voltage

Time START t

TRIP

Time Integrator

Frozen Timer

Time Instantaneous
IEC05000020 V3 EN

Linearly decreased

IEC05000020-3-en.vsd

Figure 119:

Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

Definite time delay When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 120. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure 112 and figure 113 receptively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured

250 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection

ST1

U U1>

a a>b b

tReset1 t OFF Delay t

t1 TR1 AND ON Delay

IEC10000100-2-en.vsd
IEC10000100 V2 EN

Figure 120:

Detailed logic diagram for step 1, DT operation

U1>

START

TRIP tReset1

t1

IEC10000037-2-en.vsd
IEC10000037 V2 EN

Figure 121:

Example for Definite Time Delay stage rest

251 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

U1>

START

TRIP

tReset1

t1

IEC10000038-2-en.vsd
IEC10000038 V2 EN

Figure 122:

Example for Definite Time Delay stage operation

7.2.2.3

Blocking
It is possible to block Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV partially or completely, by binary input signals where:
BLOCK: BLKTR1: BLKST1: BLKTR2: BLKST2: blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

7.2.2.4

Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signals. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) is schematically described in figure 123.

252 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection

UL1

Comparator UL1 > U1> Comparator UL2 > U1> Comparator UL3 > U1>

ST1L1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3


Phase 1

UL2

ST1L2
Phase 2 Phase 3

UL3

START Time integrator tIreset1 ResetTypeCrv1

Start t1 t1Reset & Trip Output Logic Step 1

ST1L3 ST1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR1

OR

MaxVoltSelect

TRIP

OR

Comparator UL1 > U2> Comparator UL2 > U2> Comparator UL3 > U2>

Voltage Phase Selector OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3

Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

ST2L1 ST2L2 Start t2 t2Reset & Trip Output Logic Step 2 ST2L3 ST2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 TR2
START

OR

START Time integrator tIreset2 ResetTypeCrv2

MaxVoltSelect

TRIP

OR OR

OR

TRIP

IEC05000013-2-en.vsd
IEC05000013-WMF V2 EN

Figure 123:

Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV

253 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection 7.2.3 Function block


OV2PTOV U3P* BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2 TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 START ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 IEC06000277-2-en.vsd
IEC06000277 V2 EN

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Figure 124:

OV2PTOV function block

7.2.4

Input and output signals


Table 147:
Name U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2

OV2PTOV Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 Description Group signal for three phase voltage input Block of function Block of operate signal, step 1 Block of step 1 Block of operate signal, step 2 Block of step 2

Table 148:
Name TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 START

OV2PTOV Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Trip Common trip signal from step1 Trip signal from step1 phase L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L2 Trip signal from step1 phase L3 Common trip signal from step2 Trip signal from step2 phase L1 Trip signal from step2 phase L2 Trip signal from step2 phase L3 General start signal

Table continues on next page

254 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection


Name ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Common start signal from step1 Start signal from step1 phase L1 Start signal from step1 phase L2 Start signal from step1 phase L3 Common start signal from step2 Start signal from step2 phase L1 Start signal from step2 phase L2 Start signal from step2 phase L3

7.2.5
Table 149:
Name Operation UBase OperationStep1 Characterist1

Setting parameters
OV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 200 0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10 0.0 - 100.0 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 200 Unit kV Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 On Definite time Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1

OpMode1

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 1 Definitive time delay of step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1 Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2

U1> t1 t1Min k1 HystAbs1 OperationStep2 Characterist2

%UB s s %UB -

1 0.01 0.001 0.01 0.1 -

120 5.00 5.000 0.05 0.5 On Definite time

OpMode2

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 2

U2>

%UB

150

Table continues on next page

255 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection


Name t2 t2Min k2 HystAbs2 Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10 0.0 - 100.0 Unit s s %UB Step 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 Default 5.000 5.000 0.05 0.5 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Definitive time delay of step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

Table 150:
Name tReset1 ResetTypeCrv1

OV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.50 - 100.00 0.0 - 1.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 3.000 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.50 - 100.00 0.0 - 1.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 3.000 0 - 100 Unit s Step 0.001 Default 0.025 Instantaneous Description Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for step 1 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for step 2 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 2

tIReset1 ACrv1 BCrv1 CCrv1 DCrv1 PCrv1 CrvSat1 tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2

s % s -

0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 1 0.001 -

0.025 1.000 1.00 0.0 0.000 1.000 0 0.025 Instantaneous

tIReset2 ACrv2 BCrv2 CCrv2 DCrv2 PCrv2 CrvSat2

s %

0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 1

0.025 1.000 1.00 0.0 0.000 1.000 0

256 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection

Table 151:
Name ConnType

OV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) PhN DFT PhPh DFT PhN RMS PhPh RMS Unit Step Default PhN DFT Description Group selector for connection type

7.2.6

Technical data
Table 152:
Function Operate voltage, step 1 and 2 Absolute hysteresis Inverse time characteristics for steps 1 and 2, see table 617 Definite time delay, step 1 Definite time delays Minimum operate time, Inverse characteristics Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

OV2PTOV technical data


Range or value (1-200)% of UBase (0100)% of UBase Accuracy 0.5% of Ur at U < Ur 0.5% of U at U > Ur 0.5% of Ur at U < Ur 0.5% of U at U > Ur See table 617

(0.00 - 6000.00) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 15 ms typically

7.3

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV


Function description Two step residual overvoltage protection IEC 61850 identification ROV2PTOV IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 59N

3U0
TRV V1 EN

257 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection 7.3.1 Introduction

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Residual voltages may occur in the power system during earth faults. Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV function calculates the residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it from a single voltage input transformer fed from an open delta or neutral point voltage transformer. ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay. Reset delay ensures operation for intermittent earth faults.

7.3.2

Principle of operation
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV is used to detect high singlephase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3U0. The residual voltage can be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power transformer or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings are connected in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the threephase voltages and internally in the IED calculate the corresponding residual voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage to ROV2PTOV. ROV2PTOV has two steps with separate time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either, definite time delay or inverse time delay. The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-phase.

7.3.2.1

Measurement principle
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> and U2>. To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

7.3.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available: inverse curve A inverse curve B inverse curve C customer programmable inverse curve

258 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection

The type A curve is described as:


t= k U - Un > Un >
(Equation 68)

IECEQUATION2422 V1 EN

where: Un> U Set value for step 1 and step 2 Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:


t= k 480 U - Un > - 0.5 32 Un >
2.0

- 0.035

IECEQUATION2423 V1 EN

(Equation 69)

The type C curve is described as:


t= k 480 U - Un > - 0.5 32 U >
3.0

+ 0.035

IECEQUATION2421 V1 EN

(Equation 70)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

t=

kA U -Un > -C B Un >


p

+D

EQUATION1439 V2 EN

(Equation 71)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up to Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn -C > 0 100


(Equation 72)

EQUATION1440 V1 EN

The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics".

259 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the START condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Also notice that for the overvoltage function IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 118 and figure 119.

260 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection

tIReset1 Voltage START tIReset1 TRIP

U1>

HystAbs1

Measured Voltage

Time START t

TRIP

Time Integrator Frozen Timer t

Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Time
IEC09000055-2-en.vsd

IEC09000055 V2 EN

Figure 125:

Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

261 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Voltage START

tIReset1 START HystAbs1 TRIP

tIReset1

U1> Measured Voltage

Time START t

TRIP

Time Integrator

Frozen Timer

Time Instantaneous
IEC05000020 V3 EN

Linearly decreased

IEC05000020-3-en.vsd

Figure 126:

Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

Definite timer delay When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure 127. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure 112 and figure 113 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

262 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection

ST1

U U1>

a a>b b

tReset1 t OFF Delay t

t1 TR1 AND ON Delay

IEC10000100-2-en.vsd
IEC10000100 V2 EN

Figure 127:

Detailed logic diagram for step 1, Definite time delay, DT operation

U1<

START

TRIP tReset1

t1

IEC10000039-2-en.vsd
IEC10000039 V2 EN

Figure 128:

Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset

263 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

U1<

START

TRIP

tReset1

t1

IEC10000040-2-en.vsd
IEC10000040 V2 EN

Figure 129:

Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

7.3.2.3

Blocking
It is possible to block Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV partially or completely, by binary input signals where:
BLOCK: BLKTR1: BLKST1: BLKTR2: BLKST2: blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all START and trip inputs related to step 2

7.3.2.4

Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic integration. The design of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV) is schematically described in figure 130.

264 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection

UN

Comparator UN > U1> START

Phase 1 Start t1 tReset1 & Trip Output Logic Step 1

ST1 TR1

Time integrator tIReset1 ResetTypeCrv1

TRIP

Comparator UN > U2> START

Phase 1 Start t2 tReset2 & Trip Output Logic Step 2 OR

ST2 TR2

OR

START

Time integrator tIReset2 ResetTypeCrv2

TRIP

TRIP

IEC05000748_2_en.vsd
IEC05000748 V2 EN

Figure 130:

Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

7.3.3

Function block
ROV2PTOV U3P* BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2 TRIP TR1 TR2 START ST1 ST2 IEC06000278-2-en.vsd
IEC06000278 V2 EN

Figure 131:

ROV2PTOV function block

265 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection 7.3.4 Input and output signals


Table 153:
Name U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

ROV2PTOV Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 Description Three phase voltages Block of function Block of operate signal, step 1 Block of step 1 Block of operate signal, step 2 Block of step 2

Table 154:
Name TRIP TR1 TR2 START ST1 ST2

ROV2PTOV Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Trip Common trip signal from step1 Common trip signal from step2 General start signal Common start signal from step1 Common start signal from step2

7.3.5
Table 155:
Name Operation UBase OperationStep1 Characterist1

Setting parameters
ROV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 - 200 0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10 0.0 - 100.0 Unit kV Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 On Definite time Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1

U1> t1 t1Min k1 HystAbs1

%UB s s %UB

1 0.01 0.001 0.01 0.1

30 5.00 5.000 0.05 0.5

Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step 1 in % of UBase Definitive time delay of step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1

Table continues on next page

266 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection


Values (Range) Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10 0.0 - 100.0 Unit Step Default On Definite time Description Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2

Name OperationStep2 Characterist2

U2> t2 t2Min k2 HystAbs2

%UB s s %UB

1 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1

45 5.000 5.000 0.05 0.5

Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step 2 in % of UBase Definitive time delay of step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

Table 156:
Name tReset1 ResetTypeCrv1

ROV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.50 - 100.00 0.0 - 1.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 3.000 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.50 - 100.00 0.0 - 1.0 Unit s Step 0.001 Default 0.025 Instantaneous Description Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for step 1 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2 Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for step 2 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2

tIReset1 ACrv1 BCrv1 CCrv1 DCrv1 PCrv1 CrvSat1 tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2

s % s -

0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 1 0.001 -

0.025 1.000 1.00 0.0 0.000 1.000 0 0.025 Instantaneous

tIReset2 ACrv2 BCrv2 CCrv2

s -

0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1

0.025 1.000 1.00 0.0

Table continues on next page

267 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection


Name DCrv2 PCrv2 CrvSat2 Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 3.000 0 - 100 Unit % Step 0.001 0.001 1 Default 0.000 1.000 0 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 2

7.3.6

Technical data
Table 157:
Function Operate voltage, step 1 and step 2 Absolute hysteresis Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, see table 619 Definite time setting, step 1 Definite time setting Minimum operate time Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

ROV2PTOV technical data


Range or value (1-200)% of UBase (0100)% of UBase Accuracy 0.5% of Ur at U < Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur 0.5% of Ur at U < Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur See table 619

(0.006000.00) s (0.00060.000) s (0.000-60.000) s 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 15 ms typically

0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms -

7.4

Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV


Function description Voltage differential protection IEC 61850 identification VDCPTOV IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 60

7.4.1

Introduction
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages from two three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step and one trip step.Alternatively, it can be used as voltage differential protection (VDCPTOV) for shunt capacitor banks.

268 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection Principle of operation


The Voltage differential protection function VDCPTOV (60) is based on comparison of the amplitudes of the two voltages connected in each phase. Possible differences between the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive voltage transformers can be compensated for with a ratio correction factors RFLx. The voltage difference is evaluated and if it exceeds the alarm level UDAlarm or trip level UDATrip signals for alarm (ALARM output) or trip (TRIP output) is given after definite time delay tAlarm respectively tTrip. The two three phase voltage supplies are also supervised with undervoltage settings U1Low and U2Low. The outputs for loss of voltage U1LOW resp U2LOW will be activated. The U1 voltage is supervised for loss of individual phases whereas the U2 voltage is supervised for loss of all three phases. Loss of all U1or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This blocking can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow = No. VDCPTOV function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary BLOCK input. It can for example, be activated from Fuse failure supervision function SDDRFUF. To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as service value. This allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve full balance in normal service. The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 132.

7.4.2

269 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

UDTripL1>

AND O R tReset tTrip t t

UDTripL2>

AND

AND

TRIP

UDTripL3>

AND AND

START

UDAlarmL1>

AND O R tAlarm

UDAlarmL2>

AND

AND

ALARM

UDAlarmL3>

AND

U1<L1 U1<L2 U1<L3 BlkDiffAtULow U2<L1 U2<L2 U2<L3 BLOCK AND t1 t AND U2LOW OR AND tAlarm t AND U1LOW

AND

en06000382-2.vsd
IEC06000382 V3 EN

Figure 132:

Principle logic for Voltage differential function VDCPTOV

7.4.3

Function block
VDCPTOV U3P1* U3P2* BLOCK TRIP START ALARM U1LOW U2LOW UL1DIFF UL2DIFF UL3DIFF IEC06000528-2-en.vsd
IEC06000528 V2 EN

Figure 133:

VDCPTOV function block

270 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection Input and output signals


Table 158:
Name U3P1 U3P2 BLOCK

7.4.4

VDCPTOV Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Bus voltage Capacitor voltage Block of function

Table 159:
Name TRIP START ALARM U1LOW U2LOW UL1DIFF UL2DIFF UL3DIFF

VDCPTOV Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL REAL REAL Description Voltage differential protection operated Start of voltage differential protection Voltage differential protection alarm Loss of U1 voltage Loss of U2 voltage Differential Voltage phase L1 Differential Voltage phase L2 Differential Voltage phase L3

7.4.5
Table 160:
Name Operation UBase BlkDiffAtULow UDTrip tTrip tReset U1Low U2Low tBlock UDAlarm tAlarm

Setting parameters
VDCPTOV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.50 - 2000.00 No Yes 0.0 - 100.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.0 - 100.0 0.0 - 100.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.0 - 100.0 0.000 - 60.000 Unit kV %UB s s %UB %UB s %UB s Step 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 Default Off 400.00 Yes 5.0 1.000 0.000 70.0 70.0 0.000 2.0 2.000 Description Operation Off/On Base Voltage Block operation at low voltage Operate level, in % of UBase Time delay for voltage differential operate, in milliseconds Time delay for voltage differential reset, in seconds Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of UBase Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of UBase Reset time for undervoltage block Alarm level, in % of UBase Time delay for voltage differential alarm, in seconds

271 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Table 161:
Name RFL1 RFL2 RFL3

VDCPTOV Group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 0.000 - 3.000 0.000 - 3.000 0.000 - 3.000 Unit Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 1.000 1.000 1.000 Description Ratio compensation factor phase L1 U2L1*RFL1=U1L1 Ratio compensation factor phase L2 U2L2*RFL2=U1L2 Ratio compensation factor phase L3 U2L3*RFL3=U1L3

7.4.6

Technical data
Table 162:
Function Voltage difference for alarm and trip Under voltage level Timers

VDCPTOV technical data


Range or value (0.0100.0) % of UBase (0.0100.0) % of UBase (0.00060.000)s Accuracy 0.5 % of Ur 0.5% of Ur 0.5% 10 ms

7.5

Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV


Function description Loss of voltage check IEC 61850 identification LOVPTUV IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 27

7.5.1

Introduction
Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV) is suitable for use in networks with an automatic system restoration function. LOVPTUV issues a three-pole trip command to the circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for a time longer than the set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.

7.5.2

Principle of operation
The operation of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is based on line voltage measurement. LOVPTUV is provided with a logic, which automatically recognizes if the line was restored for at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer. All three phases are required to be low before the output TRIP is activated. The START output signal indicates start. Additionally, LOVPTUV is automatically blocked if only one or two phase voltages have been detected low for more than tBlock.

272 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection

LOVPTUV operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at least tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open circuit breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the function block. Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a length set by setting tPulse. The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse-failure function (BLKU input) and the information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated circuit breaker. The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. LOVPTUV is also blocked when the IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the HMI test menu. (Blocked=Yes).

273 Technical reference manual

Section 7 Voltage protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

TEST TEST-ACTIVE

&
Blocked = Yes

BLOCK

>1
Function Enable tTrip tPulse

START

STUL1N STUL2N STUL3N Latched Enable

& &

TRIP

only 1 or 2 phases are low for at least 10 s (not three)

&

tBlock

>1

CBOPEN VTSU

>1

Reset Enable

&

>1

tRestore t

Set Enable Line restored for at least 3 s

>1

IEC07000089_2_en.vsd
IEC07000089 V2 EN

Figure 134:

Simplified diagram of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

7.5.3

Function block
LOVPTUV U3P* BLOCK CBOPEN VTSU TRIP START

IEC07000039-2-en.vsd
IEC07000039 V2 EN

Figure 135:

LOVPTUV function block

274 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 7 Voltage protection Input and output signals


Table 163:
Name U3P BLOCK CBOPEN VTSU

7.5.4

LOVPTUV Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 Description Voltage connection Block the all outputs Circuit breaker open Block from voltage circuit supervision

Table 164:
Name TRIP START

LOVPTUV Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Trip signal Start signal

7.5.5
Table 165:
Name Operation UBase UPE tTrip

Setting parameters
LOVPTUV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.1 - 9999.9 1 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 Unit kV %UB s Step 0.1 1 0.001 Default Off 400.0 70 7.000 Description Operation Off/On Base voltage Operate voltagein% of base voltage Ubase Operate time delay

Table 166:
Name tPulse tBlock tRestore

LOVPTUV Group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 0.050 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit s s s Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.150 5.000 3.000 Description Duration of TRIP pulse Time delay to block when all 3ph voltages are not low Time delay for enable the function after restoration

7.5.6

Technical data
Table 167:
Function Operate voltage Pulse timer Timers

LOVPTUV technical data


Range or value (0100)% of UBase (0.05060.000) s (0.00060.000) s Accuracy 0.5% of Ur 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

275 Technical reference manual

276

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 8 Frequency protection

Section 8

Frequency protection

About this chapter


This chapter describes the frequency protection functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

8.1

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF


Function description Underfrequency protection IEC 61850 identification SAPTUF IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 81

f<
SYMBOL-P V1 EN

8.1.1

Introduction
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of generation in the network. Underfrequency protection SAPTUF is used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine startup and so on. SAPTUF is also provided with undervoltage blocking. The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/ Analog inputs/Setting guidelines

8.1.2

Principle of operation
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF is used to detect low power system frequency. SAPTUF can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied, the time delay will be longer if the voltage is higher, and the delay will be shorter if the voltage is lower. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage

277 Technical reference manual

Section 8 Frequency protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage IntBlockLevel the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued.

8.1.2.1

Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency function is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPTUF gets blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.1.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for underfrequency protection SAPTUF can be either a settable definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time delay depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay and a low voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the setting TimeDlyOperate sets the time delay. For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings UNom, UMin, Exponent, tMax and tMin set the time delay according to figure 136 and equation 73. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of time delay to apply. Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay TimeDlyOperate. If the START condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, TimeDlyReset, the START output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. On the output of SAPTUF a 100ms pulse is issued, after a time delay corresponding to the setting of TimeDlyRestore, when the measured frequency returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.

8.1.2.3

Voltage dependent time delay


Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system, except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to decide, where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced, to make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At constant voltage, U, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to

278 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 8 Frequency protection

equation 73. At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a similar way as for the inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and overvoltage functions.
U - UMin t= UNom - UMin
EQUATION1182 V1 EN

Exponent

( tMax - tMin ) + tMin

(Equation 73)

where: t U Exponent tMax, tMin is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage), is the measured voltage is a setting, are time settings.

UMin, UNom are voltage settings corresponding to

The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 136, for:


UMin UNom tMax tMin Exponent = 90% = 100% = 1.0 s = 0.0 s = 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4

TimeDlyOperate [s]

Exponenent 3
0.5

1 2

90

95

100

U [% of UBase]
en05000075.vsd
IEC05000075 V1 EN

Figure 136:

Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for underfrequency protection SAPTUF. The time delay to operate is plotted as a function of the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 respectively.

279 Technical reference manual

Section 8 Frequency protection


8.1.2.4 Blocking

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF partially or completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: BLKTRIP: BLKREST: blocks all outputs blocks the TRIP output blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the START and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.

8.1.2.5

Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The time integrator can operate either due to a definite delay time or to the special voltage dependent delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay TimeDlyRestore. The design of underfrequency protection SAPTUF is schematically described in figure 137.

Block OR Comparator U < IntBlockLevel BLOCK BLKDMAGN

Voltage

Time integrator TimerOperation Mode Selector TimeDlyOperate TimeDlyReset START TRIP Start & Trip Output Logic START

Frequency

Comparator f < StartFrequency

TRIP

100 ms Comparator f > RestoreFreq TimeDlyRestore RESTORE

en05000726.vsd

IEC05000726 V1 EN

Figure 137:

Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF

280 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 8 Frequency protection Function block


SAPTUF U3P* BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN FREQ IEC06000279_2_en.vsd
IEC06000279 V2 EN

8.1.3

Figure 138:

SAPTUF function block

8.1.4

Input and output signals


Table 168:
Name U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST

SAPTUF Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 Description Voltage connection Block of function Blocking operate output. Blocking restore output.

Table 169:
Name TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN FREQ

SAPTUF Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL Description Operate/trip signal for frequency. Start/pick-up signal for frequency. Restore signal for load restoring purposes. Blocking indication due to low amplitude. Measured frequency

8.1.5
Table 170:
Name Operation UBase StartFrequency IntBlockLevel TimeDlyOperate TimeDlyReset TimeDlyRestore

Setting parameters
SAPTUF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 35.00 - 75.00 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit kV Hz %UB s s s Step 0.05 0.01 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default Off 400.00 48.80 50 0.200 0.000 0.000 Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Frequency setting/start value. Internal blocking level in % of UBase. Operate time delay in over/underfrequency mode. Time delay for reset. Restore time delay.

Table continues on next page

281 Technical reference manual

Section 8 Frequency protection


Name RestoreFreq TimerOperation UNom UMin Exponent tMax tMin Values (Range) 45.00 - 65.00 Definite timer Volt based timer 50 - 150 50 - 150 0.0 - 5.0 0.010 - 60.000 0.010 - 60.000 Unit Hz %UB %UB s s Step 0.01 1 1 0.1 0.001 0.001 Default 50.10 Definite timer 100 90 1.0 1.000 1.000 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Restore frequency if frequency is above frequency value. Setting for choosing timer mode. Nominal voltage in % of UBase for voltage based timer. Lower operation limit in % of UBase for voltage based timer. For calculation of the curve form for voltage based timer. Maximum time operation limit for voltage based timer. Minimum time operation limit for voltage based timer.

8.1.6

Technical data
Table 171:
Function Operate value, start function Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Operate time, definite time function Reset time, definite time function Voltage dependent time delay
U - UMin t= UNom - UMin
EQUATION1182 V1 EN

SAPTUF technical data


Range or value (35.00-75.00) Hz 100 ms typically 100 ms typically (0.000-60.000)s (0.000-60.000)s Settings: UNom=(50-150)% of Ubase UMin=(50-150)% of Ubase Exponent=0.0-5.0 tMax=(0.000-60.000)s tMin=(0.000-60.000)s Accuracy 2.0 mHz 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 5% + 200 ms

Exponent

( tMax - tMin ) + tMin

(Equation 74)

U=Umeasured

8.2

Overfrequency protection SAPTOF


Function description Overfrequency protection IEC 61850 identification SAPTOF IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 81

f>
SYMBOL-O V1 EN

282 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 8 Frequency protection Introduction


Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF is applicable in all situations, where reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed. Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network. Close to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause over frequency. SAPTOF is used mainly for generation shedding and remedial action schemes. It is also used as a frequency stage initiating load restoring. SAPTOF is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/ Analog inputs/Setting guidelines

8.2.1

8.2.2

Principle of operation
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is used to detect high power system frequency. SAPTOF has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available from the preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued.

8.2.2.1

Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPTOF is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.2.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is a settable definite time delay, specified by the setting TimeDlyOperate. TRIP signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay, TimeDlyReset. If the START condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again
283

Technical reference manual

Section 8 Frequency protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

within a user defined reset time, TimeDlyReset, the START output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. It is to be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.

8.2.2.3

Blocking
It is possible to block overfrequency protection SAPTOF partially or completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: BLKTRIP: blocks all outputs blocks the TRIP output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the START and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.

8.2.2.4

Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the power system. The time integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF is schematically described in figure 139.

BLOCK BLKTRIP Comparator U < IntBlockLevel OR BLOCK BLKDMAGN

Voltage

Time integrator Definite Time Delay START Comparator f > StartFrequency

Start & Trip Output Logic

START

Frequency

TimeDlyOperate TRIP TimeDlyReset TRIP

en05000735.vsd

IEC05000735 V1 EN

Figure 139:

Schematic design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF

284 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 8 Frequency protection Function block


SAPTOF U3P* BLOCK BLKTRIP TRIP START BLKDMAGN FREQ IEC06000280_2_en.vsd
IEC06000280 V2 EN

8.2.3

Figure 140:

SAPTOF function block

8.2.4

Input and output signals


Table 172:
Name U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP

SAPTOF Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 Description Voltage connection Block of function Blocking operate output.

Table 173:
Name TRIP START BLKDMAGN FREQ

SAPTOF Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL Description Operate/trip signal for frequency. Start/pick-up signal for frequency. Blocking indication due to low amplitude. Measured frequency

8.2.5
Table 174:
Name Operation UBase StartFrequency IntBlockLevel TimeDlyOperate TimeDlyReset

Setting parameters
SAPTOF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 35.00 - 75.00 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit kV Hz %UB s s Step 0.05 0.01 1 0.001 0.001 Default Off 400.00 51.20 50 0.000 0.000 Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Frequency setting/start value. Internal blocking level in % of UBase. Operate time delay in over/underfrequency mode. Time delay for reset.

285 Technical reference manual

Section 8 Frequency protection 8.2.6 Technical data


Table 175:
Function Operate value, start function

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

SAPTOF technical data


Range or value (35.00-75.00) Hz Accuracy 2.0 mHz at symmetrical threephase voltage 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Operate time, definite time function Reset time, definite time function

100 ms typically at fset -0.5 Hz to fset +0.5 Hz 100 ms typically (0.000-60.000)s (0.000-60.000)s

8.3

Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC


Function description Rate-of-change frequency protection IEC 61850 identification SAPFRC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 81

df/dt > <


SYMBOL-N V1 EN

8.3.1

Introduction
Rate-of-change frequency protection function (SAPFRC) gives an early indication of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC can be used for generation shedding, load shedding and remedial action schemes. SAPFRC can discriminate between positive or negative change of frequency. SAPFRC is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phaseneutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/Setting guidelines.

8.3.2

Principle of operation
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC is used to detect fast power system frequency changes, increase as well as, decrease at an early stage. SAPFRC has a settable definite time delay. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains below the set value, for negative rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP signal is issued. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains above the set value, for positive rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time

286 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 8 Frequency protection

delay, the TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, that is if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage IntBlockLevel, the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued. If the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.

8.3.2.1

Measurement principle
The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFreqGrad. Rate-ofchange frequency protection SAPFRC is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPFRC is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting StartFreqGrad, controls if SAPFRC reacts on a positive or on a negative change in frequency. If SAPFRC is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting StartFreqGrad has been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, then a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency recovers to a value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of StartFreqGrad, sets SAPFRC to START and TRIP for frequency increases. To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.3.2.2

Time delay
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC has a settable definite time delay, tTrip. . Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the START condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the START output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back into the hysteresis area. The RESTORE output of SAPFRC is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the restore period, defined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.

8.3.2.3

Blocking
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

287 Technical reference manual

Section 8 Frequency protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

BLOCK: BLKTRIP: BLKREST:

blocks all outputs blocks the TRIP output blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the START and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.

8.3.2.4

Design
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting StartFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power system switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued. The sign of the setting StartFreqGrad is essential, and controls if the function is used for raising or lowering frequency conditions. The design of SAPFRC is schematically described in figure 141.

BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKRESET OR Comparator U < IntBlockLevel Start & Trip Output Logic BLOCK BLKDMAGN

Voltage

Rate-of-Change of Frequency

Comparator If [StartFreqGrad<0 START AND df/dt < StartFreqGrad] OR [StartFreqGrad>0 AND df/dt > StartFreqGrad] Then START

Time integrator Definite Time Delay TimeDlyOperate TimeDlyReset

START

TRIP

100 ms Frequency Comparator f > RestoreFreq TimeDlyRestore RESTORE

en05000835.vsd
IEC05000835 V1 EN

Figure 141:

Schematic design of Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC

288 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 8 Frequency protection Function block


SAPFRC U3P* BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN IEC06000281-2-en.vsd
IEC06000281 V2 EN

8.3.3

Figure 142:

SAPFRC function block

8.3.4

Input and output signals


Table 176:
Name U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST

SAPFRC Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 Description Group signal for voltage input Block of function Blocking operate output. Blocking restore output.

Table 177:
Name TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN

SAPFRC Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Operate/trip signal for frequencyGradient Start/pick-up signal for frequencyGradient Restore signal for load restoring purposes. Blocking indication due to low amplitude.

8.3.5
Table 178:
Name Operation UBase StartFreqGrad IntBlockLevel tTrip RestoreFreq tRestore tReset

Setting parameters
SAPFRC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 -10.00 - 10.00 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 45.00 - 65.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit kV Hz/s %UB s Hz s s Step 0.05 0.01 1 0.001 0.01 0.001 0.001 Default Off 400.00 0.50 50 0.200 49.90 0.000 0.000 Description Operation Off / On Base setting for the phase-phase voltage in kV Frequency gradient start value. Sign defines direction. Internal blocking level in % of UBase. Operate time delay in pos./neg. frequency gradient mode. Restore frequency if frequency is above frequency value (Hz) Restore time delay. Time delay for reset.

289 Technical reference manual

Section 8 Frequency protection 8.3.6 Technical data


Table 179:
Function Operate value, start function Operate value, internal blocking level Operate time, start function

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

SAPFRC Technical data


Range or value (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s (0-100)% of UBase 100 ms typically Accuracy 10.0 mHz/s 0.5% of Ur -

290 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Section 9

Multipurpose protection

About this chapter


This chapter describes Multipurpose protection and includes the General current and voltage function. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

9.1

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC


Function description General current and voltage protection IEC 61850 identification CVGAPC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -

9.1.1

Introduction
The General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) can be utilized as a negative sequence current protection detecting unsymmetrical conditions such as open phase or unsymmetrical faults. CVGAPC can also be used to improve phase selection for high resistive earth faults, outside the distance protection reach, for the transmission line. Three functions are used, which measures the neutral current and each of the three phase voltages. This will give an independence from load currents and this phase selection will be used in conjunction with the detection of the earth fault from the directional earth fault protection function.

9.1.2
9.1.2.1

Principle of operation
Measured quantities within CVGAPC
General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool. The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 180.

291 Technical reference manual

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Table 180:

Current selection for CVGAPC function


Comment CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 current phasor CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 current phasor CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 current phasor CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3 CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and phase L2 current phasor (IL1-IL2) CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L2 current phasor and phase L3 current phasor (IL2-IL3) CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L3 current phasor and phase L1 current phasor ( IL3-IL1) CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum magnitude CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum magnitude CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time

Set value for the parameter

CurrentInput
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Phase1 Phase2 Phase3 PosSeq NegSeq 3ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh

UnbalancePh

10

Phase1-Phase2

11

Phase2-Phase3

12

Phase3-Phase1

13 14 15

MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph

The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 181:
Table 181: Voltage selection for CVGAPC function
Comment CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 voltage phasor CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 voltage phasor

Set value for the parameter

VoltageInput
1 2 3 Phase1 Phase2 Phase3

Table continues on next page 292 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Set value for the parameter

VoltageInput
4 5 PosSeq -NegSeq

Comment CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence voltage phasor CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used. CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used. CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 voltage phasor and phase L2 voltage phasor (UL1-UL2) CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L2 voltage phasor and phase L3 voltage phasor (UL2-UL3) CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L3 voltage phasor and phase L1 voltage phasor ( UL3-UL1) CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum magnitude CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum magnitude CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and phph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time

-3ZeroSeq

7 8 9

MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh

10

Phase1-Phase2

11

Phase2-Phase3

12

Phase3-Phase1

13 14 15

MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph

It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 181 is always applicable regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2 & UL3 or three phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1). This information about actual VT connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will then take automatic care about it. The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 182 for built-in current restraint feature:

293 Technical reference manual

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Table 182:

Restraint current selection for CVGAPC function


Comment CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3 CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude

Set value for the parameter RestrCurr 1 2 3 4 PosSeq NegSeq 3ZeroSeq MaxPh

9.1.2.2

Base quantities for CVGAPC function


The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for pickup levels of all measuring stages, shall be entered as setting parameters for every CVGAPC function. Base current shall be entered as: 1. 2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 180. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by 3 (1.732 Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 180.

Base voltage shall be entered as: 1. 2. rated phase-to-earth voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 181. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 181.

9.1.2.3

Built-in overcurrent protection steps


Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here. Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 180) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 0.96. However depending on other enabled built-in features this overcurrent pickup might not cause the overcurrent step start signal. Start signal will only come if all of the enabled builtin features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same time.

294 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Second harmonic feature

The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component in the measured current quantity (see table 180). However it shall be noted that this feature is not applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected: PosSeq (positive sequence current) NegSeq (negative sequence current) UnbalancePh (unbalance phase current) UnbalancePh-Ph (unbalance ph-ph current)

This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first harmonic ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level. The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent on the relevant phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 180) and measured voltage phasor (see table 181). In protection terminology it means that the General currrent and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function can be made directional by enabling this built-in feature. In that case overcurrent protection step will only operate if the current flow is in accordance with the set direction (Forward, which means towards the protected object, or Reverse, which means from the protected object). For this feature it is of the outmost importance to understand that the measured voltage phasor (see table 181) and measured current phasor (see table 180) will be used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper directional decision. CVGAPC function will NOT do this automatically. It will just simply use the current and voltage phasors selected by the end user to check for the directional criteria. Table 183 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones) for these two quantities for traditional directional relays.
Table 183:
Set value for the parameter

Directional feature

Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature


Set value for the parameter Comment Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90 depending on the power Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90 depending on the power system voltage level (X/ R ratio) Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0 to -90 depending on the power system earthing (that is, solidly earthed, earthed via resistor)

CurrentInput
PosSeq

VoltageInput
PosSeq

NegSeq

-NegSeq

3ZeroSeq

-3ZeroSeq

Table continues on next page

295 Technical reference manual

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Set value for the parameter Set value for the parameter

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

CurrentInput
Phase1 Phase2 Phase3

VoltageInput

Comment Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45 Directional overcurrent function for the second phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45 Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45

Phase2-Phase3 Phase3-Phase1 Phase1-Phase2

Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional feature is enabled. Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & U and IcosPhi&U. The first principle, referred to as "I & U" in the parameter setting tool, checks that: the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 143).

RCADir Ipickup ROADir I=3Io

U=-3U0

Operate region mta line


en05000252.vsd
IEC05000252 V1 EN

Figure 143:
where:

I & U directional operating principle for CVGAPC function

RCADir is -75 ROADir is 50

The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&U" in the parameter setting tool, checks that:

296 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

that the product Icos() is bigger than the set pick-up level, where is angle between the current phasor and the mta line that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the Icos() straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 143).

RCADir Ipickup ROADir F I=3Io

U=-3U0

Operate region mta line

en05000253.vsd
IEC05000253 V1 EN

Figure 144:
where:

CVGAPC, IcosPhi&U directional operating principle

RCADir is -75 ROADir is 50

Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the preset value. User can select one of the following three options: Non-directional (operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage) Block (operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage) Memory (memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)

It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms. After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage goes above set voltage memory limit. The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a measured voltage quantity (see table 181). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. Two different types of dependencies are available: Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)
297 Technical reference manual

Voltage restraint/control feature

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

ULowLimit_OC1

UHighLimit_OC1 Selected Voltage Magnitude


en05000324.vsd

IEC05000324 V1 EN

Figure 145:

Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Step)


OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

UHighLimit_OC1

Selected Voltage Magnitude


en05000323.vsd

IEC05000323 V1 EN

Figure 146:

Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation

This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will as well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT

298 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

curves (overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage conditions). The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a restraining current quantity (see table 182). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the restraining current.

Current restraint feature

IMeasured
te ra pe O

ea ar

IsetHigh

tr es *I r f f e Co s tr e I>R

ain

IsetLow

atan(RestrCoeff) Restraint
en05000255.vsd
IEC05000255 V1 EN

Figure 147:

Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude

This feature will simply prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude. When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.

9.1.2.4

Built-in undercurrent protection steps


Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 180) with the set pickup level. The undercurrent step will pickup and set its start signal to one if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The start signal will start definite time delay with set time delay. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip
299

Technical reference manual

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the setting.

9.1.2.5

Built-in overvoltage protection steps


Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here. Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see table 181) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 0.99. The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.

9.1.2.6

Built-in undervoltage protection steps


Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here. Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see table 181) with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 1.01. The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.

9.1.2.7

Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for CVGAPC function are shown in the following figures.

300 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

IED
ADM CVGAPC function
Current and voltage selection settings

Phasor calculation of individual currents

A/D conversion scaling with CT ratio

Phasors & samples

Selection of which current and voltage shall be given to the built-in protection elements

Selected current Selected voltage

Restraint current selection

A/D conversion scaling with CT ratio

Phasor calculation of individual voltages

Selection of restraint current

Selected restraint current

Phasors & samples

IEC05000169_2_en.vsd
IEC05000169 V2 EN

Figure 148:

Treatment of measured currents within IED for CVGAPC function

Figure 148 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for multipurpose protection function The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and kilovolts. 1. 2. 3. Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage input. Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one threephase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules. Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one threephase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.

The multipurpose protection function: 1. 2. 3. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 180) for internally measured current. Selects one voltage from the three-phase input system (see table 181) for internally measured voltage. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 182) for internally measured restraint current.

301 Technical reference manual

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

CURRENT

UC1 2
Selected current
nd

Harmonic restraint

TRUC1

UC2 2nd Harmonic restraint OC1 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control / restraint 1

STUC2 TRUC2

STOC1 TROC1 BLK2ND DIROC1

Selected restraint current

OC2 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control / restraint 1

STOC2 TROC2

UDIRLOW DIROC2

STOV1

OV1

TROV1 STOV2

OV2
Selected voltage

TROV2 STUV1

UV1

TRUV1 STUV2

UV2

TRUV2

VOLTAGE

en05000170.vsd
IEC05000170 V1 EN

Figure 149:

CVGAPC function main logic diagram for built-in protection elements

302 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Logic in figure 149 can be summarized as follows: 1. 2. 3. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each protection element and step makes independent decision about status of its START and TRIP output signals. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following four figures Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps (internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.

Enable second harmonic

Second harmonic check

DEF time selected

DEF
OR

BLKTROC 1

AND

TROC1

Selected current

a b

a>b

OC1=On BLKOC1

StartCurr_OC1

AND

STOC1

Inverse Voltage control or restraint feature Directionality check DIR_OK Inverse time selected

Selected voltage

Selected restrain current

Current Restraint Feature Imeasured > k Irestraint

en05000831.vsd

IEC05000831 V1 EN

Figure 150:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step that is, OC1 (step OC2 has the same internal logic)

303 Technical reference manual

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Bin input: BLKUC1TR

Selected current

a b

b>a

DEF

AND

TRUC1

StartCurr_UC1

AND

Operation_UC1=On Bin input: BLKUC1

STUC1

en05000750.vsd
IEC05000750 V1 EN

Figure 151:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step that is, UC1 (step UC2 has the same internal logic)

DEF time selected Selected voltage


a b

DEF

BLKTROV1

AND

TROV1

OR
a>b

StartVolt_OV1

AND
Inverse

STOV1

Operation_OV1=On BLKOV1 Inverse time selected

en05000751.vsd
IEC05000751 V1 EN

Figure 152:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step OV1 (step OV2 has the same internal logic)

304 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

DEF time selected Selected voltage


a b

DEF OR

BLKTRUV 1

AND

TRUV1

b>a

StartVolt_UV1

AND Inverse

STUV1

Operation_UV1=On BLKUV1 Inverse time selected

en05000752.vsd
IEC05000752 V1 EN

Figure 153:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step UV1 (step UV2 has the same internal logic)

9.1.3

Function block
CVGAPC I3P* U3P* BLOCK BLKOC1 BLKOC1TR ENMLTOC1 BLKOC2 BLKOC2TR ENMLTOC2 BLKUC1 BLKUC1TR BLKUC2 BLKUC2TR BLKOV1 BLKOV1TR BLKOV2 BLKOV2TR BLKUV1 BLKUV1TR BLKUV2 BLKUV2TR TRIP TROC1 TROC2 TRUC1 TRUC2 TROV1 TROV2 TRUV1 TRUV2 START STOC1 STOC2 STUC1 STUC2 STOV1 STOV2 STUV1 STUV2 BLK2ND DIROC1 DIROC2 UDIRLOW CURRENT ICOSFI VOLTAGE UIANGLE IEC05000372-2-en.vsd
IEC05000372 V2 EN

Figure 154:

CVGAPC function block

305 Technical reference manual

Section 9 Multipurpose protection 9.1.4 Input and output signals


Table 184:
Name I3P U3P BLOCK BLKOC1 BLKOC1TR ENMLTOC1 BLKOC2 BLKOC2TR ENMLTOC2 BLKUC1 BLKUC1TR BLKUC2 BLKUC2TR BLKOV1 BLKOV1TR BLKOV2 BLKOV2TR BLKUV1 BLKUV1TR BLKUV2 BLKUV2TR

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

CVGAPC Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block of over current function OC1 Block of trip for over current function OC1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC1 Block of over current function OC2 Block of trip for over current function OC2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC2 Block of under current function UC1 Block of trip for under current function UC1 Block of under current function UC2 Block of trip for under current function UC2 Block of over voltage function OV1 Block of trip for over voltage function OV1 Block of over voltage function OV2 Block of trip for over voltage function OV2 Block of under voltage function UV1 Block of trip for under voltage function UV1 Block of under voltage function UV2 Block of trip for under voltage function UV2

Table 185:
Name TRIP TROC1 TROC2 TRUC1 TRUC2 TROV1 TROV2 TRUV1 TRUV2

CVGAPC Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description General trip signal Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1 Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2 Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1 Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2 Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1 Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2 Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1 Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2

Table continues on next page

306 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Name START STOC1 STOC2 STUC1 STUC2 STOV1 STOV2 STUV1 STUV2 BLK2ND DIROC1 DIROC2 UDIRLOW CURRENT ICOSFI VOLTAGE UIANGLE Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER INTEGER BOOLEAN REAL REAL REAL REAL Description General start signal Start signal from overcurrent function OC1 Start signal from overcurrent function OC2 Start signal from undercurrent function UC1 Start signal from undercurrent function UC2 Start signal from overvoltage function OV1 Start signal from overvoltage function OV2 Start signal from undervoltage function UV1 Start signal from undervoltage function UV2 Block from second harmonic detection Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse) Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse) Low voltage for directional polarization Measured current value Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi) Measured voltage value Angle between voltage and current

9.1.5
Table 186:
Name Operation CurrentInput

Setting parameters
CVGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On phase1 phase2 phase3 PosSeq NegSeq 3*ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph 1 - 99999 Unit Step Default Off MaxPh Description Operation Off / On Select current signal which will be measured inside function

IBase

3000

Base Current

Table continues on next page

307 Technical reference manual

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Name VoltageInput Values (Range) phase1 phase2 phase3 PosSeq -NegSeq -3*ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On 10.0 - 50.0 Off On PosSeq NegSeq 3*ZeroSeq Max 0.00 - 5.00 -180 - 180 1 - 90 0.0 - 5.0 Off On 2.0 - 5000.0 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.00 - 6000.00 Unit Step Default MaxPh Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Select voltage signal which will be measured inside function

UBase OperHarmRestr l_2nd/l_fund EnRestrainCurr RestrCurrInput

kV % -

0.05 1.0 -

400.00 Off 20.0 Off PosSeq

Base Voltage Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain Off / On Ratio of second to fundamental current harmonic in % Enable current restrain function On / Off Select current signal which will be used for curr restrain

RestrCurrCoeff RCADir ROADir LowVolt_VM Operation_OC1 StartCurr_OC1 CurveType_OC1

Deg Deg %UB %IB -

0.01 1 1 0.1 1.0 -

0.00 -75 75 0.5 Off 120.0 ANSI Def. Time

Restraining current coefficient Relay Characteristic Angle Relay Operate Angle Below this level in % of Ubase setting ActLowVolt takes over Operation OC1 Off / On Operate current level for OC1 in % of Ibase Selection of time delay curve type for OC1

tDef_OC1

0.01

0.50

Independent (definitive) time delay of OC1

Table continues on next page

308 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Values (Range) 0.05 - 999.00 1 - 10000 0.00 - 6000.00 Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Off Step Slope 0.02 - 5.00 1.0 - 200.0 1.0 - 200.0 Off On Non-directional Forward Reverse I&U IcosPhi&U Non-directional Block Memory Off On 2.0 - 5000.0 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.00 - 6000.00 0.05 - 999.00 Unit %IB s Step 0.01 1 0.01 Default 0.30 100 0.05 Off Description Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC1 Minimum operate current for step1 in % of IBase Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC1 Control mode for voltage controlled OC1 function

Name k_OC1 IMin1 tMin_OC1 VCntrlMode_OC1

VDepMode_OC1 VDepFact_OC1 ULowLimit_OC1 UHighLimit_OC1 HarmRestr_OC1 DirMode_OC1

%UB %UB -

0.01 0.1 0.1 -

Step 1.00 50.0 100.0 Off Non-directional

Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step, slope) Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC1 is U dependent Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of Ubase Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of Ubase Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse) Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for OC1 Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1 (Nodir, Blk, Mem) Operation OC2 Off / On Operate current level for OC2 in % of Ibase Selection of time delay curve type for OC2

DirPrinc_OC1 ActLowVolt1_VM

I&U Non-directional

Operation_OC2 StartCurr_OC2 CurveType_OC2

%IB -

1.0 -

Off 120.0 ANSI Def. Time

tDef_OC2 k_OC2

s -

0.01 0.01

0.50 0.30

Independent (definitive) time delay of OC2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC2

Table continues on next page 309 Technical reference manual

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Name IMin2 tMin_OC2 VCntrlMode_OC2 Values (Range) 1 - 10000 0.00 - 6000.00 Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Off Step Slope 0.02 - 5.00 1.0 - 200.0 1.0 - 200.0 Off On Non-directional Forward Reverse I&U IcosPhi&U Non-directional Block Memory Off On Off On 0 - 150 2.0 - 150.0 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 Off On Off On Off On 0 - 150 2.0 - 150.0 0.00 - 6000.00 Off On Unit %IB s Step 1 0.01 Default 50 0.05 Off Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Minimum operate current for step2 in % of IBase Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC2 Control mode for voltage controlled OC2 function

VDepMode_OC2 VDepFact_OC2 ULowLimit_OC2 UHighLimit_OC2 HarmRestr_OC2 DirMode_OC2

%UB %UB -

0.01 0.1 0.1 -

Step 1.00 50.0 100.0 Off Non-directional

Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step, slope) Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC2 is U dependent Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of Ubase Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of Ubase Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse) Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for OC2 Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2 (Nodir, Blk, Mem) Operation UC1 Off / On Enable internal low current level blocking for UC1 Internal low current blocking level for UC1 in % of Ibase Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in % of Ibase Independent (definitive) time delay of UC1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve UC1 Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain Operation UC2 Off / On Enable internal low current level blocking for UC2 Internal low current blocking level for UC2 in % of Ibase Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in % of Ibase Independent (definitive) time delay of UC2 Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain

DirPrinc_OC2 ActLowVolt2_VM

I&U Non-directional

Operation_UC1 EnBlkLowI_UC1 BlkLowCurr_UC1 StartCurr_UC1 tDef_UC1 tResetDef_UC1 HarmRestr_UC1 Operation_UC2 EnBlkLowI_UC2 BlkLowCurr_UC2 StartCurr_UC2 tDef_UC2 HarmRestr_UC2

%IB %IB s s %IB %IB s -

1 1.0 0.01 0.01 1 1.0 0.01 -

Off Off 20 70.0 0.50 0.00 Off Off Off 20 70.0 0.50 Off

Table continues on next page 310 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Values (Range) Off On 2.0 - 200.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.05 - 999.00 Off On 2.0 - 200.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.05 - 999.00 Off On 2.0 - 150.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.05 - 999.00 Off On 0.0 - 5.0 Off On Unit %UB Step 0.1 Default Off 150.0 Definite time Description Operation OV1 Off / On Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for OV1

Name Operation_OV1 StartVolt_OV1 CurveType_OV1

tDef_OV1 tMin_OV1 k_OV1 Operation_OV2 StartVolt_OV2 CurveType_OV2

s s %UB -

0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 -

1.00 0.05 0.30 Off 150.0 Definite time

Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of OV1 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for OV1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OV1 Operation OV2 Off / On Operate voltage level for OV2 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for OV2

tDef_OV2 tMin_OV2 k_OV2 Operation_UV1 StartVolt_UV1 CurveType_UV1

s s %UB -

0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 -

1.00 0.05 0.30 Off 50.0 Definite time

Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for OV2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OV2 Operation UV1 Off / On Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for UV1

tDef_UV1 tMin_UV1 k_UV1 EnBlkLowV_UV1 BlkLowVolt_UV1 Operation_UV2

s s %UB -

0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 -

1.00 0.05 0.30 On 0.5 Off

Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for UV1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV1 Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV1 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV1 in % of Ubase Operation UV2 Off / On

Table continues on next page

311 Technical reference manual

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Name StartVolt_UV2 CurveType_UV2 Values (Range) 2.0 - 150.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.05 - 999.00 Off On 0.0 - 5.0 Unit %UB Step 0.1 Default 50.0 Definite time Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for UV2

tDef_UV2 tMin_UV2 k_UV2 EnBlkLowV_UV2 BlkLowVolt_UV2

s s %UB

0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1

1.00 0.05 0.30 On 0.5

Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of UV2 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for UV2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV2 Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV2 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV2 in % of Ubase

Table 187:
Name CurrMult_OC1

CVGAPC Group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.00 - 6000.00 0.001 - 10.000 0.000 - 999.000 0.000 - 99.000 0.000 - 1.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 600.000 0.1 - 10.0 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.00 - 6000.00 0.001 - 10.000 Unit Step 0.1 Default 2.0 Instantaneous Description Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC1 Selection of reset curve type for OC1

ResCrvType_OC1

tResetDef_OC1 P_OC1 A_OC1 B_OC1 C_OC1 PR_OC1 TR_OC1 CR_OC1 CurrMult_OC2 ResCrvType_OC2

s -

0.01 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.1 -

0.00 0.020 0.140 0.000 1.000 0.500 13.500 1.0 2.0 Instantaneous

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC2 Selection of reset curve type for OC2

tResetDef_OC2 P_OC2

s -

0.01 0.001

0.00 0.020

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC2

Table continues on next page 312 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Values (Range) 0.000 - 999.000 0.000 - 99.000 0.000 - 1.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 600.000 0.1 - 10.0 0.00 - 6000.00 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.005 - 999.000 0.500 - 99.000 0.000 - 1.000 0.000 - 10.000 0.001 - 10.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.005 - 999.000 0.500 - 99.000 0.000 - 1.000 0.000 - 10.000 0.001 - 10.000 Unit s Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.01 Default 0.140 0.000 1.000 0.500 13.500 1.0 0.00 Instantaneous Description Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve UC2 Selection of reset curve type for OV1

Name A_OC2 B_OC2 C_OC2 PR_OC2 TR_OC2 CR_OC2 tResetDef_UC2 ResCrvType_OV1

tResetDef_OV1 tResetIDMT_OV1 A_OV1 B_OV1 C_OV1 D_OV1 P_OV1 ResCrvType_OV2

s s -

0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 -

0.00 0.00 0.140 1.000 1.000 0.000 0.020 Instantaneous

Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of OV1 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for OV1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV1 Selection of reset curve type for OV2

tResetDef_OV2 tResetIDMT_OV2 A_OV2 B_OV2 C_OV2 D_OV2 P_OV2

s s -

0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

0.00 0.00 0.140 1.000 1.000 0.000 0.020

Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for OV2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV2

Table continues on next page

313 Technical reference manual

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Name ResCrvType_UV1 Values (Range) Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.005 - 999.000 0.500 - 99.000 0.000 - 1.000 0.000 - 10.000 0.001 - 10.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.005 - 999.000 0.500 - 99.000 0.000 - 1.000 0.000 - 10.000 0.001 - 10.000 Unit Step Default Instantaneous Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Selection of reset curve type for UV1

tResetDef_UV1 tResetIDMT_UV1 A_UV1 B_UV1 C_UV1 D_UV1 P_UV1 ResCrvType_UV2

s s -

0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 -

0.00 0.00 0.140 1.000 1.000 0.000 0.020 Instantaneous

Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for UV1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV1 Selection of reset curve type for UV2

tResetDef_UV2 tResetIDMT_UV2 A_UV2 B_UV2 C_UV2 D_UV2 P_UV2

s s -

0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

0.00 0.00 0.140 1.000 1.000 0.000 0.020

Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV2 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for UV2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV2

314 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 9 Multipurpose protection Technical data


Table 188:
Function Measuring current input

9.1.6

CVGAPC technical data


Range or value phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, NegSeq, 3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh, UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph (1 - 99999) A phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh, UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph (0.05 - 2000.00) kV (2 - 5000)% of IBase (2 - 150)% of IBase (0.00 - 6000.00) s 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Parameter ranges for customer defined characteristic no 17: k: 0.05 - 999.00 A: 0.0000 - 999.0000 B: 0.0000 - 99.0000 C: 0.0000 - 1.0000 P: 0.0001 - 10.0000 PR: 0.005 - 3.000 TR: 0.005 - 600.000 CR: 0.1 - 10.0 (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase Accuracy -

Base current Measuring voltage input

Base voltage Start overcurrent, step 1 and 2 Start undercurrent, step 1 and 2 Definite time delay Operate time start overcurrent Reset time start overcurrent Operate time start undercurrent Reset time start undercurrent See table 614 and table 615

1.0% of Ir for I<Ir 1.0% of I for I>Ir 1.0% of Ir for I<Ir 1.0% of I for I>Ir 0.5% 10 ms See table 614 and table 615

Voltage level where voltage memory takes over Start overvoltage, step 1 and 2 Start undervoltage, step 1 and 2 Operate time, start overvoltage Reset time, start overvoltage Operate time start undervoltage

0.5% of Ur

(2.0 - 200.0)% of UBase (2.0 - 150.0)% of UBase 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 25 ms typically 2 to 0 x Uset

0.5% of Ur for U<Ur 0.5% of U for U>Ur 0.5% of Ur for U<Ur 0.5% of U for U>Ur -

Table continues on next page 315 Technical reference manual

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Function Reset time start undervoltage High and low voltage limit, voltage dependent operation Directional function Relay characteristic angle Relay operate angle Reset ratio, overcurrent Reset ratio, undercurrent Reset ratio, overvoltage Reset ratio, undervoltage Overcurrent: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Undercurrent: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Overvoltage: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Undervoltage: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 15 ms typically 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 15 ms typically 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 15 ms typically 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically Range or value 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset (1.0 - 200.0)% of UBase Accuracy -

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

1.0% of Ur for U<Ur 1.0% of U for U>Ur 2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees -

Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse (-180 to +180) degrees (1 to 90) degrees > 95% < 105% > 95% < 105%

316 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

Section 10

Secondary system supervision

About this chapter


This chapter describes functions like Current circuit supervision and Fuse failure supervision. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

10.1

Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF


Function description Current circuit supervision IEC 61850 identification CCSRDIF IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 87

10.1.1

Introduction
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of many protection functions such as differential, earth-fault current and negativesequence current functions. It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurrence of open CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high voltages will stress the secondary circuit. Current circuit supervision (CCSRDIF) compares the residual current from a three phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer. A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to block protection functions expected to give unwanted tripping.

10.1.2

Principle of operation
Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF compares the absolute value of the vectorial sum of the three phase currents |Iphase| and the numerical value of the residual current |Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 155. The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:

317 Technical reference manual

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of the numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|. The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than the set operate value IMinOp. No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms. CCSRDIF is enabled by setting Operation = On.

The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM will be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND-gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current supervision element(s) operate, for example, during a fault.

IEC05000463 V1 EN

Figure 155:

Simplified logic diagram for Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF

The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 156.

318 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

| I phase | - | I ref |

Slope = 1

Slope = 0.8 I MinOp

Operation area

| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
IEC99000068 V1 EN

Figure 156:

Operate characteristics

Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S I phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.

10.1.3

Function block
CCSRDIF I3P* IREF* BLOCK FAIL ALARM

IEC05000389-2-en.vsd
IEC05000389 V2 EN

Figure 157:

CCSRDIF function block

10.1.4

Input and output signals


Table 189:
Name I3P IREF BLOCK

CCSRDIF Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Group signal for three phase current input TBD Block of function

319 Technical reference manual

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Table 190:
Name FAIL ALARM

CCSRDIF Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Detection of current circuit failure Alarm for current circuit failure

10.1.5
Table 191:
Name Operation IBase IMinOp

Setting parameters
CCSRDIF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 5 - 200 Unit A %IB Step 1 1 Default Off 3000 20 Description Operation Off / On IBase value for current level detectors Minimum operate current differential level in % of IBase

Table 192:
Name Ip>Block

CCSRDIF Group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 5 - 500 Unit %IB Step 1 Default 150 Description Block of the function at high phase current, in % of IBase

10.1.6

Technical data
Table 193:
Function Operate current Block current

CCSRDIF technical data


Range or value (5-200)% of Ir (5-500)% of Ir Accuracy 10.0% of Ir at I Ir 10.0% of I at I > Ir 5.0% of Ir at I Ir 5.0% of I at I > Ir

10.2

Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF


Function description Fuse failure supervision IEC 61850 identification SDDRFUF IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -

10.2.1

Introduction
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (SDDRFUF) is to block voltage measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage

320 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

transformer and the IED in order to avoid unwanted operations that otherwise might occur. The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different algorithms, negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithms and an additional delta voltage and delta current algorithm. The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated or high-impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3U2 without the presence of the negative-sequence current 3I2. The zero sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low impedance earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3U0 without the presence of the residual current 3I0. For better adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode setting has been introduced which makes it possible to select the operating conditions for negative sequence and zero sequence based function. The selection of different operation modes makes it possible to choose different interaction possibilities between the negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithm. A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations.

10.2.2
10.2.2.1

Principle of operation
Zero and negative sequence detection
The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and voltages in all three phases and calculates, see figure 158: the zero-sequence voltage 3U0 the zero-sequence current 3I0 the negative sequence current 3I2 the negative sequence voltage 3U2

The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0> and 3I0<, 3U2> and 3I2<. The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zerosequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0> and the measured zerosequence current is below the set value 3I0<.

321 Technical reference manual

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U2> and the measured negative sequence current is below the set value 3I2<. A drop out delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence current will prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the two line ends.
Sequence Detection
3I0< IL1 Zero sequence filter Negative sequence filter
a b

CurrZeroSeq 3I0
a b

IL2

a>b

100 ms t

CurrNegSeq 3I2 AND FuseFailDetZeroSeq

IL3

3I2< 3U0> UL1 Zero sequence filter Negative sequence filter

a>b

100 ms t

AND

FuseFailDetNegSeq VoltZeroSeq

a b

a>b VoltNegSeq

3U0

UL2

a b

UL3 3U2>

a>b

3U2

IEC10000036-2-en.vsd
IEC10000036 V2 EN

Figure 158:

Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part

The calculated values 3U0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3U2 are available as service values on local HMI and monitoring tool in PCM600.

Input and output signals


The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ can be blocked in the following conditions: The input BLOCK is activated The input BLKTRIP is activated at the same time as the internal signal fufailStarted is not present The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off. The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.
322 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

The input BLKSP is intended to be connected to the trip output at any of the protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the operation of the fuse failure is blocked during a fixed time of 100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might operate. The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is activated. The block signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay. The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpMode selector. The additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker. The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated. The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions (undervoltage protection, synchro-check and so on) except for the impedance protection. The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection function.

323 Technical reference manual

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Fuse failure detection Main logic


TEST TEST ACTIVE BlocFuse = Yes BLOCK BLKTRIP AND 20 ms t 100 ms t FusefailStarted All UL < USealIn< AND SealIn = On OR AND AND OR intBlock

AND

3PH

AND Any UL < UsealIn< FuseFailDetDUDI OpDUDI = On FuseFailDetZeroSeq AND AND OR 5s t

AND FuseFailDetNegSeq AND UNsINs UZsIZs UZsIZs OR UNsINs UZsIZs AND UNsINs OptimZsNs OR
a b

OR OR

OpMode

CurrZeroSeq CurrNegSeq

a>b

AND AND

DeadLineDet1Ph MCBOP

200 ms t

AND 150 ms t

OR

AND

BLKZ

All UL > UsealIn< VoltZeroSeq VoltNegSeq AllCurrLow CBCLOSED DISCPOS


IEC10000033 V2 EN

60 s t 5s t

OR AND

OR

AND

BLKU

OR

IEC10000033-2-en.vsd

Figure 159:

Simplified logic diagram for main logic of Fuse failure function

324 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 10 Secondary system supervision


Delta current and delta voltage detection
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 160. The calculation of the change is based on vector change which means that it detects both amplitude and phase angle changes. The calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and DU> and the algorithm, detects a fuse failure if a sufficient change in voltage without a sufficient change in current is detected in each phase separately. The following quantities are calculated in all three phases: The change in voltage DU The change in current DI

10.2.2.2

The internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal is activated if the following conditions are fulfilled for a phase: The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above UPh> for more than 1.5 cycle The magnitude of DU is higher than the corresponding setting DU> The magnitude of DI is below the setting DI>

and at least one of the following conditions are fulfilled: The magnitude of the phase current in the same phase is higher than the setting IPh> The circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = True)

The first criterion means that detection of failure in one phase together with high current for the same phase will set the output. The measured phase current is used to reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) is not by certain followed by current change and a false fuse failure might occur The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled in any phase at the same time as circuit breaker is closed. Opening circuit breaker at one end and energizing the line from other end onto a fault could lead to wrong start of the fuse failure function at the end with the open breaker. If this is considering to be an important disadvantage, connect the CBCLOSED input to FALSE. In this way only the first criterion can activate the delta function.

325 Technical reference manual

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

DUDI Detection
DUDI detection Phase 1
IL1 One cycle delay |DI| DI< UL1 One cycle delay |DU| DU>
a a b a b

a>b

a>b

AND

UPh> IL2 UL2

a>b

20 ms t

1.5 cycle t

DUDI detection Phase 2 Same logic as for phase 1

IL3 UL3

DUDI detection Phase 3 Same logic as for phase 1

UL1

a b

a<b

IL1 IPh>

a b

a>b

AND OR AND

CBCLOSED UL2
a b

AND

OR

a<b

IL2

a b

a>b

AND OR AND

AND UL3
a b

OR

a<b

IL3

a b

a>b

AND OR AND OR FuseFailDetDUDI

AND

OR

IEC10000034-1-en.vsd
IEC10000034 V1 EN

Figure 160:

Simplified logic diagram for DU/DI detection part

326 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 10 Secondary system supervision


Dead line detection
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 161. A dead phase condition is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their respective setting values UDLD< and IDLD<. If at least one phase is considered to be dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated. If all three phases are considered to be dead the output DLD3PH is activated
Dead Line Detection
IL1 IL2 IL3 IDLD< UL1 UL2 UL3 UDLD< intBlock
a b a b a b a b a b a b

10.2.2.3

a<b AND a<b a<b

AllCurrLow

DeadLineDet1Ph a<b a<b a<b AND OR AND AND AND AND DLD3PH AND DLD1PH

IEC10000035-1-en.vsd
IEC10000035 V2 EN

Figure 161:

Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part

10.2.2.4

Main logic
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 162. The fuse failure supervision function (SDDRFUF) can be switched on or off by the setting parameter Operation to On or Off. For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode selector, OpMode, has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The different operation modes are: Off; The negative and zero sequence function is switched off UNsINs; Negative sequence is selected UZsIZs; Zero sequence is selected

327 Technical reference manual

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

UZsIZs OR UNsINs; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in parallel in an OR-condition UZsIZs AND UNsINs; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in series (AND-condition for operation) OptimZsNs; Optimum of negative and zero sequence (the function that has the highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be activated)

The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to On. When selected it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms. As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq, FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDUDI, and the specific functionality is released, the function will activate the output signal BLKU. The output signal BLKZ will be activated as well if not the internal dead phase detection, DeadLineDet1Ph, is not activated at the same time. The output BLKU can be used for blocking voltage related measuring functions (under voltage protection, synchrocheck, and so on). For blocking of impedance protection functions output BLKZ shall be used. If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting parameter SealIn is set to On it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase voltages is below the set value USealIn<. This will keep the BLKU and BLKZ signals activated as long as any phase voltage is below the set value USealIn<. If all three phase voltages drop below the set value USealIn< and the setting parameter SealIn is set to On the output signal 3PH will also be activated. The signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ signals will now be active as long as any phase voltage is below the set value USealIn<. If SealIn is set to On the fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary power interruption or re-start due to configuration change) it checks the stored value in its non volatile memory and re-establishes the conditions that were present before the shut down. All phase voltages must be restored above USealIn< before fuse failure is de-activated and removes the block of different protection functions. The output signal BLKU will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the setting USealIn< for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence voltage has been above the set value 3U0> and 3U2> for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents are below the setting IDLD< (operate level for dead line detection) and the circuit breaker is closed (input CBCLOSED is activated). If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpMode or OpDUDI. An additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation

328 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker. The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The impedance protection function does not have to be affected since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the distance protection. The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ as well as the signals DLD1PH and DLD3PH from dead line detections are blocked if any of the following conditions occur: The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off The input BLOCK is activated The input BLKTRIP is activated at the same time as no fuse failure indication is present The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

The input BLOCK is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output of any of the protection functions included in the IED and/or trip from external equipments via binary inputs. When activated for more than 20 ms without any fuse fail detected, the operation of the fuse failure is blocked during a fixed time of 100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might operate.

329 Technical reference manual

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Fuse failure detection Main logic


TEST TEST ACTIVE BlocFuse = Yes BLOCK BLKTRIP AND 20 ms t 100 ms t FusefailStarted All UL < USealIn< AND SealIn = On OR AND AND OR intBlock

AND

3PH

AND Any UL < UsealIn< FuseFailDetDUDI OpDUDI = On FuseFailDetZeroSeq AND AND OR 5s t

AND FuseFailDetNegSeq AND UNsINs UZsIZs UZsIZs OR UNsINs UZsIZs AND UNsINs OptimZsNs OR
a b

OR OR

OpMode

CurrZeroSeq CurrNegSeq

a>b

AND AND

DeadLineDet1Ph MCBOP

200 ms t

AND 150 ms t

OR

AND

BLKZ

All UL > UsealIn< VoltZeroSeq VoltNegSeq AllCurrLow CBCLOSED DISCPOS


IEC10000033 V2 EN

60 s t 5s t

OR AND

OR

AND

BLKU

OR

IEC10000033-2-en.vsd

Figure 162:

Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main logic

330 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 10 Secondary system supervision Function block


SDDRFUF I3P* U3P* BLOCK CBCLOSED MCBOP DISCPOS BLKTRIP BLKZ BLKU 3PH DLD1PH DLD3PH

10.2.3

IEC05000700-2-en.vsd
IEC05000700 V3 EN

Figure 163:

SDDRFUF function block

10.2.4

Input and output signals


Table 194:
Name I3P U3P BLOCK CBCLOSED MCBOP DISCPOS BLKTRIP

SDDRFUF Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 Description Current connection Voltage connection Block of function Active when circuit breaker is closed Active when external MCB opens protected voltage circuit Active when line disconnector is open Blocks operation of function when active

Table 195:
Name BLKZ BLKU 3PH DLD1PH DLD3PH

SDDRFUF Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Start of current and voltage controlled function General start of function Three-phase start of function Dead line condition in at least one phase Dead line condition in all three phases

10.2.5
Table 196:
Name Operation IBase UBase

Setting parameters
SDDRFUF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Unit A kV Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 Description Operation Off / On Base current Base voltage

Table continues on next page 331 Technical reference manual

Section 10 Secondary system supervision


Name OpMode Values (Range) Off UNsINs UZsIZs UZsIZs OR UNsINs UZsIZs AND UNsINs OptimZsNs 1 - 100 1 - 100 1 - 100 1 - 100 Off On 1 - 100 1 - 100 1 - 100 1 - 100 Off On 1 - 100 1 - 100 1 - 100 Unit Step Default UZsIZs Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Operating mode selection

3U0> 3I0< 3U2> 3I2< OpDUDI DU> DI< UPh> IPh> SealIn USealln< IDLD< UDLD<

%UB %IB %UB %IB %UB %IB %UB %IB %UB %IB %UB

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

30 10 30 10 Off 60 15 70 10 On 70 5 60

Operate level of residual overvoltage element in % of UBase Operate level of residual undercurrent element in % of IBase Operate level of neg seq overvoltage element in % of UBase Operate level of neg seq undercurrent element in % of IBase Operation of change based function Off/ On Operate level of change in phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level of change in phase current in % of IBase Operate level of phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level of phase current in % of IBase Seal in functionality Off/On Operate level of seal-in phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level for open phase current detection in % of IBase Operate level for open phase voltage detection in % of UBase

10.2.6

Technical data
Table 197:
Function Operate voltage, zero sequence Operate current, zero sequence Operate voltage, negative sequence Operate current, negative sequence Operate voltage change level Operate current change level Operate phase voltage Operate phase current Table continues on next page

SDDRFUF technical data


Range or value (1-100)% of UBase (1100)% of IBase (1100)% of UBase (1100)% of IBase (1100)% of UBase (1100)% of IBase (1-100)% of UBase (1-100)% of IBase Accuracy 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ir 0.5% of Ur 1.0% of Ir 5.0% of Ur 5.0% of Ir 0.5% of Ur 1.0% of Ir

332 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 10 Secondary system supervision


Function Operate phase dead line voltage Operate phase dead line current Operate time, general start of function Reset time, general start of function Range or value (1-100)% of UBase (1-100)% of IBase 25 ms typically at 1 to 0 of Ubase 35 ms typically at 0 to 1 of Ubase Accuracy 0.5% of Ur 1.0% of Ir -

333 Technical reference manual

334

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

Section 11

Control

About this chapter


This chapter describes the control functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

11.1

Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN


Function description Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing IEC 61850 identification SESRSYN IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 25

sc/vc
SYMBOL-M V1 EN

11.1.1

Introduction
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct moment including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability. Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing (SESRSYN) function checks that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely. SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and 1 breaker or ring busbar arrangements. Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can have different settings. For systems which are running asynchronous a synchronizing function is provided. The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. It is used for slip frequencies that are larger than those for synchrocheck and lower than a set maximum level for the synchronizing function.

335 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control 11.1.2


11.1.2.1

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Principle of operation
Basic functionality
The synchrocheck function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are simultaneously within their set limits. The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the actual measured quantities match the set conditions. The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and also determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker, from the measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all measured conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output is timed to give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker and the closing circuit. For single circuit breaker and 1 breaker circuit breaker arrangements, the SESRSYN function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage selection. For single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For 1 breaker circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers. The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document. For application related information, please refer to the application manual.

11.1.2.2

Logic diagrams Logic diagrams


The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the SESRSYN function components such as Synchrocheck, Synchronizing, Energizing check and Voltage selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.

Synchrocheck

The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for the synchrocheck function for evaluation. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as phase-neutral (or the opposite), this need to be compensated. This is done with a setting, which scales up the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage. When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start. The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC.

336 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

If both sides are higher than the set values, the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference: FreqDiffA, FreqDiffM, PhaseDiffA, PhaseDiffM and UDiffSC. If a compensation factor is set due to the use of different voltages on the bus and line, the factor is deducted from the line voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values. The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and may not exceed the set value. Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available and used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as required. The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN function and block of the Synchrocheck function respectively. Input TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output. The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions. A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions. UOKSC shows that the voltages are high, UDIFFSC, FRDIFFA, FRDIFFM, PHDIFFA, PHDIFFM shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference conditions are out of limits. Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicate that the circuit breaker has been closed by some other equipment or function than SESRSYN. The output is activated, if the voltage condition is fulfilled at the same time the phase angle difference between bus and line is suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees to smaller than 5 degrees.

337 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck.


OperationSC = On
AND AND

TSTAUTSY

TSTSC BLKSC BLOCK


OR AND AND 0-60 s t tSCA AND

AUTOSYOK

UDiffSC
AND

50 ms t

UHighBusSC UHighLineSC
AND 1

UOKSC UDIFFSC FRDIFFA PHDIFFA UDIFFME FRDIFFME PHDIFFME

FreqDiffA PhaseDiffA voltageDifferenceValue frequencyDifferenceValue phaseAngleDifferenceValue


32 ms t 100 ms AND

1 1

PhDiff > 60 PhDiff < 5

AND

INADVCLS

IEC07000114-3-en.vsd
IEC07000114 V3 EN

Figure 164:

Simplified logic diagram for the Auto Synchrocheck function

Synchronizing

When the function is set to OperationSynch = On the measuring will be performed. The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set values for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch, which is a supervision that the voltages are both live. Also the voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the set value for UDiffSynch, which is a p.u value of set voltage base values. If both sides are higher than the set values and the voltage difference between bus and line is acceptable, the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency FreqDiffMax and FreqDiffMin, rate of change of frequency FreqRateChange, phase angle, which has to be smaller than the internally preset value of 15 degrees.

338 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation to be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function resets. The function will also reset if the synchronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch time. This prevents that the function is, by mistake, maintained in operation for a long time, waiting for conditions to be fulfilled. The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively. TSTSYNCH will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate output.
SYN1 OPERATION SYNCH OFF ON TEST MODE OFF ON
STARTSYN
AND

BLKSYNCH OR

S R

AND

SYNPROGR

UDiffSynch
50 ms

UHighBusSynch UHighLineSynch FreqDiffMax FreqDiffMin

AND

AND

SYNOK

OR AND OR

TSTSYNOK

FreqRateChange fBus&fLine 5 Hz PhaseDiff < 15 deg PhaseDiff=closing angle


AND

AND

tClose Pulse

tMax Synch

SYNFAIL

IEC06000636-2-en.vsd
IEC06000636 V2 EN

Figure 165:

Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function

Energizing check

Voltage values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for evaluation by the Energizing check function. The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg and ULowBusEnerg for bus energizing and UHighLineEnerg and ULowLineEnerg for line energizing.
339 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed independently for MANENOK and AUTOENOK conditions. The Energizing direction can also be selected by an integer input AENMODE respective MENMODE, which for example, can be connected to a Binary to Integer function block (B16I). Integers supplied shall be 1=off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both. Not connected input with connection of INTZERO output from Fixed Signals (FIXDSIGN) function block will mean that the setting is done from Parameter Setting tool. The active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both. The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN function respective block of the Energizing check function. TSTENERG will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output.

Voltage selection

The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformer fuses for the different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN function and determines the parameters fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and fuse supervision. The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig. If No voltage sel. is set the default voltages used will be U-Line1 and U-Bus1. This is also the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for the used inputs must also be connected. The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check inputs. For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible to use an inverter for one of the positions.

Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars

This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors auxiliary contacts B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPEN-B2QCLD for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 1 is closed and the disconnector connected to bus 2 is opened the bus 1 voltage is used. All other combinations use the bus 2 voltage. The outputs B1SEL and B2SEL respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage.

340 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

The function checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage transformers. Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the fuse for Bus 1 and UB2OKUB2FF supervises the fuse for Bus 2. ULN1OK and ULN1FF supervises the fuse for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively be used dependent on the available signal. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in figure 166.
B1QOPEN B1QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD
AND AND

B1SEL B2SEL

1
AND

invalidSelection busVoltage

bus1Voltage bus2Voltage

UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF

OR

AND OR AND AND AND

selectedFuseOK USELFAIL

OR

OR

BLOCK

en05000779.vsd
IEC05000779 V1 EN

Figure 166:

Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars

Voltage selection for a 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement

Note that with 1 breaker schemes two Synchrocheck functions must be used in the IED (three for two IEDs in a complete bay). Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breaker is described. This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN (Synchronism and Energizing check) function. For the bus circuit breaker one side

341 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other side is connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the arrangement. Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD, LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1 voltage, which indicates B1SEL. The fuse supervision is connected to ULNOK-ULNFF and with alternative Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available from each fuse (MCB). The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 on one side and the other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2. Four different output combinations are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line. The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed. The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit breaker is closed. The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed. The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 circuit breaker is closed.

The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in figure 167 and for the tie circuit breaker in figure 168.

342 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD B1QOPEN B1QCLD LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD


AND AND AND AND AND OR AND AND

LN1SEL

LN2SEL B2SEL invalidSelection

line1Voltage line2Voltage bus2Voltage UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF


OR OR OR AND AND

lineVoltage

selectedFuseOK USELFAIL

OR

AND

AND

ULN2OK ULN2FF BLOCK

OR

AND

en05000780.vsd
IEC05000780 V1 EN

Figure 167:

Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2 breaker arrangement

343 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD
AND

LN1SEL 1 B1SEL
AND

B1QOPEN B1QCLD
AND

AND

line1Voltage bus1Voltage LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD


AND

busVoltage

LN2SEL 1 B2SEL
AND OR

B2QOPEN B2QCLD
AND

invalidSelection

AND

line2Voltage bus2Voltage UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF ULN2OK ULN2FF BLOCK

lineVoltage

OR

AND OR AND

OR

AND

selectedFuseOK USELFAIL

OR

AND

AND

OR

AND

en05000781.vsd
IEC05000781 V1 EN

Figure 168:

Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2 breaker arrangement.

Fuse failure supervision

External fuse failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of SESRSYN function in the IED. Alternatively, the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used when available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs labelled FF must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is faulty.
344 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

The UB1OK/UB2OK and UB1FF/UB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and the ULN1OK/ULN2OK and ULN1FF/ULN2FF inputs are related to the line voltage. Configure them to the binary input or function outputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing check function is blocked. The synchronizing and the synchrocheck function requires full voltage on both sides and will be blocked automatically in the event of fuse failures.

11.1.3

Function block
SESRSYN U3PBB1* SYNOK U3PBB2* AUTOSYOK U3PLN1* AUTOENOK U3PLN2* MANSYOK BLOCK MANENOK BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK BLKSC TSTAUTSY BLKENERG TSTMANSY B1QOPEN TSTENOK B1QCLD USELFAIL B2QOPEN B1SEL B2QCLD B2SEL LN1QOPEN LN1SEL LN1QCLD LN2SEL LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR LN2QCLD SYNFAIL UB1OK UOKSYN UB1FF UDIFFSYN UB2OK FRDIFSYN UB2FF FRDIFFOK ULN1OK FRDERIVA ULN1FF UOKSC ULN2OK UDIFFSC ULN2FF FRDIFFA STARTSYN PHDIFFA TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM TSTSC PHDIFFM TSTENERG INADVCLS AENMODE UDIFFME MENMODE FRDIFFME PHDIFFME UBUS ULINE MODEAEN MODEMEN IEC10000046-1-en.vsd
IEC10000046 V1 EN

Figure 169:

SESRSYN function block

11.1.4

Input and output signals


Table 198:
Name U3PBB1 U3PBB2 U3PLN1

SESRSYN Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL Default Description Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1, busbar 1 Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1, busbar 2 Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1, line 1

Table continues on next page 345 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name U3PLN2 BLOCK BLKSYNCH BLKSC BLKENERG B1QOPEN B1QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF ULN2OK ULN2FF STARTSYN TSTSYNCH TSTSC TSTENERG AENMODE MENMODE Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER INTEGER Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1, line 2 General block Block synchronizing Block synchro check Block energizing check Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line1 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line1 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line2 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line2 Bus1 voltage transformer OK Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure Bus2 voltage transformer OK Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure Line1 voltage transformer OK Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure Line2 voltage transformer OK Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure Start synchronizing Set synchronizing in test mode Set synchro check in test mode Set energizing check in test mode Input for setting of automatic energizing mode Input for setting of manual energizing mode

Table 199:
Name SYNOK AUTOSYOK AUTOENOK

SESRSYN Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Synchronizing OK output Auto synchro check OK Automatic energizing check OK

Table continues on next page

346 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Name MANSYOK MANENOK TSTSYNOK TSTAUTSY TSTMANSY TSTENOK USELFAIL B1SEL B2SEL LN1SEL LN2SEL SYNPROGR SYNFAIL UOKSYN UDIFFSYN FRDIFSYN FRDIFFOK FRDERIVA UOKSC UDIFFSC FRDIFFA PHDIFFA FRDIFFM PHDIFFM INADVCLS UDIFFME FRDIFFME PHDIFFME UBUS ULINE MODEAEN MODEMEN Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL INTEGER INTEGER Description Manual synchro check OK Manual energizing check OK Synchronizing OK test output Auto synchro check OK test output Manual synchro check OK test output Energizing check OK test output Selected voltage transformer fuse failed Bus1 selected Bus2 selected Line1 selected Line2 selected Synchronizing in progress Synchronizing failed Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set limits Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing Frequency difference in band for synchronizing Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing Voltage amplitudes above set limits Voltage difference out of limit Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation Inadvertent circuit breaker closing Calculated difference of voltage in p.u Calculated difference of frequency Calculated difference of phase angle Bus voltage Line voltage Selected mode for automatic energizing Selected mode for manual energizing

347 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control 11.1.5


Table 200:
Name Operation CBConfig

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Setting parameters
SESRSYN Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On No voltage sel. Double bus 1 1/2 bus CB 1 1/2 bus alt. CB Tie CB 0.001 - 9999.999 0.001 - 9999.999 -180 - 180 0.040 - 25.000 Off On 50.0 - 120.0 50.0 - 120.0 0.02 - 0.50 0.003 - 0.250 0.050 - 0.250 0.000 - 0.500 0.000 - 60.000 0.050 - 60.000 0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 50.0 - 120.0 50.0 - 120.0 0.02 - 0.50 0.003 - 1.000 0.003 - 1.000 5.0 - 90.0 Unit Step Default Off No voltage sel. Description Operation Off / On Select CB configuration

UBaseBus UBaseLine PhaseShift URatio OperationSynch UHighBusSynch UHighLineSynch UDiffSynch FreqDiffMin FreqDiffMax FreqRateChange tBreaker tClosePulse tMaxSynch tMinSynch OperationSC UHighBusSC UHighLineSC UDiffSC FreqDiffA FreqDiffM PhaseDiffA

kV kV Deg %UBB %UBL pu Hz Hz Hz/s s s s s %UBB %UBL pu Hz Hz Deg

0.001 0.001 5 0.001 1.0 1.0 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.001 1.0 1.0 0.01 0.001 0.001 1.0

400.000 400.000 0 1.000 Off 80.0 80.0 0.10 0.010 0.200 0.300 0.080 0.200 600.00 2.000 On 80.0 80.0 0.15 0.010 0.010 25.0

Base value for busbar voltage settings Base value for line voltage settings Phase shift Voltage ratio Operation for synchronizing function Off/ On Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing in % of UBaseBus Voltage high limit line for synchronizing in % of UBaseLine Voltage difference limit for synchronizing in p.u Minimum frequency difference limit for synchronizing Maximum frequency difference limit for synchronizing Maximum allowed frequency rate of change Closing time of the breaker Breaker closing pulse duration Resets synch if no close has been made before set time Minimum time to accept synchronizing conditions Operation for synchronism check function Off/On Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck in % of UBaseBus Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in % of UBaseLine Voltage difference limit in p.u Frequency difference limit between bus and line Auto Frequency difference limit between bus and line Manual Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Auto

Table continues on next page

348 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Values (Range) 5.0 - 90.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Off DLLB DBLL Both Off DLLB DBLL Both Off On 50.0 - 120.0 50.0 - 120.0 10.0 - 80.0 10.0 - 80.0 50.0 - 180.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit Deg s s Step 1.0 0.001 0.001 Default 25.0 0.100 0.100 DBLL Description Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Manual Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto Time delay output for synchrocheck Manual Automatic energizing check mode

Name PhaseDiffM tSCA tSCM AutoEnerg

ManEnerg

Both

Manual energizing check mode

ManEnergDBDL UHighBusEnerg UHighLineEnerg ULowBusEnerg ULowLineEnerg UMaxEnerg tAutoEnerg tManEnerg

%UBB %UBL %UBB %UBL %UB s s

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.001 0.001

Off 80.0 80.0 40.0 40.0 115.0 0.100 0.100

Manual dead bus, dead line energizing Voltage high limit bus for energizing check in % of UBaseBus Voltage high limit line for energizing check in % of UBaseLine Voltage low limit bus for energizing check in % of UBaseBus Voltage low limit line for energizing check in % of UBaseLine Maximum voltage for energizing in % of UBase, Line and/or Bus Time delay for automatic energizing check Time delay for manual energizing check

349 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Table 201:
Name SelPhaseBus1

SESRSYN Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) Phase L1 for busbar1 Phase L2 for busbar1 Phase L3 for busbar1 Phase L1L2 for busbar1 Phase L2L3 for busbar1 Phase L3L1 for busbar1 Pos. sequence for busbar1 Phase L1 for busbar2 Phase L2 for busbar2 Phase L3 for busbar2 Phase L1L2 for busbar2 Phase L2L3 for busbar2 Phase L3L1 for busbar2 Pos. sequence for busbar2 Phase L1 for line1 Phase L2 for line1 Phase L3 for line1 Phase L1L2 for line1 Phase L2L3 for line1 Phase L3L1 for line1 Pos. sequence for line1 Phase L1 for line2 Phase L2 for line2 Phase L3 for line2 Phase L1L2 for line2 Phase L2L3 for line2 Phase L3L1 for line2 Pos. sequence for line2 Unit Step Default Phase L1 for busbar1 Description Select phase for busbar1

SelPhaseBus2

Phase L1 for busbar2

Select phase for busbar2

SelPhaseLine1

Phase L1 for line1

Select phase for line1

SelPhaseLine2

Phase L1 for line2

Select phase for line2

350 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control Technical data


Table 202:
Function Phase shift, jline - jbus Voltage ratio, Ubus/Uline Voltage high limit for synchronizing and synchrocheck Reset ratio, synchrocheck Frequency difference limit between bus and line for synchrocheck Phase angle difference limit between bus and line for synchrocheck Voltage difference limit between bus and line for synchronizing and synchrocheck Time delay output for synchrocheck Frequency difference minimum limit for synchronizing Frequency difference maximum limit for synchronizing Maximum allowed frequency rate of change Closing time of the breaker Breaker closing pulse duration tMaxSynch, which resets synchronizing function if no close has been made before set time Minimum time to accept synchronizing conditions Voltage high limit for energizing check Reset ratio, voltage high limit Voltage low limit for energizing check Reset ratio, voltage low limit Maximum voltage for energizing Table continues on next page

11.1.6

SESRSYN technical data


Range or value (-180 to 180) degrees 0.500 - 2.000 (50.0-120.0)% of UBaseBus and UBaseLIne > 95% (0.003-1.000) Hz Accuracy 0.5% of Ur at U Ur 0.5% of U at U >Ur 2.0 mHz

(5.0-90.0) degrees

2.0 degrees

(0.02-0.5) p.u

0.5% of Ur

(0.000-60.000) s (0.003-0.250) Hz

0.5% 10 ms 2.0 mHz

(0.050-0.500) Hz

2.0 mHz

(0.000-0.500) Hz/s (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s

10.0 mHz/s 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

(0.000-60.000) s (50.0-120.0)% of UBaseBus and UBaseLIne > 95%

0.5% 10 ms 0.5% of Ur at U Ur 0.5% of U at U >Ur 0.5% of Ur 0.5% of Ur at U Ur 0.5% of U at U >Ur

UBaseLine
< 105%

(10.0-80.0)% of UBaseBus and

(50.0-180.0)% of UBaseBus and/ or UBaseLIne

351 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Function Time delay for energizing check Operate time for synchrocheck function Operate time for energizing function Range or value (0.000-60.000) s 160 ms typically 80 ms typically Accuracy

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

0.5% 10 ms -

11.2

Autorecloser SMBRREC
Function Description Autorecloser IEC 61850 identification SMBRREC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 79

O->I
SYMBOL-L V1 EN

11.2.1

Introduction
The autorecloser SMBRREC function provides high-speed and/or delayed autoreclosing for single or multi-breaker applications. Up to five three-phase reclosing attempts can be included by parameter setting. The first attempt can be single-, two and/or three phase for single phase or multi-phase faults respectively. Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A priority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only close if the fault proved to be transient. Each autoreclosing function can be configured to co-operate with a synchrocheck function.

11.2.2
11.2.2.1

Principle of operation
Logic Diagrams
The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding of the functionality.

11.2.2.2

Auto-reclosing operation Off and On


Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting parameters and through external control. With the setting Operation = On, the

352 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

function is activated while with the setting Operation = Off the function is deactivated. With the setting Operation = External ctrl, the activation/deactivation is made by input signal pulses, for example, from a control system. When the function is set On and is operative the output SETON is activated (high). Other input conditions such as CBPOS and CBREADY must also be fulfilled. At this point the automatic recloser is prepared to start the reclosing cycle and the output signal READY on the SMBRREC function block is activated (high).

11.2.2.3

Auto-reclosing mode selection


The Auto-reclosing mode is selected with setting ARMode = 3phase(0), 1/2/3ph(1), 1/2ph(2), 1ph+1*2ph(3), 1/2ph+1*3ph(4), 1ph+1*2/3ph(5). The selected mode can be read as integer as per above list on output MODE. As an alternative to setting the mode can be selected by connecting an integer, for example from function block B16I to input MODEINT. Following integers shall be used: 1=3phase, 2=1/2/3ph, 3=1/2ph, 4=1ph+1*2ph, 5=1/2ph+1*3ph or 6=1ph+1*2/3ph. When INTZERO from Fixed signal function block is connected to the input MODEINT the parameter setting selected will be valid.

11.2.2.4

Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle


The usual way in which to start a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it when a line protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the START input. It should be necessary to adjust three-phase auto-reclosing open time, (dead time) for different power system configurations or during tripping at different protection stages, the input STARTHS (start high-speed reclosing) can also be used. For a new auto-reclosing cycle to be started, a number of conditions need to be met. They are linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are: CBREADY: CB ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged operating gear CBPOS: to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and start was applied No blocking or inhibit signal shall be present.

After the start has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal Started is set. It can be interrupted by certain events, like an inhibit signal. To start auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals, one has to configure the CB Open position signal to inputs CBPOS and START and set a parameter StartByCBOpen = On and CBAuxContType = NormClosed (normally closed). One also has to configure and connect signals from manual trip commands to input INHIBIT.

353 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

The logic for switching the auto-recloser On/Off and the starting of the reclosing is shown in figure 170. The following should be considered: Setting Operation can be set to Off, External ctrl or On. External ctrl offers the possibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF, communication commands to the same inputs, and so on. SMBRREC is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 and Communication aided trip, or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In both alternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the function. START makes a first attempt with synchrocheck, STARTHS makes its first attempt without synchrocheck. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5. Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a certain length of time before the starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to perform an auto-reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs CBPOS and CBREADY.

Operation:On Operation:Off Operation:External Ctrl ON OFF START STARTHS autoInitiate TRSOTF CBREADY CBPOS Additional conditions AND start AND tCBClosedMin t AND Blocking conditions Inhibit condistions count 0
en05000782.vsd

AND AND

OR AND S OR R

SETON

OR OR initiate

120 ms t CB Closed

AND S R

AND

OR

AND

READY

IEC05000782 V1 EN

Figure 170:

Auto-reclosing Off/On and start

11.2.2.5

Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1


It is possible to use up to four different time settings for the first shot, and one extension time. There are separate settings for single- , two- and three-phase autoreclosing open times, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If no particular input signal is applied, and an auto-reclosing program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the auto-

354 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

reclosing open time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is activated in connection with the input START, the auto-reclosing open time for twophase or three-phase reclosing is used. There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase high-speed auto-reclosing, t1 3PhHS available for use when required. It is activated by input STARTHS. An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the normal shot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for permissive line protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time difference in fault clearance at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open time can then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter Extended t1 = On and the input PLCLOST.

11.2.2.6

Long trip signal


In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The user can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. When trip signals are longer, the auto-reclosing open time is extended by tExtended t1. If Extended t1 = Off, a long trip signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input INHIBIT.

Extended t1

PLCLOST initiate

AND tTrip t

OR

AND

AND

Extend t1

start

AND

AND

long duration (block SMBRREC)


IEC05000783_2_en.vsd

IEC05000783 V2 EN

Figure 171:

Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulse detection

Reclosing checks and the reclaim timer

When dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditions must be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signals are exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met. In three-phase reclosing a synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It is
355 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

possible to use a synchrocheck function in the same physical device or an external one. The release signal is configured by connecting to the auto-reclosing function input SYNC. If reclosing without checking is preferred the SYNC input can be set to TRUE (set high). Another possibility is to set the output of the synchro-check function to a permanently activated state. At confirmation from the synchro-check, or if the reclosing is of single-phase or two-phase type, the signal passes on. At singlephase, two-phase reclosing and at three-phase high-speed reclosing started by STARTHS, synchronization is not checked, and the state of the SYNC input is disregarded. By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) the readiness of the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing command. If the CB has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB ready for an Open-Close-Open sequence) this condition may not be complied with after the tripping and at the moment of reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition was however checked at the start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB is prepared for a Close-Open sequence. The synchro-check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time interval, tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted and blocked. The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which the reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB closing command is given. A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state in the reclosing sequence.

356 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

t1 1Ph t

"SMBRREC Open time" timers


OR

1P2PTO 3PHSTO 3PT1TO 3PT2TO 3PT3TO 3PT4TO 3PT5TO SYNC initiate CBREADY

From logic for reclosing programs

t1 2Ph t t1 3Ph HS t t1 3Ph t

1P2PTO

3PHSTO 3PT1TO Pulse AR

OR

AND OR AND

AND

AND

OR

Blocking out

AND

tSync t

SMRREC State Control


COUNTER

CL

Pulse SMBRREC (above)


OR

AND

tReclaim t Reclaim Timer On

TR2P TR3P start initiate Shot 0 Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5

LOGIC reclosing programs

0 1 2 3 4 5

Shot 0 Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5

1PT1 2PT1 3PHS 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 3PT4 3PT5 1


tInhibit t OR

INPROGR

PERMIT1P PREP3P Inhibit (internal)

Blocking out INHIBIT


OR

IEC05000784_2_en.vsd
IEC05000784 V2 EN

Figure 172:

Reclosing Reclaim and Inhibit timers

Pulsing of the CB closing command

The CB closing command, CLOSECB is a pulse with a duration set by parameter tPulse. For circuit-breakers without anti-pumping function, the close pulse cutting described below can be used. This is done by selecting the parameter
357 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

CutPulse=On. In case of a new trip pulse, the closing command pulse is cut (interrupted). The minimum duration of the pulse is always 50 ms. See figure 173 When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter is incremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total number of reclosing commands issued.
tPulse **) AND OR

pulse initiate

CLOSECB

50 ms

1PT1 2PT1 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 3PT4 3PT5 RSTCOUNT **) Only if "CutPulse" = On

AND

counter

COUNT1P COUNT2P COUNT3P1 COUNT3P2 COUNT3P3 COUNT3P4 COUNT3P5 COUNTAR

AND

counter

AND

counter

AND

counter

AND

counter

AND

counter

AND

counter counter

en05000785.vsd
IEC05000785 V1 EN

Figure 173:

Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters

After the reclosing command the reclaim timer tReclaim starts running for the set time. If no tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.

Transient fault

Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal

If a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and a new input signal START or TRSOTF appears, the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. The timers for the first shot can no longer be started. Depending on the setting for the number of reclosing shots, further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence
358 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

will be ended. After the reclaim time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets but the CB remains open. The CB closed data at the CBPOS input will be missing. Because of this, the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle. Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and start is received after the last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. The signal resets once the reclaim time has elapsed. The unsuccessful signal can also be made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should then be set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB does not respond to the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the output UNSUCCL is set high after time tUnsucCl.
initiate block start

AND

OR

AND

UNSUCCL

shot 0 UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck

Pulse AR (Closing) CBPOS

OR AND

tUnsucCl t

AND

CBclosed

eno5000786.vsd
IEC05000786 V1 EN

Figure 174:

Issue of signal UNSUCCL, unsuccessful reclosing

The auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following reclosing shots (if selected) even if the start signals are not received from the protection functions, but the breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting parameter AutoCont = On and tAutoContWait to the required delay for the function to proceed without a new start.

Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequence

359 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

tAutoContWait t

AND

CLOSECB
AND

S Q R

AND

CBPOS

CBClosed

OR

START

OR

initiate

en05000787.vsd
IEC05000787 V1 EN

Figure 175:

Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 5

If a user wants to apply starting of auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of from protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode is selected by a setting parameter StartByCBOpen = On. One needs then to block reclosing at all manual trip operations. Typically, one also set CBAuxContType = NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary contact of type NC (normally closed) to inputs CBPOS and START. When the signal changes from CB closed to CB open an auto-reclosing start pulse of limited length is generated and latched in the function, subject to the usual checks. Then the reclosing sequence continues as usual. One needs to connect signals from manual tripping and other functions, which shall prevent reclosing, to the input INHIBIT.

Start of reclosing from CB open information

360 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

StartByCBOpen = On 1 START STARTHS


AND

AND 100 ms AND 100 ms AND

start

en05000788.vsd
IEC05000788 V1 EN

Figure 176:

Pulsing of the start inputs

11.2.2.7

Time sequence diagrams


Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient and permanent faults are shown below in figures 177 to 180.
Fault
CB POS
Closed Open Closed

CB READY START SYNC READY INPROG 1PT1 ACTIVE CLOSE CB PREP3P SUCCL
Time t1 1Ph tPulse (Trip) tReclaim

en04000196-2-en.vsd
IEC04000196 V2 EN

Figure 177:

Transient single-phase fault. Single -phase reclosing

361 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Fault
CB POS
Closed Open

CB READY START TR3P SYNC READY INPROGR 3PT1 3PT2 ACTIVE CLOSE CB PREP3P UNSUCCL
t1 3Ph (Trip)

Open

t2 3Ph tReclaim tPulse tPulse

Time

en04000197.vsd
IEC04000197 V1 EN

Figure 178:

Permanent fault. Three-phase trip. Two-shot reclosing

362 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED AR01-CBREADY(CO) AR01-START AR01-TR3P AR01-SYNC AR01-READY AR01-INPROGR AR01-1PT1 AR01-T1 AR01-T2 AR01-CLOSECB AR01-P3P AR01-UNSUC
tReclaim t1s

en04000198.vsd
IEC04000198 V1 EN

Figure 179:

Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1/2/3ph, single-phase single-shot reclosing

Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED AR01-CBREADY(CO) AR01-START AR01-TR3P AR01-SYNC AR01-READY AR01-INPROGR AR01-1PT1 AR01-T1 AR01-T2 AR01-CLOSECB AR01-P3P AR01-UNSUC
tReclaim t1s t2

en04000199.vsd
IEC04000199 V1 EN

Figure 180:

Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph, two-shot reclosing
363

Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control 11.2.3 Function block


SMBRREC ON BLOCKED OFF SETON BLKON READY BLKOFF ACTIVE RESET SUCCL INHIBIT UNSUCCL START INPROGR STARTHS 1PT1 TRSOTF 2PT1 SKIPHS 3PT1 ZONESTEP 3PT2 TR2P 3PT3 TR3P 3PT4 THOLHOLD 3PT5 CBREADY PERMIT1P CBPOS PREP3P PLCLOST CLOSECB SYNC WFMASTER WAIT COUNT1P RSTCOUNT COUNT2P MODEINT COUNT3P1 COUNT3P2 COUNT3P3 COUNT3P4 COUNT3P5 COUNTAR MODE IEC06000189-2-en.vsd
IEC06000189 V2 EN

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Figure 181:

SMBRREC function block

11.2.4

Input and output signals


Table 203:
Name ON OFF BLKON BLKOFF RESET INHIBIT START STARTHS TRSOTF SKIPHS ZONESTEP TR2P TR3P

SMBRREC Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Switches the AR On (at Operation = ExternalCtrl) Switches the AR Off (at Operation = ExternalCtrl) Sets the AR in blocked state Releases the AR from the blocked state Resets the AR to initial conditions Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip signal Start HS reclosing without SC: t13PhHS Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from SOTF Will skip the high speed shot and continue on delayed shots Coordination between local AR and down stream devices Signal to the AR that a two-phase tripping occurred Signal to the AR that a three-phase tripping occurred

Table continues on next page

364 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Name THOLHOLD CBREADY CBPOS PLCLOST SYNC WAIT RSTCOUNT MODEINT Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Hold the AR in wait state CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow start / close Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open Power line carrier or other form of permissive sig nal lost Synchronizing check fulfilled (for 3Ph attempts) Wait for master (in Multi-breaker arrangements) Resets all counters Integer input used to set the reclosingMode, alternative to setting

Table 204:
Name BLOCKED SETON READY ACTIVE SUCCL UNSUCCL INPROGR 1PT1 2PT1 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 3PT4 3PT5 PERMIT1P PREP3P CLOSECB WFMASTER COUNT1P COUNT2P COUNT3P1

SMBRREC Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER Description The AR is in blocked state The AR operation is switched on, operative Indicates that the AR function is ready for a new sequence Reclosing sequence in progress Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the reclaim time Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open time Single-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1 Two-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 2 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 3 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 4 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 5 Permit single-phase trip, inverse signal to PREP3P Prepare three-phase trip, control of the next trip operation Closing command for CB Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential reclosing Counting the number of single-phase reclosing shots Counting the number of two-phase reclosing shots Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 1

Table continues on next page

365 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name COUNT3P2 COUNT3P3 COUNT3P4 COUNT3P5 COUNTAR MODE Type INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 2 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 3 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 4 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 5 Counting total number of reclosing shots Integer output for reclosing mode

11.2.5
Table 205:
Name Operation

Setting parameters
SMBRREC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off External ctrl On 3 phase 1/2/3ph 1/2ph 1ph+1*2ph 1/2ph+1*3ph 1ph+1*2/3ph 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 None Low High 0.00 - 6000.00 Unit Step Default External ctrl Description Off, ExternalCtrl, On

ARMode

1/2/3ph

The AR mode selection e.g. 3ph, 1/3ph

t1 1Ph t1 3Ph t1 3PhHS tReclaim tSync tTrip tPulse tCBClosedMin tUnsucCl Priority

s s s s s s s s s -

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 -

1.000 6.000 0.400 60.00 30.00 0.200 0.200 5.00 30.00 None

Open time for shot 1, single-phase Open time for shot 1, delayed reclosing 3ph Open time for shot 1, high speed reclosing 3ph Duration of the reclaim time Maximum wait time for synchrocheck OK Maximum trip pulse duration Duration of the circuit breaker closing pulse Min time that CB must be closed before new sequence allows Wait time for CB before indicating Unsuccessful/Successful Priority selection between adjacent terminals None/Low/High Maximum wait time for release from Master

tWaitForMaster

0.01

60.00

366 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

Table 206:
Name NoOfShots

SMBRREC Group settings (advanced)


Values (Range) 1 2 3 4 5 Off On NormClosed NormOpen CO OCO 0.000 - 60.000 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Off On Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 NoCBCheck CB check Off On Off On Unit Step Default 1 Description Max number of reclosing shots 1-5

StartByCBOpen CBAuxContType CBReadyType t1 2Ph t2 3Ph t3 3Ph t4 3Ph t5 3Ph Extended t1 tExtended t1 tInhibit CutPulse Follow CB AutoCont tAutoContWait UnsucClByCBChk BlockByUnsucCl ZoneSeqCoord

s s s s s s s s -

0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.001 -

Off NormOpen CO 1.000 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 Off 0.500 5.000 Off Off Off 2.000 NoCBCheck Off Off

To be set ON if AR is to be started by CB open position Select the CB aux contact type NC/NO for CBPOS input Select type of circuit breaker ready signal CO/OCO Open time for shot 1, two-phase Open time for shot 2, three-phase Open time for shot 3, three-phase Open time for shot 4, three-phase Open time for shot 5, three-phase Extended open time at loss of permissive channel Off/On 3Ph Dead time is extended with this value at loss of perm ch Inhibit reclosing reset time Shorten closing pulse at a new trip Off/On Advance to next shot if CB has been closed during dead time Continue with next reclosing-shot if breaker did not close Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot Unsuccessful closing signal obtained by checking CB position Block AR at unsuccessful reclosing Coordination of down stream devices to local prot units AR

367 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control 11.2.6 Technical data


Table 207:
Function Number of autoreclosing shots Autoreclosing open time: shot 1 - t1 1Ph shot 1 - t1 2Ph shot 1 - t1 3PhHS shot 1 - t1 3PhDld shot 2 - t2 shot 3 - t3 shot 4 - t4 shot 5 - t5 Extended autorecloser open time Autorecloser maximum wait time for sync Maximum trip pulse duration Inhibit reset time Reclaim time Minimum time CB must be closed before AR becomes ready for autoreclosing cycle Circuit breaker closing pulse length CB check time before unsuccessful Wait for master release Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

SMBRREC technical data


Range or value 1-5 (0.000-60.000) s Accuracy 0.5% 10 ms

(0.00-6000.00) s

(0.000-60.000) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.000-60.000) s

11.3
11.3.1

Apparatus control APC


Introduction
The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator place selection and external or internal blockings. In normal security, the command is processed and the resulting position is not supervised. However with enhanced security, the command is processed and the resulting position is supervised.

11.3.2

Principle of operation
A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor bank. The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the

368 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

apparatus control function directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic sequences. Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function module that handles the interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in the process information used by higher-level control functions. Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised by one software module (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals connected to a breaker and a disconnector are almost the same, the same software is used to handle these two types of apparatuses. The software module is connected to the physical process in the switchyard via an interface module by means of a number of digital inputs and outputs. One type of interface module is intended for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and another type is intended for a disconnector or earthing switch (SXSWI). Four types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and supervision within the bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a control function reflecting the switchyard configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard configuration. These four types are: Bay control QCBAY Switch controller SCSWI Circuit breaker SXCBR Circuit switch SXSWI

The three latter functions are logical nodes according to IEC 61850. The functions Local Remote (LOCREM) and Local Remote Control (LOCREMCTRL), to handle the local/remote switch, and the functions Bay reserve (QCRSV) and Reservation input (RESIN), for the reservation function, also belong to the apparatus control function. The principles of operation, function block, input and output signals and setting parameters for all these functions are described below.

11.3.3

Error handling
Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with a value. Table 208 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the cause are in order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block for Switch controller (SCSWI), Circuit breaker (SXCBR) and Circuit switch (SXSWI) indicates the latest value of the error during the command.

369 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Table 208:

Values for "cause" signal in priority order


Attribute value Description no error serviceError-type blocked-by-switchinghierarchy select-failed invalid-position position-reached parameter-change-inexecution step-limit blocked-by-mode blocked-by-process blocked-by-interlocking blocked-bysynchrocheck command-already-inexecution blocked-by-health 1-of-n-control abortion-by-cancel time-limit-over abortion-by-trip object-not-selected Not in use X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Supported X 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Defined in IEC 61850

Table continues on next page

370 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Attribute value Vendor specific -20 -21 -23 -24 -25 -26 -27 -28 -29 -30 -31 -32 -33 -34 -35 Description Not in use Not in use blocked-for-command blocked-for-opencommand blocked-for-closecommand Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use long-operation-time switch-not-start-moving persisting-intermediatestate switch-returned-to-initialposition switch-in-bad-state not-expected-finalposition X X X X X X X X X Supported

11.3.4
11.3.4.1

Bay control QCBAY


Introduction
The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local remote control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the bay.

11.3.4.2

Principle of operation
The functionality of the Bay control (QCBAY) function is not defined in the IEC 6185081 standard, which means that the function is a vendor specific logical node. The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and blocking conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch control functions, voltage control functions and measurement functions.

Local panel switch

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch connected to this function can have three positions remote/local/off. The positions are here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station/ remote level and local from the IED level. The local/remote switch is also on the
371 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

control/protection IED itself, which means that the position of the switch and its validity information are connected internally, and not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted separately from the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/O boards. When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to select this) is in Off position, all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate. To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to QCBAY. The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/ remote switch position according to table 209. In addition, there is one configuration parameter that affects the value of the PSTO signal. If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LR-switch position is in Local or Remote state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), that is, it is permitted to operate from both local and remote level without any priority. When the external panel switch is in Off position the PSTO value shows the actual state of switch that is, 0. In this case it is not possible to control anything.
Table 209:
Local panel switch positions 0 = Off 1 = Local 1 = Local 2 = Remote 2 = Remote 3 = Faulty

Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)

PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions


PSTO value AllPSTOValid (configuration parameter) -Priority No priority Priority No priority -Possible locations that shall be able to operate Not possible to operate Local Panel Local or Remote level without any priority Remote level Local or Remote level without any priority Not possible to operate

0 1 5 2 5 3

Blockings

The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within a complete bay. The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:

372 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay. Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all configured functions within the bay. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 6185081). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined in PCM600.

11.3.4.3

Function block
QCBAY LR_OFF LR_LOC LR_REM LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD PSTO UPD_BLKD CMD_BLKD LOC REM

IEC10000048-1-en.vsd
IEC10000048 V1 EN

Figure 182:

QCBAY function block

11.3.4.4

Input and output signals


Table 210:
Name LR_OFF LR_LOC LR_REM LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD

QCBAY Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description External Local/Remote switch is in Off position External Local/Remote switch is in Local position External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position Data representing the L/R switch position is valid Steady signal to block the position updates Steady signal to block the command

Table 211:
Name PSTO UPD_BLKD CMD_BLKD LOC REM

QCBAY Output signals


Type INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Value for the operator place allocation Update of position is blocked Function is blocked for commands Local operation allowed Remote operation allowed

373 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
11.3.4.5
Table 212:
Name AllPSTOValid

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Setting parameters
QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Priority No priority Unit Step Default Priority Description Priority of originators

11.3.5
11.3.5.1

Local/Remote switch
Introduction
The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied via the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control (QCBAY) function block. A parameter in function block LOCREM is set to choose if the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch connected via binary inputs.

11.3.5.2

Principle of operation
The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the local/remote switch. The connections are seen in figure 183, where the inputs on function block LOCREM are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When the local HMI is used, the inputs are not used and are set to FALSE in the configuration. The outputs from the LOCREM function block control the output PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on Bay control (QCBAY).

374 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

LOCREM CTRLOFF OFF LOCCTRL LOCAL REMCTRL REMOTE LHMICTRL VALID

QCBAY LR_ OFF PSTO LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD LOC LR_ VALID REM BL_ UPD BL_ CMD QCBAY LR_ OFF PSTO LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD LOC LR_ VALID REM BL_ UPD BL_ CMD

LOCREM CTRLOFF OFF LOCCTRL LOCAL REMCTRL REMOTE LHMICTRL VALID

LOCREMCTRL PSTO1 HMICTR1 PSTO2 HMICTR2 PSTO3 HMICTR3 PSTO4 HMICTR4 PSTO5 HMICTR5 PSTO6 HMICTR6 PSTO7 HMICTR7 PSTO8 HMICTR8 PSTO9 HMICTR9 PSTO 10 HMICTR 10 PSTO 11 HMICTR 11 PSTO 12 HMICTR 12 IEC10000052-1-en.vsd
IEC10000052 V1 EN

Figure 183:

Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two bays and two screen pages

If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can be different for the included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the local/remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen page that is presented on the local HMI. The function block Local remote control (LOCREMCTRL) controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position to applicable bay and screen page. The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level. The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined in PCM600.

375 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
11.3.5.3 Function block
LOCREM CTRLOFF LOCCTRL REMCTRL LHMICTRL OFF LOCAL REMOTE VALID IEC05000360-2-en.vsd
IEC05000360 V2 EN

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Figure 184:

LOCREM function block

PSTO1 PSTO2 PSTO3 PSTO4 PSTO5 PSTO6 PSTO7 PSTO8 PSTO9 PSTO10 PSTO11 PSTO12

LOCREMCTRL HMICTR1 HMICTR2 HMICTR3 HMICTR4 HMICTR5 HMICTR6 HMICTR7 HMICTR8 HMICTR9 HMICTR10 HMICTR11 HMICTR12 IEC05000361-2-en.vsd

IEC05000361 V2 EN

Figure 185:

LOCREMCTRL function block

11.3.5.4

Input and output signals


Table 213:
Name CTRLOFF LOCCTRL REMCTRL LHMICTRL

LOCREM Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER Default 0 0 0 0 Description Disable control Local in control Remote in control LHMI control

Table 214:
Name OFF LOCAL REMOTE VALID

LOCREM Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Control is disabled Local control is activated Remote control is activated Outputs are valid

376 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

Table 215:
Name PSTO1 PSTO2 PSTO3 PSTO4 PSTO5 PSTO6 PSTO7 PSTO8 PSTO9 PSTO10 PSTO11 PSTO12

LOCREMCTRL Input signals


Type INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description PSTO input channel 1 PSTO input channel 2 PSTO input channel 3 PSTO input channel 4 PSTO input channel 5 PSTO input channel 6 PSTO input channel 7 PSTO input channel 8 PSTO input channel 9 PSTO input channel 10 PSTO input channel 11 PSTO input channel 12

Table 216:
Name HMICTR1 HMICTR2 HMICTR3 HMICTR4 HMICTR5 HMICTR6 HMICTR7 HMICTR8 HMICTR9 HMICTR10 HMICTR11 HMICTR12

LOCREMCTRL Output signals


Type INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER Description Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input

11.3.5.5
Table 217:
Name ControlMode

Setting parameters
LOCREM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Internal LR-switch External LR-switch Unit Step Default Internal LR-switch Description Control mode for internal/external LRswitch

11.3.6

Switch controller SCSWI

377 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
11.3.6.1 Introduction

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle and operate on one three-phase device.

11.3.6.2

Principle of operation
The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select execute sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation. The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation, blockings and synchrocheck.

Control handling
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with normal security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The parameter CtlModel defines which one of the two control models is used. The control model "direct with normal security" does not require a select whereas, the "SBO with enhanced security" command model requires a select before execution. Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence, the sequence is terminated and the error is mapped into the enumerated variable "cause" attribute belonging to the pulsed response signal for the IEC 61850 communication. The last cause L_CAUSE can be read from the function block and used for example at commissioning. There is no relation between the command direction and the actual position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to execute a close command. Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no execution command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution command is sent independent of the position value.

Evaluation of position

In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the onephase switches, following principles will be applied:

378 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

The position output from switch (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to SCSWI. With the group signal connection the SCSWI obtains the position, time stamps and quality attributes of the position which is used for further evaluation.
All switches in open position: All switches in close position: One switch =open, two switches= close (or inversely): Any switch in intermediate position: Any switch in bad state: switch control position = open switch control position = close switch control position = intermediate switch control position = intermediate switch control position = bad state

The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the time stamp of the last changed phase when it goes to end position. When it goes to intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase. In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discordance and is supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance situation, that is, the position of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than the setting tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set. In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values from the switch modules Circuit breaker (SXCBR)/ Circuit switch (SXSWI). At error the "cause" value with highest priority is shown.

Blocking principles

The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY) and via the IEC 61850 communication from the operator place. The IEC 61850 communication has always priority over binary inputs, e.g. a block command on binary inputs will not prevent commands over IEC 61850. The different blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of position. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible. The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this function, that is, no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

379 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Interaction with synchrocheck and synchronizing functions

The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and the synchronizing function (SESRSYN). It is assumed that the synchrocheck function is continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI. The result from the synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the synchrocheck state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function Circuit breaker (SXCBR). When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, SCSWI will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the closing command to SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see figure 186. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision of the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the synchronizing function. SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-bysynchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in figure 190.
SCSWI EXE_CL OR SXCBR CLOSE

SYNC_OK START_SY SY_INPRO SESRSYN CLOSECB Synchro check Synchronizing function

IEC09000209_1_en.vsd
IEC09000209 V1 EN

Figure 186:

Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (synchrocheck and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function

Time diagrams

The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time supervision conditions. These timers are explained here. The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the selection of the object to operate.

380 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

select execute command tSelect timer t1 t1>tSelect, then longoperation-time in 'cause' is set
en05000092.vsd
IEC05000092 V1 EN

Figure 187:

tSelect

The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the reservation, that is, the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.
select reservation request RES_RQ reservation granted RES_GRT command termination tResResponse timer t1 t1>tResResponse, then 1-of-n-control in 'cause' is set
en05000093.vsd
IEC05000093 V1 EN

Figure 188:

tResResponse

The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the command termination, see figure 189.

381 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

execute command position L1 open close position L2 open close position L3 open close cmd termination L1 cmd termination L2 cmd termination L3 cmd termination position open close tExecutionFB timer t1>tExecutionFB, then long-operation-time in 'cause' is set *

t1

* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample.


en05000094.vsd
IEC05000094 V1 EN

Figure 189:

tExecutionFB

The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck conditions are not fulfilled.
execute command SYNC_OK tSynchrocheck START_SY SY_INPRO tSynchronizing t2 t2>tSynchronizing, then blocked-by-synchrocheck in 'cause' is set
en05000095.vsd
IEC05000095 V1 EN

t1

Figure 190:

tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing

382 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Function block
SCSWI BLOCK PSTO L_SEL L_OPEN L_CLOSE AU_OPEN AU_CLOSE BL_CMD RES_GRT RES_EXT SY_INPRO SYNC_OK EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE XPOS1 XPOS2 XPOS3 EXE_OP EXE_CL SELECTED RES_RQ START_SY POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS POLEDISC CMD_BLK L_CAUSE XOUT POS_INTR

11.3.6.3

IEC05000337-2-en.vsd
IEC05000337 V2 EN

Figure 191:

SCSWI function block

11.3.6.4

Input and output signals


Table 218:
Name BLOCK PSTO L_SEL L_OPEN L_CLOSE AU_OPEN AU_CLOSE BL_CMD RES_GRT RES_EXT SY_INPRO SYNC_OK EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE XPOS1 XPOS2 XPOS3

SCSWI Input signals


Type BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL Default 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Block of function Operator place selection Select signal from local panel Open signal from local panel Close signal from local panel Used for local automation function Used for local automation function Steady signal for block of the command Positive acknowledge that all reservations are made Reservation is made externally Synchronizing function in progress Closing is permitted at set to true by the synchrocheck Enables open operation Enables close operation Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase

383 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Table 219:
Name EXE_OP EXE_CL SELECTED RES_RQ START_SY POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS POLEDISC CMD_BLK L_CAUSE XOUT POS_INTR

SCSWI Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Execute command for open direction Execute command for close direction Select conditions are fulfilled Request signal to the reservation function Starts the synchronizing function Position indication Open position indication Closed position indication The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after a set time Commands are blocked Latest value of the error indication during command Execution information to XCBR/XSWI Stopped in intermediate position

11.3.6.5
Table 220:
Name CtlModel PosDependent tSelect tResResponse tSynchrocheck tSynchronizing tExecutionFB tPoleDiscord

Setting parameters
SCSWI Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Dir Norm SBO Enh Always permitted Not perm at 00/11 0.00 - 600.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.00 - 600.00 0.00 - 600.00 0.00 - 600.00 0.000 - 60.000 Unit s s s s s s Step 0.01 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 Default SBO Enh Always permitted 30.00 5.000 10.00 0.00 30.00 2.000 Description Specifies control model type Permission to operate depending on the position Maximum time between select and execute signals Allowed time from reservation request to reservation granted Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil close conditions Supervision time to get the signal synchronizing in progress Maximum time from command execution to termination Allowed time to have discrepancy between the poles

11.3.7

Circuit breaker SXCBR

384 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Introduction
The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via binary output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.

11.3.7.1

11.3.7.2

Principle of operation
The users of the Circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is other functions such as for example, switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value. SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) for example.

Local/Remote switch

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/ remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 192.
Local= Operation at switch yard level

E RU

From I/O

switchLR
FAL SE

Remote= Operation at IED or higher level


en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN

Figure 192:

Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles

SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, operators place, protection functions, autoreclosure and so on.

385 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

The IEC 61850 communication has always priority over binary inputs, e.g. a block command on binary inputs will not prevent commands over IEC 61850. The blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate command. Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate command. Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other signals related to the position will be reset. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution

The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position for the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real process value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process. It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Time diagrams

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 193 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

386 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

EXE_CL Close pulse duration

AdaptivePulse = TRUE

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

tStartMove timer t1 tStartMove

if t1 > tStartMove then "switch-not-start-moving" attribute in 'cause' is set

tIntermediate timer t2 tIntermediate

if t2 > tIntermediate then "persisting-intermediate-state" attribute in 'cause' is set

en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN

Figure 193:

The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 194 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have affect on both execute output pulses.
OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_CL tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_CL tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN

Figure 194:

Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or tClosePulse. The execute output pulses are reset when:

387 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to true the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has elapsed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed. If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed. An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in figure 195 .
OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP tOpenPulse EXE_OP tOpenPulse tStartMove timer

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN

Figure 195:

Open command with open position indication

388 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Function block
SXCBR BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE TR_OPEN TR_CLOSE RS_CNT XIN XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS TR_POS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE IEC05000338-2-en.vsd
IEC05000338 V2 EN

11.3.7.3

Figure 196:

SXCBR function block

11.3.7.4

Input and output signals


Table 221:
Name BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE TR_OPEN TR_CLOSE RS_CNT XIN

SXCBR Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Block of function Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch Signal to block the open command Signal to block the close command Steady signal for block of the position updating Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O Signal for open position of truck from I/O Signal for close position of truck from I/O Resets the operation counter Execution information from CSWI

Table 222:
Name XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD

SXCBR Output signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Group signal for XCBR output Executes the command for open direction Executes the command for close direction Indication that the position is substituted Indication that the function is blocked for open commands Indication that the function is blocked for close commands

Table continues on next page 389 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS TR_POS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE Type BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Update of position indication is blocked Apparatus position indication Apparatus open position Apparatus closed position Truck position indication Operation counter value Latest value of the error indication during command

11.3.7.5
Table 223:
Name tStartMove tIntermediate AdaptivePulse tOpenPulse tClosePulse SuppressMidPos

Setting parameters
SXCBR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Not adaptive Adaptive 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Off On Unit s s s s Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.100 0.150 Not adaptive 0.200 0.200 On Description Supervision time for the apparatus to move after a command Allowed time for intermediate position Output resets when a new correct end position is reached Output pulse length for open command Output pulse length for close command Mid-position is suppressed during the time tIntermediate

11.3.8
11.3.8.1

Circuit switch SXSWI


Introduction
The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or earthing switches via binary output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.

11.3.8.2

Principle of operation
The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) is other functions such as for example, switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. SXSWI executes commands, evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, SXSWI performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value.

390 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) for example.

Local/Remote switch

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 197.
Local= Operation at switch yard level

E RU

From I/O

switchLR
FAL SE

Remote= Operation at IED or higher level


en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN

Figure 197:

Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles

SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, operators place, protection functions, autorecloser and so on. The blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate command. Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate command. Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other signals related to the position will be reset. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

391 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Substitution

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position for the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because the real process value is erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process. It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Time diagrams

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 198 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
EXE_CL Close pulse duration AdaptivePulse = TRUE

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

tStartMove timer t1 tStartMove

if t1 > tStartMove then "switch-not-start-moving" attribute in 'cause' is set

tIntermediate timer t2 tIntermediate

if t2 > tIntermediate then "persisting-intermediate-state" attribute in 'cause' is set

en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN

Figure 198:

The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 199 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have affect on both execute output pulses.

392 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_CL tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_CL tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN

Figure 199:

Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or tClosePulse. The execute output pulses are reset when: If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed. the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to true the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has elapsed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed. An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in figure 200.

393 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP tOpenPulse EXE_OP tOpenPulse tStartMove timer

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN

Figure 200:

Open command with open position indication

11.3.8.3

Function block
SXSWI BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE RS_CNT XIN XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE IEC05000339-2-en.vsd
IEC05000339 V2 EN

Figure 201:

SXSWI function block

11.3.8.4

Input and output signals


Table 224:
Name BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN

SXSWI Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Block of function Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch Signal to block the open command Signal to block the close command Steady signal for block of the position updating Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O

Table continues on next page 394 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Name POSCLOSE RS_CNT XIN Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 Description Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O Resets the operation counter Execution information from CSWI

Table 225:
Name XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE

SXSWI Output signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER INTEGER Description Group signal for XSWI output Executes the command for open direction Executes the command for close direction Indication that the position is substituted Indication that the function is blocked for open commands Indication that the function is blocked for close commands Update of position indication is blocked Apparatus position indication Apparatus open position Apparatus closed position Operation counter value Latest value of the error indication during command

11.3.8.5
Table 226:
Name tStartMove tIntermediate AdaptivePulse tOpenPulse tClosePulse SwitchType

Setting parameters
SXSWI Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Not adaptive Adaptive 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Load Break Disconnector Earthing Switch HS Earthing Switch Off On Unit s s s s Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 3.000 15.000 Not adaptive 0.200 0.200 Disconnector Description Supervision time for the apparatus to move after a command Allowed time for intermediate position Output resets when a new correct end position is reached Output pulse length for open command Output pulse length for close command 1=LoadBreak,2=Disconnector, 3=EarthSw,4=HighSpeedEarthSw

SuppressMidPos

On

Mid-position is suppressed during the time tIntermediate

11.3.9

Bay reserve QCRSV

395 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
11.3.9.1 Introduction

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay, switchyard part, or complete substation.

11.3.9.2

Principle of operation
The Bay reserve (QCRSV) function handles the reservation. QCRSV function starts to operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay or if there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible to reserve the function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the own bay is the input signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller (SCWI). The signals for request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and V_RE_RQ from function block RESIN. These signals are included in signal EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV. The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay only (TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no reservation request RES_BAYS is created.

Reservation request of own bay

If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to know which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with the input signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of the current bay can be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already is reserved by itself or another bay. This information is available in the output signal RESERVED. If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is connected to switch controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command sequence will be reset and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the "cause" signal.

Reservation of other bays

When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay that requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If not, it will send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and wait for their response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done by activating the output RES_BAYS. When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI (tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-ncontrol" in the "cause" signal.

396 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Reservation request from another bay

When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped into the output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input RES_DATA in QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the acknowledgment from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the bay already is reserved the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.

Blocking and overriding of reservation

If QCRSV function is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is blocked. That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay. This can be set, for example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent operations from another operator place at the same time. The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the OVERRIDE input signal, that is, reserving the own bay without waiting for the external acknowledge.

Bay with more than eight apparatuses

If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay that is, use of up to eight apparatuses, the input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE. If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional QCRSV. The two QCRSV functions have to communicate and this is done through the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to figure 202. If more then one QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must be in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.

397 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_GRT1 RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2 RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4 RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5 RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8 RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS BLK_RES ACK_TO_B OVERRIDE RESERVED RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_GRT1 RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2 RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4 RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5 RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8 RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS BLK_RES ACK_TO_B OVERRIDE RESERVED RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

1 1 1

RES_BAYS

ACK_TO_B

RESERVED

IEC05000088_2_en.vsd
IEC05000088 V2 EN

Figure 202:

Connection of two QCRSV function blocks

11.3.9.3

Function block
QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_RQ1 RES_RQ2 RES_RQ3 RES_RQ4 RES_RQ5 RES_RQ6 RES_RQ7 RES_RQ8 BLK_RES OVERRIDE RES_DATA RES_GRT1 RES_GRT2 RES_GRT3 RES_GRT4 RES_GRT5 RES_GRT6 RES_GRT7 RES_GRT8 RES_BAYS ACK_TO_B RESERVED EXCH_OUT IEC05000340-2-en.vsd
IEC05000340 V2 EN

Figure 203:

QCRSV function block

398 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Input and output signals
Table 227:
Name EXCH_IN RES_RQ1 RES_RQ2 RES_RQ3 RES_RQ4 RES_RQ5 RES_RQ6 RES_RQ7 RES_RQ8 BLK_RES OVERRIDE RES_DATA

11.3.9.4

QCRSV Input signals


Type INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks Signal for app. 1 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 2 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 3 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 4 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 5 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 6 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 7 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 8 that requests to do a reservation Reservation is not possible and the output signals are reset Signal to override the reservation Reservation data coming from function block ResIn

Table 228:
Name RES_GRT1 RES_GRT2 RES_GRT3 RES_GRT4 RES_GRT5 RES_GRT6 RES_GRT7 RES_GRT8 RES_BAYS ACK_TO_B RESERVED EXCH_OUT

QCRSV Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER Description Reservation is made and the app. 1 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 2 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 3 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 4 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 5 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 6 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 7 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 8 is allowed to operate Request for reservation of other bays Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved Indicates that the bay is reserved Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks

399 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
11.3.9.5
Table 229:
Name tCancelRes ParamRequest1 ParamRequest2 ParamRequest3 ParamRequest4 ParamRequest5 ParamRequest6 ParamRequest7 ParamRequest8

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Setting parameters
QCRSV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Unit s Step 0.001 Default 10.000 Only own bay res. Only own bay res. Only own bay res. Only own bay res. Only own bay res. Only own bay res. Only own bay res. Only own bay res. Description Supervision time for canceling the reservation Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 1 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 2 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 3 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 4 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 5 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 6 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 7 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 8

11.3.10
11.3.10.1

Reservation input RESIN


Introduction
The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the reservation information from other bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60 instances are available).

11.3.10.2

Principle of operation
The reservation input (RESIN) function is based purely on Boolean logic conditions. The logic diagram in figure 204 shows how the output signals are created. The inputs of the function block are connected to a receive function block representing signals transferred over the station bus from another bay.

400 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

EXCH_IN

INT BIN

& FutureUse 1

ACK_F_B

BAY_ACK

ANY_ACK

& BAY_VAL 1

VALID_TX

RE_RQ_B

BAY_RES

& 1 V _RE_RQ

BIN INT

EXCH_OUT

en05000089.vsd
IEC05000089 V1 EN

Figure 204:

Logic diagram for RESIN

Figure 205 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay" used in the reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions are connected to the module bay reserve (QCRSV) that handles the reservation function in the own bay. The value to the input EXCH_IN on the first RESIN module in the chain has the integer value 5. This is provided by the use of instance number one of the function block RESIN, where the input EXCH_IN is set to #5, but is hidden for the user.

401 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Bay 1

RESIN BAY_ACK ACK_F_B BAY_VAL ANY_ACK BAY_RES VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT

Bay 2

RESIN EXCH_IN ACK_F_B BAY_ACK ANY_ACK BAY_VAL VALID_TX BAY_RES RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT

Bay n

RESIN EXCH_IN ACK_F_B BAY_ACK ANY_ACK BAY_VAL VALID_TX BAY_RES RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT

QCRSV RES_DATA

en05000090.vsd
IEC05000090 V2 EN

Figure 205:

Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN

11.3.10.3

Function block
RESIN1 BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT IEC05000341-2-en.vsd
IEC05000341 V2 EN

Figure 206:

RESIN1 function block

RESIN2 EXCH_IN BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT IEC09000807_1_en.vsd
IEC09000807 V1 EN

Figure 207:

RESIN2 function block

402 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Input and output signals
Table 230:
Name BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES

11.3.10.4

RESIN1 Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 Description Another bay has acknow. the reservation req. from this bay The reserv. and acknow. signals from another bay are valid Request from other bay to reserve this bay

Table 231:
Name ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT

RESIN1 Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER Description All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays are valid Request from other bay to reserve this bay Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid Used for exchange signals between different ResIn blocks

Table 232:
Name EXCH_IN BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES

RESIN2 Input signals


Type INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 5 0 0 0 Description Used for exchange signals between different ResIn blocks Another bay has acknow. the reservation req. from this bay The reserv. and acknow. signals from another bay are valid Request from other bay to reserve this bay

Table 233:
Name ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT

RESIN2 Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER Description All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays are valid Request from other bay to reserve this bay Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid Used for exchange signals between different ResIn blocks

403 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
11.3.10.5
Table 234:
Name FutureUse

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Setting parameters
RESIN1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Bay in use Bay future use Unit Step Default Bay in use Description The bay for this ResIn block is for future use

Table 235:
Name FutureUse

RESIN2 Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) Bay in use Bay future use Unit Step Default Bay in use Description The bay for this ResIn block is for future use

11.4
11.4.1

Interlocking
Introduction
The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material damage and/or accidental human injury. Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements, each handling the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each IED is not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs. The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the system at any given time.

11.4.2

Principle of operation
The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED. The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function. Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus. The reservation function (see section "Introduction") is used to ensure that HV apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the interlocking condition of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the operation is performed. After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching devices that may affect it.

404 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay. The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking signals can include the following kind of information: Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase) Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module) External release (to add special conditions for release) Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch) Output signals to release the HV apparatus

The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as shown in figure 208.
Interlocking modules in other bays Apparatus control modules
SCILO SCSWI SXSWI

Interlocking module

Apparatus control modules


SCILO SCSWI SXCBR

Apparatus control modules


en04000526.vsd SCILO SCSWI SXSWI

IEC04000526 V1 EN

Figure 208:

Interlocking module on bay level

Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the following: Unearthed busbars Busbars connected together Other bays connected to a busbar Received data from other bays is valid

Figure 209 illustrates the data exchange principle.

405 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Station bus
Bay 1 Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Bay n Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Bus coupler WA1 unearthed WA1 unearthed WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay

WA1 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn

... ..

WA1 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn

WA1 WA2 QB1 QB2 QA1 QB9 QB1 QB2 QA1 QB9
en05000494.vsd
IEC05000494 V1 EN

QB1

QB2

QC1

QC2

QA1

Figure 209:

Data exchange between interlocking modules

When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input board error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for execution of the function will not be given. On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid. For all interlocking modules these general rules apply: The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and earthing switches are always identical. Earthing switches on the line feeder end, for example, rapid earthing switches, are normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a line voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If there is no line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs must be set to no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating. Earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections for example, without load/voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section, that is, the status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the earthing switch operation is concerned. Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems. Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is completely isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed connections, or if they are earthed on both sides. Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and earthing

406 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between CB and transformer. Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar transfer is in progress.

To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the interlocking conditions are available: Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B 1 1/2-CB diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B

The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific requirements, by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration tool PCM600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these specific conditions. The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in TR are intended for transfer to other bays.

11.4.3
11.4.3.1

Logical node for interlocking SCILO


Introduction
The Logical node for interlocking SCILO function is used to enable a switching operation if the interlocking conditions permit. SCILO function itself does not provide any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic.

11.4.3.2

Logic diagram
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined end position for example, open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN) is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the enable signals

407 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node Switch controller (SCSWI). One instance per switching device is needed.
POSOPEN POSCLOSE SCILO =1
1 &

EN_OPEN >1

&

OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN
& &
IEC04000525 V1 EN

>1

EN_CLOSE
en04000525.vsd

Figure 210:

SCILO function logic diagram

11.4.3.3

Function block
SCILO POSOPEN POSCLOSE OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE

IEC05000359-2-en.vsd
IEC05000359 V2 EN

Figure 211:

SCILO function block

11.4.3.4

Input and output signals


Table 236:
Name POSOPEN POSCLOSE OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN

SCILO Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 Description Open position of switch device Closed position of switch device Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled

Table 237:
Name EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE

SCILO Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is enabled Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is enabled

11.4.4

Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES

408 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Introduction
The interlocking for busbar earthing switch (BB_ES) function is used for one busbar earthing switch on any busbar parts according to figure 212.

11.4.4.1

QC

en04000504.vsd
IEC04000504 V1 EN

Figure 212:

Switchyard layout BB_ES

11.4.4.2

Function block
BB_ES QC_OP QC_CL BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB QCREL QCITL BBESOPTR BBESCLTR

IEC05000347-2-en.vsd
IEC05000347 V2 EN

Figure 213:

BB_ES function block

11.4.4.3

Logic diagram
BB_ES VP_BB_DC BB_DC_OP EXDU_BB QC_OP QC_CL
IEC04000546 V1 EN

&

QCREL QCITL BBESOPTR BBESCLTR


en04000546.vsd

11.4.4.4

Input and output signals


Table 238:
Name QC_OP QC_CL BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB

BB_ES Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 Description Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position All disconnectors on this busbar part are open Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid No transm error from bays with disc on this busbar part

409 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Table 239:
Name QCREL QCITL BBESOPTR BBESCLTR

BB_ES Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Switching of QC is allowed Switching of QC is forbidden QC on this busbar part is in open position QC on this busbar part is in closed position

11.4.5
11.4.5.1

Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS


Introduction
The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS) function is used for one bussection circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 214. The function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1

QB1 QA1

QB2

QC2

QC3

QC4

A1A2_BS
IEC04000516 V1 EN

en04000516.vsd

Figure 214:

Switchyard layout A1A2_BS

410 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Function block
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL BBTR_OP VP_BBTR EXDU_12 EXDU_ES QA1O_EX1 QA1O_EX2 QA1O_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 A1A2_BS QA1OPREL QA1OPITL QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QC4REL QC4ITL S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPS1S2TR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR

11.4.5.2

IEC05000348-2-en.vsd
IEC05000348 V2 EN

Figure 215:

A1A2_BS function block

411 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
11.4.5.3 Logic diagram
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL VPQB1 QB1_OP QA1O_EX1 VPQB2 QB2_OP QA1O_EX2 VP_BBTR BBTR_OP EXDU_12 QA1O_EX3 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQA1 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPS1QC1 QA1_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP S1QC1_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQC3 VPS1QC1 QC3_CL S1QC1_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX2 A1A2_BS =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & & >1
1

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 QA1OPREL QA1OPITL

& & >1

QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL

&

en04000542.vsd

IEC04000542 V1 EN

412 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPS2QC2 QA1_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP S2QC2_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQC4 VPS2QC2 QC4_CL S2QC2_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX2 VPQB1 VPQB2 QB1_OP QB2_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2 QB1_OP QB2_OP QA1_OP VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQA1
IEC04000543 V1 EN

&

>1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

&

&

1 1

QC3REL QC3ITL QC4REL QC4ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR

>1 &

S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR VPS1S2TR


en04000543.vsd

11.4.5.4

Input and output signals


Table 240:
Name QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL BBTR_OP VP_BBTR

A1A2_BS Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QC4 is in open position QC4 is in closed position QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position No busbar transfer is in progress Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer

Table continues on next page

413 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name EXDU_12 EXDU_ES QA1O_EX1 QA1O_EX2 QA1O_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

No transm error from any bay connected to busbar 1 and 2 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 241:
Name QA1OPREL QA1OPITL QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QC4REL QC4ITL S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPS1S2TR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR

A1A2_BS Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Opening of QA1 is allowed Opening of QA1 is forbidden Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QC3 is allowed Switching of QC3 is forbidden Switching of QC4 is allowed Switching of QC4 is forbidden No bus section connection between bus section 1 and 2 Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and 2 exists QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position Status of the app. between bus section 1 and 2 are valid Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

11.4.6
414

Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC

Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Introduction
The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC) function is used for one bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 216. A1A2_DC function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.
QB WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

11.4.6.1

QC1

QC2

A1A2_DC
IEC04000492 V1 EN

en04000492.vsd

Figure 216:

Switchyard layout A1A2_DC

11.4.6.2

Function block
A1A2_DC QB_OP QBOPREL QB_CL QBOPITL S1QC1_OP QBCLREL S1QC1_CL QBCLITL S2QC2_OP DCOPTR S2QC2_CL DCCLTR S1DC_OP VPDCTR S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBCL_EX1 QBCL_EX2 QBOP_EX1 QBOP_EX2 QBOP_EX3 IEC05000349-2-en.vsd
IEC05000349 V2 EN

Figure 217:

A1A2_DC function block

415 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
11.4.6.3 Logic diagram
A1A2_DC QB_OP QB_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 VPS1_DC S1QC1_OP S2QC2_OP S1DC_OP EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBOP_EX1 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 VPS2_DC S1QC1_OP S2QC2_OP S2DC_OP EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBOP_EX2 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 S1QC1_CL S2QC2_CL EXDU_ES QBOP_EX3 =1 VPQB VPDCTR DCOPTR DCCLTR =1 =1 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

&

>1
1

QBOPREL QBOPITL

&

&

en04000544.vsd

IEC04000544 V1 EN

IEC04000545 V1 EN

11.4.6.4

Input and output signals


Table 242:
Name QB_OP QB_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL

A1A2_DC Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 Description QB is in open position QB is in closed position QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position

Table continues on next page 416 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Name S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBCL_EX1 QBCL_EX2 QBOP_EX1 QBOP_EX2 QBOP_EX3 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open position All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open position Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are valid Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are valid No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2 No transm error from bays with disc conn to section 1 and 2 External close condition for section disconnector QB External close condition for section disconnector QB External open condition for section disconnector QB External open condition for section disconnector QB External open condition for section disconnector QB

Table 243:
Name QBOPREL QBOPITL QBCLREL QBCLITL DCOPTR DCCLTR VPDCTR

A1A2_DC Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Opening of QB is allowed Opening of QB is forbidden Closing of QB is allowed Closing of QB is forbidden The bus section disconnector is in open position The bus section disconnector is in closed position Switch status of QB is valid (open or closed)

11.4.7
11.4.7.1

Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC


Introduction
The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) function is used for a bus-coupler bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 218. The function can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar.
417

Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

WA1 (A) WA2 (B) WA7 (C) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 QB20 QB7

QC2

en04000514.vsd
IEC04000514 V1 EN

Figure 218:

Switchyard layout ABC_BC

11.4.7.2

Function block
ABC_BC QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QB20_OP QB20_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL BBTR_OP BC_12_CL VP_BBTR VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_12 EXDU_BC QA1O_EX1 QA1O_EX2 QA1O_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB20_EX1 QB20_EX2 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 QA1OPREL QA1OPITL QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QB7REL QB7ITL QB20REL QB20ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB220OTR QB220CTR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR BC12OPTR BC12CLTR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VPQB1TR VQB220TR VPQB7TR VPQB12TR VPBC12TR VPBC17TR VPBC27TR

IEC05000350-2-en.vsd
IEC05000350 V2 EN

Figure 219:
418

ABC_BC function block

Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Logic diagram
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB20_OP QB20_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL VPQB1 QB1_OP QA1O_EX1 VPQB20 QB20_OP QA1O_EX2 VP_BBTR BBTR_OP EXDU_12 QA1O_EX3 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB7 VPQB20
IEC04000533 V1 EN

11.4.7.3

ABC_BC =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & & >1


1

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB20 VPQB7 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 VPQC21 VPQC71 QA1OPREL QA1OPITL

&

QA1CLREL QA1CLITL

en04000533.vsd

VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QB2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQB2 VP_BC_12 QB2_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB1_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX3

&

>1
1

QB1REL QB1ITL

&

&

en04000534.vsd

IEC04000534 V1 EN

419 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQB1 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB2_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX3

&

>1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

&

&

en04000535.vsd

IEC04000535 V1 EN

VPQA1 VPQB20 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC71 QA1_OP QB20_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC71_OP EXDU_ES QB7_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC71 QC2_CL QC71_CL EXDU_ES QB7_EX2 VPQA1 VPQB7 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB7_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB20_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QC2_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB20_EX2

&

>1
1

QB7REL QB7ITL

&

&

>1
1

QB20REL QB20ITL

&

en04000536.vsd

IEC04000536 V1 EN

420 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

VPQB1 VPQB20 VPQB7 VPQB2 QB1_OP QB20_OP QB7_OP QB2_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB20_OP QB2_OP VPQB20 VPQB2 QB7_OP QB7_CL VPQB7 QB1_OP QB2_OP VPQB1 VPQB2 QA1_OP QB1_OP QB20_OP VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB20 QA1_OP QB1_OP QB7_OP VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB7 QA1_OP QB2_OP QB7_OP VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQB7
IEC04000537 V1 EN

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL

& &

QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB220OTR QB220CTR VQB220TR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR VPQB7TR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB12TR BC12OPTR BC12CLTR VPBC12TR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR VPBC17TR BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VPBC27TR
en04000537.vsd

>1 & >1 & >1 & >1 &

11.4.7.4

Input and output signals


Table 244:
Name QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QB20_OP QB20_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC11_OP

ABC_BC Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB7 is in open position QB7 is in closed position QB20 is in open position QB20 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position

Table continues on next page

421 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL BBTR_OP BC_12_CL VP_BBTR VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_12 EXDU_BC QA1O_EX1 QA1O_EX2 QA1O_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB20_EX1 QB20_EX2 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open position Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed position No busbar transfer is in progress A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/ WA2 busbars No transmission error from any other bus coupler bay External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB20 External condition for apparatus QB20 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7

Table 245:
Name QA1OPREL QA1OPITL QA1CLREL QA1CLITL

ABC_BC Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Opening of QA1 is allowed Opening of QA1 is forbidden Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden

Table continues on next page

422 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Name QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QB7REL QB7ITL QB20REL QB20ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB220OTR QB220CTR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR BC12OPTR BC12CLTR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VPQB1TR VQB220TR VPQB7TR VPQB12TR VPBC12TR VPBC17TR VPBC27TR Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QB7 is allowed Switching of QB7 is forbidden Switching of QB20 is allowed Switching of QB20 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 and QB20 are in open position QB2 or QB20 or both are not in open position QB7 is in open position QB7 is in closed position QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position QB1 and QB2 are not in open position No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2 Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2 No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7 Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7 No connection via the own bus coupler between WA2 and WA7 Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA2 and WA7 Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed) Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are valid

423 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control 11.4.8


11.4.8.1

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH


Introduction
The interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter (BH_CONN, BH_LINE_A, BH_LINE_B) functions are used for lines connected to a 1 1/2 breaker diameter according to figure 220.
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QC1 QA1 QC2 QB6 BH_LINE_A QC3 QB6 QC3 BH_LINE_B QA1 QC2 QB2 QC1

QB61

QA1

QB62

QB9 QC1 QC9 QC2

QB9 QC9

BH_CONN en04000513.vsd
IEC04000513 V1 EN

Figure 220:

Switchyard layout 1 1/2 breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the connection between the two lines of the diameter in the 1 1/2 breaker switchyard layout.

424 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Function blocks
BH_LINE_A QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLITL QB6_OP QB6REL QB6_CL QB6ITL QB1_OP QB1REL QB1_CL QB1ITL QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1ITL QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2ITL QC3_OP QC3REL QC3_CL QC3ITL QB9_OP QB9REL QB9_CL QB9ITL QC9_OP QC9REL QC9_CL QC9ITL CQA1_OP QB1OPTR CQA1_CL QB1CLTR CQB61_OP VPQB1TR CQB61_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 IEC05000352-2-en.vsd
IEC05000352 V2 EN

11.4.8.2

Figure 221:

BH_LINE_A function block

425 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

BH_LINE_B QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLITL QB6_OP QB6REL QB6_CL QB6ITL QB2_OP QB2REL QB2_CL QB2ITL QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1ITL QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2ITL QC3_OP QC3REL QC3_CL QC3ITL QB9_OP QB9REL QB9_CL QB9ITL QC9_OP QC9REL QC9_CL QC9ITL CQA1_OP QB2OPTR CQA1_CL QB2CLTR CQB62_OP VPQB2TR CQB62_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 IEC05000353-2-en.vsd
IEC05000353 V2 EN

Figure 222:

BH_LINE_B function block

QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL 1QC3_OP 1QC3_CL 2QC3_OP 2QC3_CL QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2

BH_CONN QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL QB62REL QB62ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL

IEC05000351-2-en.vsd
IEC05000351 V2 EN

Figure 223:

BH_CONN function block

426 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Logic diagrams
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL 1QC3_OP 1QC3_CL 2QC3_OP 2QC3_CL VPQB61 VPQB62 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VP1QC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP 1QC3_OP QB61_EX1 VPQC1 VP1QC3 QC1_CL 1QC3_CL QB61_EX2 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VP2QC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP 2QC3_OP QB62_EX1 VPQC2 VP2QC3 QC2_CL 2QC3_CL QB62_EX2 VPQB61 VPQB62 QB61_OP QB62_OP
IEC04000560 V1 EN

11.4.8.3

BH_CONN =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1


1 1

VPQA1 VPQB61 VPQB62 VPQC1 VPQC2 VP1QC3 VP2QC3 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL

&

&

>1
1

QB62REL QB62ITL

&

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL


en04000560.vsd

427 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL CQB61_OP CQB61_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQB1 VPQB6 VPQB9 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QB6_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QC2_CL QC3_CL QB6_EX2
IEC04000554 V1 EN

BH_LINE_A =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1


1 1

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 VPCQB61 VPQC11 VPVOLT QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL

&

en04000554.vsd

428 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX2 VPQB1 VPQB6 QB1_OP QB6_OP VPQB6 VPQB9 VPCQB61 QB6_OP QB9_OP CQB61_OP VPQA1 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQB61 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 QB9_EX1 QB6_OP QB9_EX2 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QB9_EX3

&

>1
1

QB1REL QB1ITL

&

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL

&
1

&

>1

QB9REL QB9ITL

>1 &

en04000555.vsd

IEC04000555 V1 EN

CQB61_OP QB9_EX4 CQA1_OP CQC1_OP CQC2_OP QB9_EX5 QC9_OP QC3_OP QB9_EX6 VPQC9 VPQC3 QC9_CL QC3_CL QB9_EX7 VPQB9 VPVOLT QB9_OP VOLT_OFF QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1
IEC04000556 V1 EN

>1 &

&

>1

&

&

QC9REL QC9ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR


en04000556.vsd

429 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

QA1_OP QA1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL CQB62_OP CQB62_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQB2 VPQB6 VPQB9 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QB6_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QC2_CL QC3_CL QB6_EX2
IEC04000557 V1 EN

BH_LINE_B =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1


1 1

VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 VPCQB62 VPQC21 VPVOLT QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL

&

en04000557.vsd

430 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQC1 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX2 VPQB2 VPQB6 QB2_OP QB6_OP VPQB6 VPQB9 VPCQB62 QB6_OP QB9_OP CQB62_OP VPQA1 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQB62 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 QB9_EX1 QB6_OP QB9_EX2 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QB9_EX3

&

>1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

&

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL

&
1

&

>1

QB9REL QB9ITL

>1 &

en04000558.vsd

IEC04000558 V1 EN

CQB62_OP QB9_EX4 CQA1_OP CQC1_OP CQC2_OP QB9_EX5 QC9_OP QC3_OP QB9_EX6 VPQC9 VPQC3 QC9_CL QC3_CL QB9_EX7 VPQB9 VPVOLT QB9_OP VOLT_OFF QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2
IEC04000559 V1 EN

>1 &

&

>1

&

&

QC9REL QC9ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR


en04000559.vsd

431 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
11.4.8.4 Input and output signals
Table 246:
Name QA1_OP QA1_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQB61_OP CQB61_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB9_EX1

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

BH_LINE_A Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB6 is in open position QB6 is in close position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QB9 is in open position QB9 is in closed position QC9 is in open position QC9 is in closed position QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC11 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table continues on next page

432 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Name QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 247:
Name QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL QB1REL QB1ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QB9REL QB9ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR

BH_LINE_A Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB6 is allowed Switching of QB6 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden Switching of QC3 is allowed Switching of QC3 is forbidden Switching of QB9 is allowed Switching of QB9 is forbidden Switching of QC9 is allowed Switching of QC9 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

Table 248:
Name QA1_OP QA1_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP

BH_LINE_B Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB6 is in open position QB6 is in close position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QC1 is in open position

Table continues on next page

433 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQB62_OP CQB62_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QB9 is in open position QB9 is in closed position QC9 is in open position QC9 is in closed position

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC21 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9

434 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

Table 249:
Name QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QB9REL QB9ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR

BH_LINE_B Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB6 is allowed Switching of QB6 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden Switching of QC3 is allowed Switching of QC3 is forbidden Switching of QB9 is allowed Switching of QB9 is forbidden Switching of QC9 is allowed Switching of QC9 is forbidden QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

Table 250:
Name QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL 1QC3_OP 1QC3_CL 2QC3_OP 2QC3_CL QB61_EX1

BH_CONN Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB61 is in open position QB61 is in closed position QB62 is in open position QB62 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QC3 on line 1 is in open position QC3 on line 1 is in closed position QC3 on line 2 is in open position QC3 on line 2 is in closed position External condition for apparatus QB61

Table continues on next page

435 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name QB61_EX2 QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

External condition for apparatus QB61 External condition for apparatus QB62 External condition for apparatus QB62

Table 251:
Name QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL QB62REL QB62ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL

BH_CONN Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB61 is allowed Switching of QB61 is forbidden Switching of QB62 is allowed Switching of QB62 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden

11.4.9
11.4.9.1

Interlocking for double CB bay DB


Introduction
The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including DB_BUS_A, DB_BUS_B and DB_LINE functions are used for a line connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 224.

436 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QC1 QA1 DB_BUS_A QC2 QB61 QB62 QC3 QB9 QC9 QC5 QA2 DB_BUS_B QB2 QC4

DB_LINE

en04000518.vsd
IEC04000518 V1 EN

Figure 224:

Switchyard layout double circuit breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined. DB_LINE is the connection from the line to the circuit breaker parts that are connected to the busbars. DB_BUS_A and DB_BUS_B are the connections from the line to the busbars.

11.4.9.2

Function block
DB_BUS_A QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLITL QB1_OP QB61REL QB1_CL QB61ITL QB61_OP QB1REL QB61_CL QB1ITL QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1ITL QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2ITL QC3_OP QB1OPTR QC3_CL QB1CLTR QC11_OP VPQB1TR QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 IEC05000354-2-en.vsd
IEC05000354 V2 EN

Figure 225:

DB_BUS_A function block

437 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

DB_LINE QA1_OP QA1_CL QA2_OP QA2_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9REL QB9ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QC9REL QC9ITL

IEC05000356-2-en.vsd
IEC05000356 V2 EN

Figure 226:

DB_LINE function block

DB_BUS_B QA2_OP QA2CLREL QA2_CL QA2CLITL QB2_OP QB62REL QB2_CL QB62ITL QB62_OP QB2REL QB62_CL QB2ITL QC4_OP QC4REL QC4_CL QC4ITL QC5_OP QC5REL QC5_CL QC5ITL QC3_OP QB2OPTR QC3_CL QB2CLTR QC21_OP VPQB2TR QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 IEC05000355-2-en.vsd
IEC05000355 V2 EN

Figure 227:

DB_BUS_B function block

438 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Logic diagrams
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VPQB61 VPQB1 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QB61_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QC2_CL QC3_CL QB61_EX2 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX2 DB_BUS_A =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1
1 1

11.4.9.3

VPQA1 VPQB61 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC11 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL

&

&

>1
1

QB1REL QB1ITL

&

en04000547.vsd

IEC04000547 V1 EN

VPQB61 VPQB1 QB61_OP QB1_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR


en04000548.vsd

IEC04000548 V1 EN

439 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

QA2_OP QA2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VPQB62 VPQB2 VPQA2 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC3 QA2_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC3_OP QB62_EX1 VPQC5 VPQC3 QC5_CL QC3_CL QB62_EX2 VPQA2 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC21 QA2_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQC4 VPQC21 QC4_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX2

DB_BUS_B =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1


1 1

VPQA2 VPQB62 VPQB2 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC3 VPQC21 QA2CLREL QA2CLITL QB62REL QB62ITL

&

&

>1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

&

en04000552.vsd

IEC04000552 V1 EN

VPQB62 VPQB2 QB62_OP QB2_OP QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2

&

1 1

QC4REL QC4ITL QC5REL QC5ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR


en04000553.vsd

IEC04000553 V1 EN

440 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

QA1_OP QA1_CL QA2_OP QA2_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQA1 VPQA2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC9 QA1_OP QA2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX1

DB_LINE =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & >1


1

VPQA1 VPQA2 VPQB61 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQB62 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQB9 VPQC3 VPQC9 VPVOLT QB9REL QB9ITL

&
IEC04000549 V1 EN

en04000549.vsd

VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC9 VPQB62 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC9_OP QB62_OP QB9_EX2 VPQA2 VPQB61 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC9 QA2_OP QB61_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX3 VPQC3 VPQC9 VPQB61 VPQB62 QC3_OP QC9_OP QB61_OP QB62_OP QB9_EX4 VPQC3 VPQC9 QC3_CL QC9_CL QB9_EX5
IEC04000550 V1 EN

&

>1

&

&

&

en04000550.vsd

441 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

VPQB61 VPQB62 VPQB9 QB61_OP QB62_OP QB9_OP VPQB9 VPVOLT QB9_OP VOLT_OFF
IEC04000551 V1 EN

&
1

QC3REL QC3ITL

&
1

QC9REL QC9ITL
en04000551.vsd

11.4.9.4

Input and output signals


Table 252:
Name QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2

DB_BUS_A Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB61 is in open position QB61 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC11 External condition for apparatus QB61 External condition for apparatus QB61 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1

Table 253:
Name QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL QB1REL

DB_BUS_A Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB61 is allowed Switching of QB61 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed

Table continues on next page 442 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Name QB1ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

Table 254:
Name QA1_OP QA1_CL QA2_OP QA2_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2

DB_LINE Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QA2 is in open position QA2 is in closed position QB61 is in open position QB61 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QB62 is in open position QB62 is in closed position QC4 is in open position QC4 is in closed position QC5 is in open position QC5 is in closed position QB9 is in open position QB9 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QC9 is in open position QC9 is in closed position There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table continues on next page

443 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 255:
Name QB9REL QB9ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QC9REL QC9ITL

DB_LINE Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Switching of QB9 is allowed Switching of QB9 is forbidden Switching of QC3 is allowed Switching of QC3 is forbidden Switching of QC9 is allowed Switching of QC9 is forbidden

Table 256:
Name QA2_OP QA2_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2

DB_BUS_B Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description QA2 is in open position QA2 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB62 is in open position QB62 is in closed position QC4 is in open position QC4 is in closed position QC5 is in open position QC5 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC21 External condition for apparatus QB62 External condition for apparatus QB62 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2

444 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

Table 257:
Name QA2CLREL QA2CLITL QB62REL QB62ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC4REL QC4ITL QC5REL QC5ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR

DB_BUS_B Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Closing of QA2 is allowed Closing of QA2 is forbidden Switching of QB62 is allowed Switching of QB62 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QC4 is allowed Switching of QC4 is forbidden Switching of QC5 is allowed Switching of QC5 is forbidden QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

11.4.10
11.4.10.1

Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE


Introduction
The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function is used for a line connected to a double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 228. The function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) WA7 (C) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 QC2 QB9 QC9 QB7

en04000478.vsd
IEC04000478 V1 EN

Figure 228:

Switchyard layout ABC_LINE

445 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
11.4.10.2 Function block
ABC_LINE QA1CLREL QA1_OP QA1_CL QA1CLITL QB9_OP QB9REL QB9_CL QB9ITL QB1_OP QB1REL QB1_CL QB1ITL QB2_OP QB2REL QB2_CL QB2ITL QB7_OP QB7REL QB7_CL QB7ITL QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1ITL QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2ITL QC9_OP QC9REL QC9_CL QC9ITL QC11_OP QB1OPTR QC11_CL QB1CLTR QC21_OP QB2OPTR QC21_CL QB2CLTR QC71_OP QB7OPTR QC71_CL QB7CLTR BB7_D_OP QB12OPTR BC_12_CL QB12CLTR BC_17_OP VPQB1TR BC_17_CL VPQB2TR BC_27_OP VPQB7TR BC_27_CL VPQB12TR VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VP_BB7_D VP_BC_12 VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 EXDU_ES EXDU_BPB EXDU_BC QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 QB7_EX3 QB7_EX4 IEC05000357-2-en.vsd
IEC05000357 V2 EN

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Figure 229:

ABC_LINE function block

446 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Logic diagram
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC9 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC9 QC2_CL QC9_CL QB9_EX2 ABC_LINE =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & >1
1

11.4.10.3

VPQA1 VPQB9 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB7 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC9 VPQC11 VPQC21 VPQC71 VPVOLT QB9REL QB9ITL &
1

QA1CLREL QA1CLITL

&

en04000527.vsd
IEC04000527 V1 EN

447 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QB2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1

&

1
1

QB1REL QB1ITL

VPQB2 VP_BC_12 QB2_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB1_EX2

&

VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1EX3

&

en04000528.vsd
IEC04000528 V1 EN

448 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES

&

1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

QB2_EX1

VPQB1 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB2_EX2

&

VPQC1 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX3

&

en04000529.vsd
IEC04000529 V1 EN

449 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

VPQC9 VPQC71 VP_BB7_D VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 QC9_OP QC71_OP EXDU_ES BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_17_OP BC_27_OP EXDU_BC QB7_EX1 VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC71 VP_BB7_D VP_BC_17 QA1_CL QB1_CL QC9_OP QB9_CL QC71_OP EXDU_ES BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_17_CL EXDU_BC QB7_EX2

&

>1
1

QB7REL QB7ITL

&

IEC04000530 V1 EN

450 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC71 VP_BB7_D VP_BC_27 QA1_CL QB2_CL QC9_OP QB9_CL QC71_OP EXDU_ES BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_27_CL EXDU_BC QB7_EX3 VPQC9 VPQC71 QC9_CL QC71_CL EXDU_ES QB7_EX4 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB9 QB1_OP QB2_OP QB9_OP VPQB7 VPQB9 VPVOLT QB7_OP QB9_OP VOLT_OFF
IEC04000531 V1 EN

&

>1

&

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL

&
1

QC9REL QC9ITL

en04000531.vsd

451 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2 QB7_OP QB7_CL VPQB7 QB1_OP QB2_OP VPQB1 VPQB2
IEC04000532 V1 EN

QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR VPQB7TR >1 & QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB12TR
en04000532.vsd

11.4.10.4

Input and output signals


Table 258:
Name QA1_OP QA1_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP

ABC_LINE Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB9 is in open position QB9 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB7 is in open position QB7 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QC9 is in open position QC9 is in closed position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position

Table continues on next page

452 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Name QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL BB7_D_OP BC_12_CL BC_17_OP BC_17_CL BC_27_OP BC_27_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VP_BB7_D VP_BC_12 VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 EXDU_ES EXDU_BPB EXDU_BC QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB7_EX1 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open position Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed position Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own bay are open A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA7 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA7 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are valid No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches No transm error from any bay with disconnectors on WA7 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB7

Table continues on next page

453 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name QB7_EX2 QB7_EX3 QB7_EX4 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7

Table 259:
Name QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB9REL QB9ITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QB7REL QB7ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR VPQB7TR VPQB12TR

ABC_LINE Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB9 is allowed Switching of QB9 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QB7 is allowed Switching of QB7 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden Switching of QC9 is allowed Switching of QC9 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB7 is in open position QB7 is in closed position QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position QB1 and QB2 are not in open position Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)

11.4.11

Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO

454 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Introduction
The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO) function is used for a transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 230. The function is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise, the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function can be used. This function can also be used in single busbar arrangements.
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 AB_TRAFO QC2

11.4.11.1

T QC3 QA2 QC4 QB3 QB4


QA2 and QC4 are not used in this interlocking

en04000515.vsd
IEC04000515 V1 EN

Figure 230:

Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO

455 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
11.4.11.2 Function block
AB_TRAFO QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLITL QB1_OP QB1REL QB1_CL QB1ITL QB2_OP QB2REL QB2_CL QB2ITL QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1ITL QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2ITL QB3_OP QB1OPTR QB3_CL QB1CLTR QB4_OP QB2OPTR QB4_CL QB2CLTR QC3_OP QB12OPTR QC3_CL QB12CLTR QC11_OP VPQB1TR QC11_CL VPQB2TR QC21_OP VPQB12TR QC21_CL BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_BC QA1_EX1 QA1_EX2 QA1_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 IEC05000358-2-en.vsd
IEC05000358 V2 EN

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Figure 231:

AB_TRAFO function block

456 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Logic diagram
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB3_OP QB3_CL QB4_OP QB4_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQB3 VPQB4 VPQC3 QA1_EX2 QC3_OP QA1_EX3 QC1_CL QC2_CL QC3_CL QA1_EX1 AB_TRAFO =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 &
1

11.4.11.3

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQB3 VPQB4 VPQC3 VPQC11 VPQC21 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL

>1 &

en04000538.vsd

IEC04000538 V1 EN

VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC11 QA1_OP QB2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQB2 VPQC3 VP_BC_12 QB2_CL QC3_OP BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB1_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC2_CL QC3_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX3

&

>1
1

QB1REL QB1ITL

&

&

en04000539.vsd

IEC04000539 V1 EN

457 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQB1 VPQC3 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL QC3_OP BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB2_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC2_CL QC3_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX3

&

>1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

&

&

en04000540.vsd

IEC04000540 V1 EN

VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB3 VPQB4 QB1_OP QB2_OP QB3_OP QB4_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2 QB1_OP QB2_OP VPQB1 VPQB2
IEC04000541 V1 EN

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL

QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB12TR


en04000541.vsd

>1 &

11.4.11.4

Input and output signals


Table 260:
Name QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL

AB_TRAFO Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position

Table continues on next page 458 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Name QC2_OP QC2_CL QB3_OP QB3_CL QB4_OP QB4_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_BC QA1_EX1 QA1_EX2 QA1_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QB3 is in open position QB3 is in closed position QB4 is in open position QB4 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches No transmission error from any bus coupler bay External condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 261:
Name QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL

AB_TRAFO Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed

Table continues on next page 459 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR VPQB12TR Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Switching of QC2 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position QB1 and QB2 are not in open position Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)

11.4.12
11.4.12.1

Position evaluation POS_EVAL


Introduction
Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals OPENPOS or CLOSEPOS. The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.

11.4.12.2

Logic diagram
Position including quality
POSITION POS_EVAL OPENPOS CLOSEPOS

Open/close position of switch device

IEC08000469-1-en.vsd
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN

Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is not used.
Input position (Value) 0 (Breaker intermediate) 1 (Breaker open) 2 (Breaker closed) 3 (Breaker faulty) Any Any Signal quality Good Good Good Good Invalid Oscillatory Output OPENPOS 0 1 0 0 0 0 Output CLOSEPOS 0 0 1 0 0 0

460 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Function block
POSITION POS_EVAL OPENPOS CLOSEPOS IEC09000079_1_en.vsd
IEC09000079 V1 EN

11.4.12.3

Figure 232:

POS_EVAL function block

11.4.12.4

Input and output signals


Table 262:
Name POSITION

POS_EVAL Input signals


Type INTEGER Default 0 Description Position status including quality

Table 263:
Name OPENPOS CLOSEPOS

POS_EVAL Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Open position Close position

11.5

Voltage control
Function description Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control IEC 61850 identification TR1ATCC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 90

U
IEC10000165 V1 EN

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel control

TR8ATCC

90

U
IEC10000166 V1 EN

Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs Tap changer control and supervision, 32 binary inputs

TCMYLTC TCLYLTC

84 84

11.5.1

Introduction
The voltage control functions, Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC, Automatic voltage control for tap changer , parallel control TR8ATCC and Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC as well as Tap changer control and supervision, 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC are
461

Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

used for control of power transformers with a on-load tap changer. The functions provide automatic regulation of the voltage on the secondary side of transformers or alternatively on a load point further out in the network. Control of a single transformer, as well as control of up to eight transformers in parallel is possible. For parallel control of power transformers, three alternative methods are available, the master-follower method, the circulating current method and the reverse reactance method. The two former methods require exchange of information between the parallel transformers and this is provided for within IEC61850-8-1. Voltage control includes many extra features such as possibility of to avoid simultaneous tapping of parallel transformers, hot stand by regulation of a transformer in a group which regulates it to a correct tap position even though the LV CB is open, compensation for a possible capacitor bank on the LV side bay of a transformer, extensive tap changer monitoring including contact wear and hunting detection, monitoring of the power flow in the transformer so that for example, the voltage control can be blocked if the power reverses etc.

11.5.2

Principle of operation
The voltage control function is built up by two function blocks. Both are logical nodes in IEC 61850-8-1. Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC for single control TR8ATCC for parallel control TCMYLTC, 6 binary inputs TCLYLTC, 32 binary inputs

Tap changer control and supervision

TR1ATCCand TR8ATCC are designed to automatically maintain the voltage at the LV-side side of a power transformer within given limits around a set target voltage. A raise or lower command is generated whenever the measured voltage, for a given period of time, deviates from the set target value by more than the preset deadband value that is, degree of insensitivity. A time-delay (inverse or definite time) is set to avoid unnecessary operation during shorter voltage deviations from the target value, and in order to coordinate with other automatic voltage controllers in the system. TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC are an interface between TR1ATCC and TR8ATCC and the transformer load tap changer. More specifically this means that it receives information from TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and based on this it gives commandpulses to a power transformer motor driven on-load tap changer and also receives information from the load tap changer regarding tap position, progress of given commands, and so on.

462 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC also serve the purpose of giving information about tap position to the transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF.

11.5.3

Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC and TR8ATCC


The Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC for single control and TR8ATCC for parallel control function controls the voltage on the LV side of a transformer either automatically or manually. The automatic control can be either for a single transformer, or for a group of parallel transformers.

11.5.3.1

Principle of operation
The LV-side of the transformer is used as the voltage measuring point. If necessary, the LV side current is used as load current to calculate the line-voltage drop to the regulation point. This current is also used when parallel control with the circulating current method is used. In addition, all three-phase currents from the HV-winding (usually the winding where the tap changer is situated) are used by the Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC for single control and TR8ATCC for parallel control function for over current blocking. The setting MeasMode is a selection of single-phase, or phase-phase, or positive sequence quantity. It is to be used for voltage and current measurement on the LVside. The involved phases are also selected. Thus, single-phases as well as phasephase or three-phase feeding on the LV-side is possible but it is commonly selected for current and voltage. The analog input signals are normally common for other functions in the IED for example, protection functions. The LV-busbar voltage is designated UB, load current IL and for load point voltage UL will be used in the text to follow.

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC measures the magnitude of the busbar voltage UB. If no other additional features are enabled (line voltage drop compensation), this voltage is further used for voltage regulation. TR1ATCC then compares this voltage with the set voltage, USet and decides which action should be taken. To avoid unnecessary switching around the setpoint, a deadband (degree of insensitivity) is introduced. The deadband is symmetrical around USet, see figure 233, and it is arranged in such a way that there is an outer and an inner deadband. Measured voltages outside the outer deadband start the timer to initiate tap commands, whilst the sequence resets when the measured
463 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

voltage is once again back inside the inner deadband. One half of the outer deadband is denoted U. The setting of U, setting Udeadband should be set to a value near to the power transformers tap changer voltage step (typically 75125% of the tap changer step).
Security Range

*)

*)

Raise Cmd

DU DU DUin DUin U1 Uset U2

Lower Cmd

*)

Ublock

Umin

Umax

Voltage Magnitude

*) Action in accordance with setting IEC06000489_2_en.vsd


IEC06000489 V2 EN

Figure 233:

Control actions on a voltage scale

During normal operating conditions the busbar voltage UB, stays within the outer deadband (interval between U1 and U2 in figure 233). In that case no actions will be taken by the TR1ATCC. However, if UB becomes smaller than U1, or greater than U2, an appropriate lower or raise timer will start. The timer will run as long as the measured voltage stays outside the inner deadband. If this condition persists longer than the preset time delay, TR1ATCC will initiate that the appropriate ULOWER or URAISE command will be sent from Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC, or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC to the transformer load tap changer. If necessary, the procedure will be repeated until the magnitude of the busbar voltage again falls within the inner deadband. One half of the inner deadband is denoted Uin. The inner deadband Uin, setting UDeadbandInner should be set to a value smaller than U. It is recommended to set the inner deadband to 25-70% of the U value. This way of working is used by TR1ATCC while the busbar voltage is within the security range defined by settings Umin and Umax A situation where UB falls outside this range will be regarded as an abnormal situation. Instead of controlling the voltage at the LV busbar in the same substation as the transformer itself, it is possible to control the voltage at a load point out in the network, downstream from the transformer. The Line Voltage Drop Compensation (LDC) can be selected by a setting parameter, and it works such that the voltage drop from the transformer location to the load point is calculated based on the measured load current and the known line impedance. In order to prevent unnecessary load tap changer operations caused by temporary voltage fluctuations and to coordinate load tap changer operations in radial networks, a time delay is used for the tapping command to the load tap changer. The time delay can be either definite time or inverse time and two time settings are used, the first (t1) for the initial delay of a tap command, and the second (t2) for consecutive tap commands.
464 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Automatic control for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC

Parallel control of power transformers means control of two or more power transformers connected to the same busbar on the LV side and in most cases also on the HV side. Special measures must be taken in order to avoid a runaway situation where the tap changers on the parallel transformers gradually diverge and end up in opposite end positions. Three alternative methods can be used for parallel control with Automatic control for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC: master-follower method reverse reactance method circulating current method.

Parallel control with the master-follower method In the master-follower method, one of the transformers is selected to be master, and will regulate the voltage in accordance with the principles Automatic voltage control for a tap changer. Selection of the master is made by activating the binary input FORCMAST in the TR8ATCC function block for one of the transformers in the group. The followers can act in one of two alternative ways selected by a setting parameter: 1. Raise and lower commands (URAISE and ULOWER) generated by the master, initiates the corresponding command in all follower TR8ATCCs simultaneously, and consequently they will blindly follow the master commands irrespective of their individual tap positions. The followers read the tap position of the master and adapt to the same tap position or to a tap position with an offset relative to the master. In this mode, the followers can also be time delayed relative to the master.

2.

Parallel control with the reverse reactance method In the reverse reactance method, the LDC (Line voltage drop compensation) is used. The purpose of which is normally to control the voltage at a load point further out in the network. The very same function can also be used here but with a completely different objective. Whereas the LDC, when used to control the voltage at a load point, gives a voltage drop along a line from the busbar voltage UB to a load point voltage UL, the LDC, when used in the reverse reactance parallel control of transformers, gives a voltage increase (actually, by adjusting the ratio XL/RL with respect to the power factor, the length of the vector UL will be approximately equal to the length of UB) from UB up towards the transformer itself. When the voltage at a load point is controlled by using LDC, the line impedance from the transformer to the load point is defined by the setting Xline. If a negative reactance is entered instead of the normal positive line reactance, parallel transformers will act in such a way that the transformer with a higher tap position will be the first to tap down when the busbar voltage increases, and the transformer with a lower tap position will be the first to tap up when the busbar voltage

465 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

decreases. The overall performance will then be that a runaway tap situation will be avoided and that the circulating current will be minimized. Parallel control with the circulating current method This method requires extensive exchange of data between the TR8ATCC function blocks (one TR8ATCC function for each transformer in the parallel group). The TR8ATCC function block can either be located in the same IED, where they are configured in PCM600 to co-operate, or in different IEDs. If the functions are located in different IEDs they must communicate via GOOSE interbay communication on the IEC 61850 communication protocol. If the functions are located in different IEDs they must communicate via GOOSE interbay communication on the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Complete exchange of TR8ATCC data, analog as well as binary, via GOOSE is made cyclically every 300 ms. The main objectives of the circulating current method for parallel voltage control are: 1. 2. Regulate the busbar or load voltage to the preset target value. Minimize the circulating current in order to achieve optimal sharing of the reactive load between parallel transformers.

The busbar voltage UB is measured individually for each transformer in the parallel group by its associated TR8ATCC function. These measured values will then be exchanged between the transformers, and in each TR8ATCC block, the mean value of all UB values will be calculated. The resulting value UBmean will then be used in each IED instead of UB for the voltage regulation, thus assuring that the same value is used by all TR8ATCC functions, and thereby avoiding that one erroneous measurement in one transformer could upset the voltage regulation. At the same time, supervision of the VT mismatch is also performed. Figure 234 shows an example with two transformers connected in parallel. If transformer T1 has higher no load voltage it will drive a circulating current which adds to the load current in T1 and subtracts from the load current in T2.

466 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

UT1
ICC...T2

ICC...T2

UT2

+
T2 ZT1
IT1
ICC...T1

+
IT2

T1
ICC...T1

ZT2

IT1 UB IL Load

IT2 IL Load
IEC06000484_2_en.vsd

UL

UL

IEC06000484 V2 EN

Figure 234:

Circulating current in a parallel group of two transformers

It can be shown that the magnitude of the circulating current in this case can be approximately calculated with the formula:

I cc _ T 1 = I cc _ T 2 =
EQUATION1866 V1 EN

UT1 - UT 2 ZT 1 + ZT 2
(Equation 75)

Because the transformer impedance is dominantly inductive, it is possible to use just the transformer reactances in the above formula. At the same time this means that T1 circulating current lags the busbar voltage by almost 90, while T2 circulating current leads the busbar voltage by almost 90. See figure 235.

467 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

UT1 UB UT2

CT1*ICC_T1*ZT1 CT2*ICC_T2*ZT2

IL

IT2 2*Udeadband

IT1

ICC_T2 T2 Receives Cir_Curr IL = IT1+ IT2 Icc_T1 = Imag {IT1- (ZT2/(ZT1+ZT2)) * IL} Icc_T2 = Imag {IT2- (ZT1/(ZT1+ZT2)) * IL}
IEC06000525 V1 EN

ICC_T1 T1 Produces Cir_Curr

en06000525.vsd

Figure 235:

Vector diagram for two power transformers working in parallel

Thus, by minimizing the circulating current flow through transformers, the total reactive power flow is optimized as well. In the same time, at this optimum state the apparent power flow is distributed among the transformers in the group in proportion to their rated power. In order to calculate the circulating current, measured current values for the individual transformers must be communicated between the participating TR8ATCC functions. It should be noted that the Fourier filters in different IEDs run asynchronously, which means that current and voltage phasors cannot be exchanged and used for calculation directly between the IEDs. In order to synchronize measurements within all IEDs in the parallel group, a common reference must be chosen. The most suitable reference quantity for all transformers, belonging to the same parallel group, is the busbar voltage. This means that the measured busbar voltage is used as a reference phasor in all IEDs, and the position of the current phasors in a complex plane is calculated in respect to this reference. This is a simple and effective solution, which eliminates any additional need for synchronization between the IEDs regarding TR8ATCC function. At each transformer bay, the real and imaginary parts of the current on the secondary side of the transformer are calculated from measured values, and distributed to the TR8ATCC functions belonging to the same parallel group. As mentioned before, only the imaginary part (reactive current component) of the individual transformer current is needed for the circulating current calculations.

468 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

The real part of the current will, however, be used to calculate the total through load current and will be used for the line voltage drop compensation. The total load current is defined as the sum of all individual transformer currents:

I L = Ii
i =1
EQUATION1867 V1 EN

(Equation 76)

where the subscript i signifies the transformer bay number and k the number of parallel transformers in the group (k 8). Next step is to extract the circulating current Icc_i that flows in bay i. It is possible to identify a term in the bay current which represents the circulating current. The magnitude of the circulating current in bay i, Icc_i , can be calculated as:
I cc _ i = - Im( I i - K i I L )
EQUATION1868 V1 EN

(Equation 77)

where Im signifies the imaginary part of the expression in brackets and Ki is a constant which depends on the number of transformers in the parallel group and their short-circuit reactances. The TR8ATCC function automatically calculates this constant based on the transformer reactances which are setting parameters, and shall be given in primary ohms calculated from each transformer rating plate. The minus sign is added in the above equation in order to get a positive value of the circulating current for the transformer that generates it. In this way each TR8ATCC function calculates the circulating current of its own bay. A plus sign means that the transformer produces circulating current while, a minus sign means that the transformer receives circulating current. As a next step, it is necessary to estimate the value of the no-load voltage in each transformer. To do that the magnitude of the circulating current in each bay is first converted to a voltage deviation, Udi, with the following formula:
U di = Ci I cc _ i X i
EQUATION1869 V1 EN

(Equation 78)

where Xi is the short-circuit reactance for transformer i and Ci, is a setting parameter named Comp which serves the purpose of alternatively increasing or decreasing the impact of the circulating current in the TR8ATCC control calculations. It should be noted that Udi will have positive values for transformers that produce circulating current and negative values for transformers that receive circulating current. Now the magnitude of the no-load voltage for each transformer can be approximated with:
469 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

U i = U Bmean + U di
EQUATION1870 V1 EN

(Equation 79)

Generally speaking, this value for the no-load voltage can then be put into the voltage control function in a similar way as for the single transformer described previously. Ui would then be regarded similarly to the single transformer measured busbar voltage, and further control actions taken. For the transformer producing/receiving the circulating current, the calculated noload voltage will be greater/smaller than the measured voltage UBmean. The calculated no-load voltage will thereafter be compared with the set voltage USet. A steady deviation which is outside the outer deadband will result in ULOWER or URAISE being initiated alternatively. In this way the overall control action will always be correct since the position of a tap changer is directly related to the transformer no-load voltage. The sequence resets when UBmean is inside the inner deadband at the same time as the calculated no-load voltages for all transformers in the parallel group are inside the outer deadband. The example in figure 236,is a fabricated case and not very realistic, but it illustrates some details on how the described regulation works.
T1 T2 T3 T4

T1 No-load voltage

UBmean

DB1

DB2 USet DB2

DB1
IEC06000526_2_en.vsd
IEC06000526 V2 EN

Figure 236:

Selection of transformer to tap

In the figure 236, voltage is considered as increasing above the line denoted USet, and decreasing below that line. In the TR8ATCC function for T1 and T4, the calculated no-load voltage for T1 and T4 respectively, is above the upper limit of DB1 and thus outside the deadband.
470 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

In the TR8ATCC function for T2, the calculated no-load voltage for T2, viewed from the upper DB1, is not outside (above) the deadband, but as viewed from the lower DB1 it is outside (below) the deadband. However, there is a restriction in a situation like this, when the measured busbar voltage, UBmean, is on the opposite side of the USet line (in figure 236), then UBmean must be inside DB1 if the calculated no-load voltage for that transformer shall qualify as a candidate for tapping. Thus in the example above, the calculated no-load voltage for T2, although below DB1, would not be considered for tapping in this case. In the TR8ATCC function for T3, the calculated no-load voltage for T3, is above the upper limit of DB1 and thus outside the deadband. However, viewed from the upper limit DB1, transformers with negative voltage deviation, Udi, are disregarded and similarly, viewed from the lower limit DB1, transformers with positive voltage deviation, Udi, are disregarded. Thus in the example above, the calculated no-load voltage for T3, although above DB1, would not be considered in this case. Thus in the example above, the calculated no-load voltage for T3, although above DB1, would not be considered for tapping in this case. It is possible to avoid simultaneous tapping, and to distribute tapping actions evenly among the parallel transformers in a busbar group. This is a selected by a setting parameter, and the algorithm in the TR8ATCC function will then select the transformer with the greatest voltage deviation Udi to tap first that is, after time delay t1. Thereafter, the transformer with the then greatest value of Udi amongst the remaining transformers in the group will tap after a further time delay t2, and so on. This is made possible as the calculation of Icc is updated every time the measured values are exchanged on the horizontal communication (every 300 ms). If two transformers have equal magnitude of Udi, then there is a predetermined order governing which one is going to tap first.

471 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Logic diagrams
AUTO UL U1 INNER DB a

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

<

a<b

&

&

a U2 INNER DB

>

a>b

& >1
URAISE

a U1 DB

<

a<b

a U2 DB

>

a>b

>1

>1

ULOWER

UB U MAX

>

a>b

& &

FSD

en06000509.vsd
IEC06000509 V1 EN

Figure 237:

Simplified logic for automatic control in single mode operation

472 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

AUTO PARALLEL START OPERSIMTAP UL U1 INNER DB

&
a a<b

<

& &

&

a U2 INNER DB U CIRCCOMP MIN U1 DB U CIRCCOMP MAX U2 DB a a

>

a>b

& & >1 >1 >1 >1


URAISE

<

a<b

>

a>b

>1

ULOWER

UB U MAX

>

a>b

& &

FSD

en06000511.vsd
IEC06000511 V1 EN

Figure 238:

Simplified logic for parallel control in the circulating current mode

473 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

UCCT4

a a=b b T4PG a=b b T3PG a=b b T2PG

&
T4 1

& & & 1 & 1


SIMLOWER

UCCT3

&
1

&
T3

UCCT2

&
1

&
T2

UCCT1

a a=b b

&
T1

&

&

MAX T1PG a a=b b a a=b b a a=b b T3PG T2PG

&
T1 1

& & & 1 & 1


SIMRAISE

&
1

&
T2

&
1

&
T3

a a=b b T4PG

&
T4

&

&

MIN

ADAPT a ActualUser

1
a=b

S S

1
Udeadband LoadVoltage HOMING OperSimTap 1 a a=b b

en06000521.vsd
IEC06000521 V1 EN

Figure 239:

Simplified logic for simultaneous tapping prevention

474 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

From the Master via horizontal comm. relativePosition raiseVoltageOut lowerVoltageOut a b Follow Tap a

<

a<b

&

& = 1

>

a>b

&

&

URAISE

& 1
YLTCOUT ATCCIN tapPosition tapInHighVoltPos tapInLowVoltPos

&

= 1

ULOWER

&

&

en06000510.vsd
IEC06000510 V1 EN

Figure 240:

Simplified logic for parallel control in Master-Follower mode

11.5.4

Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC
The Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs (TCMYLTC) and 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC gives the tap commands to the tap changer, and supervises that commands are carried through correctly. It has built-in extensive possibilities for tap changer position measurement, as well as supervisory and monitoring features. This is used in the voltage control and can also give information about tap position to the transformer differential protection.

11.5.4.1

Principle of operation Reading of tap changer position


The tap changer position can be received to the tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC function block in the following ways: 1. 2. 3. Via binary input signals, one per tap position (max. 6 or 32 positions). Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals, or Gray coded binary signals. Via a mA input signal.

475 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Via binary input signals, one per tap position In this option, each tap position has a separate contact that is hard wired to a binary input in the IED. Via the Signal Matrix tool in PCM600, the contacts on the binary input card are then directly connected to the inputs B1 B6 on TCMYLTC function or inputs B1 B32 on TCLYLTC function.

Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals or Gray coded binary signals The Tap changer control and supervision, (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC) decodes binary data from up to six binary inputs to an integer value. The input pattern may be decoded either as BIN, BCD or GRAY format depending on the setting of the parameter CodeType. It is also possible to use even parity check of the input binary signal. Whether the parity check shall be used or not is set with the setting parameter UseParity. The input BIERR on (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC) can be used as supervisory input for indication of any external error ( Binary Input Module) in the system for reading of tap changer position. Likewise, the input OUTERR can be used as a supervisory of the Binary Input Module. The truth table (see table 264) shows the conversion for Binary, Binary Coded Decimal, and Gray coded signals.

476 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

Table 264:

Binary, BCD and Gray conversion

IEC06000522 V1 EN

The Gray code conversion above is not complete and therefore the conversion from decimal numbers to Gray code is given below.

477 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Table 265:

Gray code conversion

IEC06000523 V1 EN

Via a mA input signal Any of the six inputs on the mA card (MIM) can be used for the purpose of tap changer position reading connected to the Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC.

478 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

The measurement of the tap changer position via MIM module is based on the principle that the specified mA input signal range (usually 4-20 mA) is divided into N intervals corresponding to the number of positions available on the tap changer. All mA values within one interval are then associated with one tap changer position value. The number of available tap changer positions N is defined by the setting parameters LowVoltTap and HighVoltTap, which define the tap position for lowest voltage and highest voltage respectively.

11.5.5

Connection between TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and TCMYLTCor TCLYLTC


The two function blocks Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC and parallel control TR8ATCC and Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC and 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC are connected to each other according to figure 241 below.

479 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

I3P1 I3P2 U3P2

TR8ATCC ATCCOUT

TCLYLTC URAISE YLTCIN

MAN AUTO IBLK PGTFWD PLTREV QGTFWD QLTREV REVACBLK UHIGH ULOW UBLK HOURHUNT DAYHUNT HUNTING SINGLE PARALLEL HOMING ADAPT TOTBLK AUTOBLK MASTER MFERR OUTOFPOS COMMERR ICIRC TRFDISC VTALARM T1PG T2PG T3PG T4PG T5PG T6PG T7PG T8PG FOLLOWER

TCINPROG INERR RESETERR OUTERR

ULOWER HIPOSAL LOPOSAL POSERRAL

BLOCK MANCTRL AUTOCTRL PSTO RAISEV LOWERV EAUTOBLK DEBLKAUT LVA1 LVA2 LVA3 LVA4 LVARESET RSTERR DISC Q1ON Q2ON Q3ON SNGLMODE T1INCLD T2INCLD T3INCLD T4INCLD T5INCLD T6INCLD T7INCLD T8INCLD FORCMAST RSTMAST ATCCIN HORIZ1 HORIZ2 HORIZ3 HORIZ4 HORIZ5 HORIZ6 HORIZ7 HORIZ8

(Rmk. In case of parallel control, this signal shall also be connected to HORIZx input of the parallel transformer TR8ATCC function block)

RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL RS_OPCNT TCERRAL PARITY BIERR B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 MA POSOUT CONVERR NEWPOS HIDIFPOS INVALPOS YLTCOUT

IEC06000507_2_en.vsd

IEC06000507 V2 EN

Figure 241:

Connection between TR8ATCC and TCLYLTC

The TR8ATCC and TR1ATCC function blocks have an output signal ATCCOUT, which is connected to input YLTCIN on TCMYLTC. The data set sent from ATCCOUT to YLTCIN contains 5 binary signals, one word containing 10 binary signals and 1 analog signal. For TR8ATCC data is also sent from output ATCCOUT to other TR8ATCC function input HORIZx, when the master-follower or circulating current mode is used.

480 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

Table 266:
Signal raiseVolt lowerVolt automaticCtrl extRaiseBlock extLowerBlock

Binary signals: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN


Description Order to TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC to make a raise command Order to TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC to make a lower command The regulation is in automatic control Block raise commands Block lower commands

Table 267:
Signal CircCurrBl CmdErrBl OCBl MFPosDiffBl OVPartBl RevActPartBl TapChgBl TapPosBl

Binary signals contained in word enableBlockSignals: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN


Description Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of high circulating current Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of command error Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of over current Alarm/Block tap changer operation because the tap difference between a follower and the master is greater than the set value Alarm/Block raise commands because the busbar voltage is above Umax Alarm/Block raise commands because reverse action is activated Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of tap changer error Alarm/Block commands in one direction because the tap changer has reached an end position, or Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of tap changer error Alarm/Block tap changer operation because the busbar voltage is below Ublock Alarm/Block lower commands because the busbar voltage is between Umin and Ublock

UVBl UVPartBl

Table 268:
Signal currAver

Analog signal: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN


Description Value of current in the phase with the highest current value

In case of parallel control of transformers, the data set sent from output signal ATCCOUT to other TR8ATCC blocks input HORIZx contains one "word" containing 10 binary signals and 6 analog signals:
Table 269:
Signal TimerOn automaticCTRL mutualBlock disc receiveStat

Binary signals contained in word status: ATCCOUT / HORIZx


Description This signal is activated by the transformer that has started its timer and is going to tap when the set time has expired. Activated when the transformer is set in automatic control Activated when the automatic control is blocked Activated when the transformer is disconnected from the busbar Signal used for the horizontal communication

Table continues on next page

481 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Signal TermIsForcedMaster TermIsMaster termReadyForMSF raiseVoltageOut lowerVoltageOut Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Activated when the transformer is selected Master in the master-follower parallel control mode Activated for the transformer that is master in the master-follower parallel control mode Activated when the transformer is ready for master-follower parallel control mode Order from the master to the followers to tap up Order from the master to the followers to tap down

Table 270:
Signal voltageBusbar ownLoad Currim ownLoadCurrre reacSec relativePosition voltage Setpoint

Analog signals: ATCCOUT / HORIZx


Description Measured busbar voltage for this transformer Measured load current imaginary part for this transformer Measured load current real part for this transformer Transformer reactance in primary ohms referred to the LV side The transformer's actual tap position The transformer's set voltage (USet) for automatic control

The TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function blocks have an output YLTCOUT. As shown in figure 241, this output shall be connected to the input ATCCIN and it contains 10 binary signals and 4 integer signals:
Table 271:
Signal tapInOperation direction tapInHighVoltPos tapInLowVoltPos tapPositionError

Binary signals: YLTCOUT / ATCCIN


Description Tap changer in operation, changing tap position Direction, raise or lower, for the most recent tap changer operation Tap changer in high end position Tap changer in low end position Error in reading of tap position ( tap position out of range, more than one step change, BCD code error (unaccepted combination), parity fault, mA out of range, hardware fault for example, BIM etc.) This is set high when the tap changer has not carried through a raise/lower command within the expected max. time, or if the tap changer starts tapping without a given command. This is set high if a given raise/lower command is not followed by a tap position change within the expected max. time Feedback to TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC that a raise command shall be executed Feedback to TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC that a lower command shall be executed Setting value of tTCTimeout that tTCTimeout has timed out.

tapChgError

cmdError raiseVoltageFb lowerVoltageFb timeOutTC

482 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

Table 272:
Signal tapPosition

Integer signals: YLTCOUT / ATCCIN


Description Actual tap position as reported from the load tap changer Accumulated number of tap changer operations Tap position for highest voltage Tap position for lowest voltage

numberOfOperations tapPositionMaxVolt tapPositionMinVolt

11.5.6

Function block
TR1ATCC I3P1* ATCCOUT I3P2* MAN U3P2* AUTO BLOCK IBLK MANCTRL PGTFWD AUTOCTRL PLTREV PSTO QGTFWD RAISEV QLTREV LOWERV REVACBLK EAUTOBLK UHIGH DEBLKAUT ULOW LVA1 UBLK LVA2 HOURHUNT LVA3 DAYHUNT LVA4 HUNTING LVARESET TIMERON RSTERR TOTBLK ATCCIN AUTOBLK UGTUPPDB ULTLOWDB IEC07000041_2_en.vsd
IEC07000041 V2 EN

Figure 242:

TR1ATCC function block

483 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

TR8ATCC ATCCOUT I3P1* I3P2* MAN U3P2* AUTO BLOCK IBLK MANCTRL PGTFWD AUTOCTRL PLTREV PSTO QGTFWD RAISEV QLTREV LOWERV REVACBLK EAUTOBLK UHIGH DEBLKAUT ULOW LVA1 UBLK LVA2 HOURHUNT LVA3 DAYHUNT LVA4 HUNTING LVARESET SINGLE RSTERR PARALLEL DISC TIMERON Q1ON HOMING Q2ON ADAPT Q3ON TOTBLK SNGLMODE AUTOBLK T1INCLD MASTER T2INCLD FOLLOWER T3INCLD MFERR T4INCLD OUTOFPOS T5INCLD UGTUPPDB T6INCLD ULTLOWDB T7INCLD COMMERR T8INCLD ICIRC FORCMAST TRFDISC RSTMAST VTALARM ATCCIN T1PG HORIZ1 T2PG HORIZ2 T3PG HORIZ3 T4PG HORIZ4 T5PG HORIZ5 T6PG HORIZ6 T7PG HORIZ7 T8PG HORIZ8 IEC07000040_2_en.vsd
IEC07000040 V2 EN

Figure 243:

TR8ATCC function block

TCMYLTC YLTCIN* URAISE TCINPROG ULOWER INERR HIPOSAL RESETERR LOPOSAL OUTERR POSERRAL RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL RS_OPCNT TCERRAL PARITY POSOUT BIERR CONVERR B1 NEWPOS B2 HIDIFPOS B3 INVALPOS B4 TCPOS B5 YLTCOUT B6 MA IEC07000038_2_en.vsd
IEC07000038 V2 EN

Figure 244:

TCMYLTC function block

484 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

TCLYLTC URAISE YLTCIN* TCINPROG ULOWER INERR HIPOSAL RESETERR LOPOSAL OUTERR POSERRAL RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL RS_OPCNT TCERRAL PARITY POSOUT BIERR CONVERR B1 NEWPOS B2 HIDIFPOS B3 INVALPOS B4 TCPOS B5 YLTCOUT B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 MA IEC07000037_2_en.vsd
IEC07000037 V2 EN

Figure 245:

TCLYLTC function block


VCTRRCV VCTR_REC COMVALID DATVALID IEC07000045-2-en.vsd

BLOCK

IEC07000045 V2 EN

Figure 246:

VCTRRCV function block

485 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control 11.5.7 Input and output signals


Table 273:
Name I3P1 I3P2 U3P2 BLOCK MANCTRL AUTOCTRL PSTO RAISEV LOWERV EAUTOBLK DEBLKAUT LVA1 LVA2 LVA3 LVA4 LVARESET RSTERR ATCCIN

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

TR1ATCC Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN GROUP SIGNAL Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Input group for current on HV side Input group for current on LV side Input group for voltage on LV side Block of function Binary "MAN" command Binary "AUTO" command Operator place selection Binary "UP" command Binary "DOWN" command Block the voltage control in automatic control mode Binary "Deblock Auto" command Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 1 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 2 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 3 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 4 Reset LVA adjustment to 0 Resets the automatic control commands raise and lower Group connection from YLTCOUT

Table 274:
Name ATCCOUT MAN AUTO IBLK PGTFWD PLTREV QGTFWD QLTREV REVACBLK

TR1ATCC Output signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Group connection to horizontal communication and YLTCIN The control is in manual mode Automatic control mode is active One phase current is above the settable limit Active power above the settable limit powerActiveForw Active power below the settable limit powerActiveRev Reactive power above the settable limit powerReactiveForw Reactive power below the settable limit powerReactiveRev Block caused by reversed action

Table continues on next page 486 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Name UHIGH ULOW UBLK HOURHUNT DAYHUNT HUNTING TIMERON TOTBLK AUTOBLK UGTUPPDB ULTLOWDB Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Busbar voltage above the settable limit voltBusbMaxLimit Busbar voltage below the settable limit voltBusbMinLimit Busbar voltage below the settable limit voltBusbBlockLimit Alarm for too many tap changer operations during the last hour Alarm for too many tap changer operations during the last 24 hours Alarm for too many contradictory tap changer operations within the time sliding window Raise or lower command to the tap activated Block of auto and manual commands Block of auto commands Voltage greater than deadband-high, ULOWER command to come Voltage lower than deadband-low, URAISE command to come

Table 275:
Name I3P1 I3P2 U3P2 BLOCK MANCTRL AUTOCTRL PSTO RAISEV LOWERV EAUTOBLK DEBLKAUT LVA1 LVA2 LVA3 LVA4 LVARESET RSTERR DISC

TR8ATCC Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Input group for current on HV side Input group for current on LV side Input group for voltage on LV side Block of function Binary "MAN" command Binary "AUTO" command Operator place selection Binary "UP" command Binary "DOWN" command Block the voltage control in automatic control mode Binary "Deblock Auto" command Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 1 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 2 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 3 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 4 Reset LVA adjustment to 0 Resets the automatic control commands raise and lower Disconnected transformer

Table continues on next page 487 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name Q1ON Q2ON Q3ON SNGLMODE T1INCLD T2INCLD T3INCLD T4INCLD T5INCLD T6INCLD T7INCLD T8INCLD FORCMAST RSTMAST ATCCIN HORIZ1 HORIZ2 HORIZ3 HORIZ4 HORIZ5 HORIZ6 HORIZ7 HORIZ8 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Capacitor or reactor bank 1 connected Capacitor or reactor bank 2 connected Capacitor or reactor bank 3 connected The voltage control in single control Transformer1 included in parallel group Transformer2 included in parallel group Transformer3 included in parallel group Transformer4 included in parallel group Transformer5 included in parallel group Transformer6 included in parallel group Transformer7 included in parallel group Transformer8 included in parallel group Force transformer to master Reset forced master transformer to default Group connection from YLTCOUT Group connection for horizontal communication from T1 Group connection for horizontal communication from T2 Group connection for horizontal communication from T3 Group connection for horizontal communication from T4 Group connection for horizontal communication from T5 Group connection for horizontal communication from T6 Group connection for horizontal communication from T7 Group connection for horizontal communication from T8

Table 276:
Name ATCCOUT MAN AUTO IBLK PGTFWD PLTREV

TR8ATCC Output signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Group connection to horizontal communication and YLTCIN The control is in manual mode Automatic control mode is active One phase current is above the settable limit Active power above the settable limit powerActiveForw Active power below the settable limit powerActiveRev

Table continues on next page 488 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Name QGTFWD QLTREV REVACBLK UHIGH ULOW UBLK HOURHUNT DAYHUNT HUNTING SINGLE PARALLEL TIMERON HOMING ADAPT TOTBLK AUTOBLK MASTER FOLLOWER MFERR OUTOFPOS UGTUPPDB ULTLOWDB COMMERR ICIRC TRFDISC VTALARM T1PG T2PG T3PG T4PG T5PG Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Reactive power above the settable limit powerReactiveForw Reactive power below the settable limit powerReactiveRev Block caused by reversed action Busbar voltage above the settable limit voltBusbMaxLimit Busbar voltage below the settable limit voltBusbMinLimit Busbar voltage below the settable limit voltBusbBlockLimit Alarm for too many tap changer operations during the last hour Alarm for too many tap changer operations during the last 24 hours Alarm for too many contradictory tap changer operations within the time sliding window The transformer operates in single mode The transformer operates in parallel mode Raise or lower command to the tap activated Transformer is in homing conditions The transformer is adapting Block of auto and manual commands Block of auto commands The transformer is master This transformer is a follower The number of masters is different from one To high difference in tap positions Voltage greater than deadband-high, ULOWER command to come Voltage lower than deadband-low, URAISE command to come Communication error Block from high circulating current The transformer is disconnected VT supervision alarm Transformer1 included in parallel group Transformer2 included in parallel group Transformer3 included in parallel group Transformer4 included in parallel group Transformer5 included in parallel group

Table continues on next page

489 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name T6PG T7PG T8PG Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Transformer6 included in parallel group Transformer7 included in parallel group Transformer8 included in parallel group

Table 277:
Name YLTCIN TCINPROG INERR RESETERR OUTERR RS_CLCNT RS_OPCNT PARITY BIERR B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 MA

TCMYLTC Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Input group connection for YLTC Indication that tap is moving Supervision signal of the input board Reset of command and tap error Supervision off the digital output board Reset of the contact life counter Resets the operation counter Parity bit from tap changer for the tap position Error bit from tap changer for the tap position Bit 1 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 2 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 3 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 4 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 5 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 6 from tap changer for the tap position mA from tap changer for the tap position

Table 278:
Name URAISE ULOWER HIPOSAL LOPOSAL POSERRAL CMDERRAL TCERRAL POSOUT CONVERR NEWPOS

TCMYLTC Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Raise voltage command to tap changer Lower voltage command to tap changer Alarm for tap in highest volt position Alarm for tap in lowest volt position Alarm that indicates a problem with the position indication Alarm for a command without an expected position change Alarm for none or illegal tap position change Tap position outside min and max position General tap position conversion error A new tap position is reported, 1 sec pulse

Table continues on next page

490 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Name HIDIFPOS INVALPOS YLTCOUT Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN GROUP SIGNAL Description Tap position has changed more than one position Last position change was an invalid change Group connection to ATCCIN

Table 279:
Name YLTCIN TCINPROG INERR RESETERR OUTERR RS_CLCNT RS_OPCNT PARITY BIERR B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23

TCLYLTC Input signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Input group connection for YLTC Indication that tap is moving Supervision signal of the input board Reset of command and tap error Supervision off the digital output board Reset of the contact life counter Resets the operation counter Parity bit from tap changer for the tap position Error bit from tap changer for the tap position Bit 1 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 2 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 3 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 4 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 5 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 6 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 7 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 8 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 9 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 10 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 11 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 12 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 13 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 14 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 15 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 16 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 17 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 18 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 19 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 20 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 21 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 22 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 23 from tap changer for the tap position

Table continues on next page

491 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 MA Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Bit 24 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 25 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 26 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 27 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 28 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 29 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 30 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 31 from tap changer for the tap position Bit 32 from tap changer for the tap position mA from tap changer for the tap position

Table 280:
Name URAISE ULOWER HIPOSAL LOPOSAL POSERRAL CMDERRAL TCERRAL POSOUT CONVERR NEWPOS HIDIFPOS INVALPOS TCPOS YLTCOUT

TCLYLTC Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER GROUP SIGNAL Description Raise voltage command to tap changer Lower voltage command to tap changer Alarm for tap in highest volt position Alarm for tap in lowest volt position Alarm that indicates a problem with the position indication Alarm for a command without an expected position change Alarm for none or illegal tap position change Tap position outside min and max position General tap position conversion error A new tap position is reported, 1 sec pulse Tap position has changed more than one position Last position change was an invalid change Integer value corresponding to actual tap position Group connection to ATCCIN

Table 281:
Name BLOCK

VCTRRCV Input signals


Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Block of function

Table 282:
Name VCTR_REC COMVALID DATVALID

VCTRRCV Output signals


Type GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Received data from horizontal communication Communication is valid Data valid

492 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control Setting parameters

11.5.8
Table 283:
Name Operation I1Base I2Base UBase MeasMode

TR1ATCC Group settings (basic)


Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 L1 L2 L3 L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 PosSeq Off On Off On Off Auto AutoMan 1.0 - 100.0 85.0 - 120.0 0.2 - 9.0 0.1 - 9.0 80 - 180 70 - 120 50 - 120 Constant Inverse 3 - 1000 Constant Inverse 1 - 1000 3 - 120 Off On Off On Unit A A kV Step 1 1 0.05 Default Off 3000 3000 400.00 PosSeq Description Operation Off / On Base setting for HV current level in A Base setting for LV current level in A Base setting for voltage level in kV Selection of measured voltage and current

TotalBlock AutoBlock FSDMode

Off Off Off

Total block of the voltage control function Block of the automatic mode in voltage control function Fast step down function activation mode

tFSD USet UDeadband UDeadbandInner Umax Umin Ublock t1Use t1 t2Use t2 tMin OperationLDC OperCapaLDC

s %UB %UB %UB %UB %UB %UB s s s -

0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -

15.0 100.0 1.2 0.9 105 80 80 Constant 60 Constant 15 5 Off Off

Time delay for lower command when fast step down mode is activated Voltage control set voltage, % of rated voltage Outer voltage deadband, % of rated voltage Inner voltage deadband, % of rated voltage Upper lim of busbar voltage, % of rated voltage Lower lim of busbar voltage, % of rated voltage Undervoltage block level, % of rated voltage Activation of long inverse time delay Time delay (long) for automatic control commands Activation of short inverse time delay Time delay (short) for automatic control commands Minimum operating time in inverse mode Operation line voltage drop compensation LDC compensation for capacitive load

Table continues on next page 493 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name Rline Xline LVAConst1 LVAConst2 LVAConst3 LVAConst4 VRAuto OperationRA tRevAct RevActLim Iblock HourHuntDetect DayHuntDetect tWindowHunt NoOpWindow P> P< Q> Q< tPower Values (Range) 0.00 - 150.00 -150.00 - 150.00 -20.0 - 20.0 -20.0 - 20.0 -20.0 - 20.0 -20.0 - 20.0 -20.0 - 20.0 Off On 30 - 6000 0 - 100 0 - 250 0 - 30 0 - 100 1 - 120 3 - 30 -9999.99 - 9999.99 -9999.99 - 9999.99 -9999.99 - 9999.99 -9999.99 - 9999.99 1 - 6000 Unit ohm ohm %UB %UB %UB %UB %UB s %IB1 %IB1 Op/H Op/D Min Op/W MW MW MVAr MVAr s Step 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 Default 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Off 60 95 150 30 100 60 30 1000 -1000 1000 -1000 10 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Line resistance, primary values, in ohm Line reactance, primary values, in ohm Constant 1 for LVA, % of regulated voltage Constant 2 for LVA, % of regulated voltage Constant 3 for LVA, % of regulated voltage Constant 4 for LVA, % of regulated voltage Load voltage auto correction, % of rated voltage Enable block from reverse action supervision Duration time for the reverse action block signal Current limit for reverse action block in % of I1Base Overcurrent block level, % of rated current Level for number of counted raise/lower within one hour Level for number of counted raise/lower within 24 hour Time window for hunting alarm, minutes Hunting detection alarm, max operations/ window Alarm level of active power in forward direction Alarm level of active power in reverse direction Alarm level of reactive power in forward direction Alarm level of reactive power in reverse direction Time delay for alarms from power supervision

Table 284:
Name TRFNAME Xr2 CmdErrBk

TR1ATCC Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) 0 - 13 0.1 - 200.0 Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Unit ohm Step 1 0.1 Default NAME#-15 0.5 Auto Block Description User define string for OUT signal 15 Transformer reactance in primary ohms on ATCC side Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for command error

Table continues on next page

494 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Values (Range) Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto&Man Block Unit Step Default Auto&Man Block Description Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for overcurrent Alarm or auto&man partial block for overvoltage Alarm or auto partial block for reverse action Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for tap changer error Alarm, auto or auto&man block for pos sup Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for undervoltage Alarm or auto&man partial block for undervoltage

Name OCBk

OVPartBk RevActPartBk TapChgBk

Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block

TapPosBk

Auto Block

UVBk

Auto Block

UVPartBk

Alarm

Table 285:
Name Operation I1Base I2Base UBase MeasMode

TR8ATCC Group settings (basic)


Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 L1 L2 L3 L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 PosSeq -9999.99 - 9999.99 -9999.99 - 9999.99 -9999.99 - 9999.99 Off On Off On Off Auto AutoMan 1.0 - 100.0 Unit A A kV Step 1 1 0.05 Default Off 3000 3000 400.00 PosSeq Description Operation Off / On Base setting for HV current level in A Base setting for LV current level in A Base setting for voltage level in kV Selection of measured voltage and current

Q1 Q2 Q3 TotalBlock AutoBlock FSDMode

MVAr MVAr MVAr -

0.01 0.01 0.01 -

0 0 0 Off Off Off

Size of cap/reactor bank 1 in MVAr, >0 for C and <0 for L Size of cap/reactor bank 2 in MVAr, >0 for C and <0 for L Size of cap/reactor bank 3 in MVAr, >0 for C and <0 for L Total block of the voltage control function Block of the automatic mode in voltage control function Fast step down function activation mode

tFSD

0.1

15.0

Time delay for lower command when fast step down mode is activated

Table continues on next page

495 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name USet UDeadband UDeadbandInner Umax Umin Ublock t1Use t1 t2Use t2 tMin OperationLDC OperCapaLDC Rline Xline LVAConst1 LVAConst2 LVAConst3 LVAConst4 VRAuto OperationRA tRevAct RevActLim Iblock HourHuntDetect DayHuntDetect Values (Range) 85.0 - 120.0 0.2 - 9.0 0.1 - 9.0 80 - 180 70 - 120 50 - 120 Constant Inverse 3 - 1000 Constant Inverse 1 - 1000 3 - 120 Off On Off On 0.00 - 150.00 -150.00 - 150.00 -20.0 - 20.0 -20.0 - 20.0 -20.0 - 20.0 -20.0 - 20.0 -20.0 - 20.0 Off On 30 - 6000 0 - 100 0 - 250 0 - 30 0 - 100 Unit %UB %UB %UB %UB %UB %UB s s s ohm ohm %UB %UB %UB %UB %UB s %IB1 %IB1 Op/H Op/D Step 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 Default 100.0 1.2 0.9 105 80 80 Constant 60 Constant 15 5 Off Off 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Off 60 95 150 30 100 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Voltage control set voltage, % of rated voltage Outer voltage deadband, % of rated voltage Inner voltage deadband, % of rated voltage Upper lim of busbar voltage, % of rated voltage Lower lim of busbar voltage, % of rated voltage Undervoltage block level, % of rated voltage Activation of long inverse time delay Time delay (long) for automatic control commands Activation of short inverse time delay Time delay (short) for automatic control commands Minimum operating time in inverse mode Operation line voltage drop compensation LDC compensation for capacitive load Line resistance, primary values, in ohm Line reactance, primary values, in ohm Constant 1 for LVA, % of regulated voltage Constant 2 for LVA, % of regulated voltage Constant 3 for LVA, % of regulated voltage Constant 4 for LVA, % of regulated voltage Load voltage auto correction, % of rated voltage Enable block from reverse action supervision Duration time for the reverse action block signal Current limit for reverse action block in % of I1Base Overcurrent block level, % of rated current Level for number of counted raise/lower within one hour Level for number of counted raise/lower within 24 hour

Table continues on next page 496 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Values (Range) 1 - 120 3 - 30 -9999.99 - 9999.99 -9999.99 - 9999.99 -9999.99 - 9999.99 -9999.99 - 9999.99 1 - 6000 Off CC MF Off On 0.0 - 20000.0 0 - 1000 0 - 2000 Off On Off On Off On 0.5 - 10.0 1 - 600 Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Unit Min Op/W MW MW MVAr MVAr s Step 1 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 Default 60 30 1000 -1000 1000 -1000 10 Off Description Time window for hunting alarm, minutes Hunting detection alarm, max operations/ window Alarm level of active power in forward direction Alarm level of active power in reverse direction Alarm level of reactive power in forward direction Alarm level of reactive power in reverse direction Time delay for alarms from power supervision Parallel operation, Off/CirculatingCurrent/ MasterFollower Enable block from circulating current supervision Block level for circulating current Time delay for block from circulating current Compensation parameter in % for Circulating Current Simultaneous tapping prohibited Use common voltage set point for parallel operation Activate homing function Alarm level for VT supervision, % of rated voltage Time delay for VT supervision alarm Receive block operation from parallel transformer1 Receive block operation from parallel transformer2 Receive block operation from parallel transformer3 Receive block operation from parallel transformer4 Receive block operation from parallel transformer5 Receive block operation from parallel transformer6 Receive block operation from parallel transformer7 Receive block operation from parallel transformer8

Name tWindowHunt NoOpWindow P> P< Q> Q< tPower OperationPAR

OperCCBlock CircCurrLimit tCircCurr Comp OperSimTap OperUsetPar OperHoming VTmismatch tVTmismatch T1RXOP T2RXOP T3RXOP T4RXOP T5RXOP T6RXOP T7RXOP T8RXOP

%IB2 s % %UB s -

0.1 1 1 0.1 1 -

On 100.0 30 100 Off Off Off 10.0 10 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off

Table continues on next page

497 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name TapPosOffs MFPosDiffLim tMFPosDiff Values (Range) -5 - 5 1 - 20 0 - 6000 Unit s Step 1 1 1 Default 0 1 60 Description

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Tap position offset in relation to the master Limit for tap pos difference from master Time for tap pos difference from master

Table 286:
Name TrfId

TR8ATCC Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 0 - 13 0.1 - 200.0 0 - 60 Off On Follow Cmd Follow Tap Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Alarm Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto&Man Block Unit Step Default T1 Description Identity of transformer

TRFNAME Xr2 tAutoMSF OperationAdapt MFMode CircCurrBk

ohm s -

1 0.1 1 -

NAME#-15 0.5 10 Off Follow Cmd Alarm

User define string for OUT signal 15 Transformer reactance in primary ohms on ATCC side Time delay for command for auto follower Enable adapt mode Select follow tap or follow command Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for high circ current Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for command error Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for overcurrent Alarm or auto block for tap position difference in MF Alarm or auto&man partial block for overvoltage Alarm or auto partial block for reverse action Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for tap changer error Alarm, auto or auto&man block for pos sup Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for undervoltage Alarm or auto&man partial block for undervoltage

CmdErrBk

Auto Block

OCBk

Auto&Man Block

MFPosDiffBk OVPartBk RevActPartBk TapChgBk

Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block

TapPosBk

Auto Block

UVBk

Auto Block

UVPartBk

Alarm

498 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

Table 287:
Name Operation IBase tTCTimeout tPulseDur

TCMYLTC Group settings (basic)


Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 1 - 120 0.5 - 10.0 Unit A s s Step 1 1 0.1 Default Off 3000 5 1.5 Description Operation Off / On Base current in primary Ampere for the HV-side Tap changer constant time-out Raise/lower command output pulse duration

Table 288:
Name LowVoltTap HighVoltTap mALow mAHigh CodeType

TCMYLTC Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) 1 - 63 1 - 63 0.000 - 25.000 0.000 - 25.000 BIN BCD Gray SINGLE mA Off On 1 - 60 1.0 - 3.0 0 - 9999999 Off On Unit mA mA Step 1 1 0.001 0.001 Default 1 33 4.000 20.000 BIN Description Tap position for lowest voltage Tap position for highest voltage mA for lowest voltage tap position mA for highest voltage tap position Type of code conversion

UseParity tStable CLFactor InitCLCounter EnabTapCmd

s s -

1 0.1 1 -

Off 2 2.0 250000 On

Enable parity check Time after position change before the value is accepted Adjustable factor for contact life function CL counter start value Enable commands to tap changer

Table 289:
Name Operation IBase tTCTimeout tPulseDur

TCLYLTC Group settings (basic)


Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 1 - 120 0.5 - 10.0 Unit A s s Step 1 1 0.1 Default Off 3000 5 1.5 Description Operation Off / On Base current in primary Ampere for the HV-side Tap changer constant time-out Raise/lower command output pulse duration

499 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Table 290:
Name LowVoltTap HighVoltTap mALow mAHigh CodeType

TCLYLTC Non group settings (basic)


Values (Range) 1 - 63 1 - 63 0.000 - 25.000 0.000 - 25.000 BIN BCD Gray SINGLE mA Off On 1 - 60 1.0 - 3.0 0 - 9999999 Off On Unit mA mA Step 1 1 0.001 0.001 Default 1 33 4.000 20.000 BIN Description Tap position for lowest voltage Tap position for highest voltage mA for lowest voltage tap position mA for highest voltage tap position Type of code conversion

UseParity tStable CLFactor InitCLCounter EnabTapCmd

s s -

1 0.1 1 -

Off 2 2.0 250000 On

Enable parity check Time after position change before the value is accepted Adjustable factor for contact life function CL counter start value Enable commands to tap changer

11.5.9

Technical data
Table 291:
Function Transformer reactance Time delay for lower command when fast step down mode is activated Voltage control set voltage Outer voltage deadband Inner voltage deadband Upper limit of busbar voltage Lower limit of busbar voltage Undervoltage block level Time delay (long) for automatic control commands Time delay (short) for automatic control commands Minimum operating time in inverse mode Line resistance Line reactance Load voltage adjustment constants Load voltage auto correction Table continues on next page

TR1ATCC, TR8ATCC, TCMYLTC and TLCYLTC technical data


Range or value (0.1200.0), primary (1.0100.0) s Accuracy -

(85.0120.0)% of UB (0.29.0)% of UB (0.19.0)% of UB (80180)% of UB (70120)% of UB (0120)% of UB (31000) s (11000) s (3120) s (0.00150.00), primary (-150.00150.00), primary (-20.020.0)% of UB (-20.020.0)% of UB

0.25% of Ur 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms -

500 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Function Duration time for the reverse action block signal Current limit for reverse action block Overcurrent block level Level for number of counted raise/lower within one hour Level for number of counted raise/lower within 24 hours Time window for hunting alarm Hunting detection alarm, max operations/window Alarm level of active power in forward and reverse direction Alarm level of reactive power in forward and reverse direction Time delay for alarms from power supervision Tap position for lowest and highest voltage mA for lowest and highest voltage tap position Type of code conversion Time after position change before the value is accepted Tap changer constant timeout Raise/lower command output pulse duration Range or value (306000) s (0100)% of I1Base (0250)% of I1Base (030) operations/hour (0100) operations/day (1120) minutes (330) operations/window (-9999.999999.99) MW Accuracy 0.5% 10 ms 1.0% of Ir at IIr 1.0% of I at I>Ir 1.0% of Sr

(-9999.999999.99) MVAr

1.0% of Sr

(16000) s (163) (0.00025.000) mA BIN, BCD, GRAY, SINGLE, mA (160) s (1120) s (0.510.0) s

0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

11.6

Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGGIO
Function description Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation IEC 61850 identification SLGGIO IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -

501 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control 11.6.1 Introduction

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO) (or the selector switch function block) is used to get a selector switch functionality similar to the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and an extended purchase portfolio. The logic selector switches eliminate all these problems.

11.6.2

Principle of operation
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO) function has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the UP input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in ascending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When a signal is received on the DOWN input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in descending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated). Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, in case of UP or DOWN operation, the previously active output will be deactivated. Also, depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the output activation. Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application Configuration tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the desired position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either locally or remotely, using a select before execute dialog. One can block the function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal function block can be connected. SLGGIO function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actual position number. The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user. These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names instead of a number.

502 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Functionality and behaviour
Control Measurements Events Disturbance records Settings Diagnostics Test Reset Authorization Language Control Single Line Diagram Commands Ctrl/Com Single Command Selector Switch (GGIO)

11.6.2.1

1
../Ctrl/Com/Sel Sw SLGGIO1 SLGGIO2 .. .. SLGGIO15

2
../Com/Sel Sw/ SLGGIO3 Damage ctrl

3 4

../Com/Sel Sw/ SLGGIO3 Damage ctrl

P:Disc All OK

N: Disc Fe Cancel

4 5
../Com/Sel Sw/ DmgCtrl Damage ctrl:

E
Modify the position with arrows. The pos will not be modified (outputs will not be activated) until you press the E-button for O.K.
IEC06000420 V2 EN

The dialog window that appears shows the present position (P:) and the new position (N:), both in clear names, given by the user (max. 13 characters).

IEC06000420-2-en.vsd

Figure 247: Example 1 on handling the switch from the local HMI. From the local HMI:
1 SLGGIO instances in the ACT application configuration 2 Switch name given by the user (max 13 characters) 3 Position number, up to 32 positions 4 Change position 5 New position

11.6.2.2

Graphical display
There are two possibilities for SLGGIO

503 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual position names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters). if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but only the first three letters of the name will be used.

In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the control, the following sequence of commands will ensure:

From the graphical display:


Control Single Line Diagram Commands

Change to the "Switches" page of the SLD by left-right arrows. Select switch by up-down arrows

Control Measurements Events Disturbance records Settings Diagnostics Test Reset Authorization Language

../Control/SLD/Switch SMBRREC control WFM Pilot setup OFF Damage control DAL

O E

../Control/SLD/Switch SMBRREC control WFM Pilot setup OFF P: Disc OK N: Disc Fe Cancel

Select switch. Press the I or O key. A dialog box appears.

The pos will not be modified (outputs will not be activated) until you press the E-button for O.K.

../Control/SLD/Switch SMBRREC control WFM Pilot setup OFF Damage control DFW
IEC06000421-2-en.vsd
IEC06000421 V2 EN

Figure 248: Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI. From the single line diagram on local HMI.

504 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control Function block


SLGGIO BLOCK PSTO UP DOWN ^SWPOS01 ^SWPOS02 ^SWPOS03 ^SWPOS04 ^SWPOS05 ^SWPOS06 ^SWPOS07 ^SWPOS08 ^SWPOS09 ^SWPOS10 ^SWPOS11 ^SWPOS12 ^SWPOS13 ^SWPOS14 ^SWPOS15 ^SWPOS16 ^SWPOS17 ^SWPOS18 ^SWPOS19 ^SWPOS20 ^SWPOS21 ^SWPOS22 ^SWPOS23 ^SWPOS24 ^SWPOS25 ^SWPOS26 ^SWPOS27 ^SWPOS28 ^SWPOS29 ^SWPOS30 ^SWPOS31 ^SWPOS32 SWPOSN IEC05000658-2-en.vsd
IEC05000658 V2 EN

11.6.3

Figure 249:

SLGGIO function block

11.6.4

Input and output signals


Table 292:
Name BLOCK PSTO UP DOWN

SLGGIO Input signals


Type BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 Description Block of function Operator place selection Binary "UP" command Binary "DOWN" command

Table 293:
Name SWPOS01 SWPOS02 SWPOS03 SWPOS04 SWPOS05

SLGGIO Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Selector switch position 1 Selector switch position 2 Selector switch position 3 Selector switch position 4 Selector switch position 5

Table continues on next page

505 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name SWPOS06 SWPOS07 SWPOS08 SWPOS09 SWPOS10 SWPOS11 SWPOS12 SWPOS13 SWPOS14 SWPOS15 SWPOS16 SWPOS17 SWPOS18 SWPOS19 SWPOS20 SWPOS21 SWPOS22 SWPOS23 SWPOS24 SWPOS25 SWPOS26 SWPOS27 SWPOS28 SWPOS29 SWPOS30 SWPOS31 SWPOS32 SWPOSN Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER Description Selector switch position 6 Selector switch position 7 Selector switch position 8 Selector switch position 9 Selector switch position 10 Selector switch position 11 Selector switch position 12 Selector switch position 13 Selector switch position 14 Selector switch position 15 Selector switch position 16 Selector switch position 17 Selector switch position 18 Selector switch position 19 Selector switch position 20 Selector switch position 21 Selector switch position 22 Selector switch position 23 Selector switch position 24 Selector switch position 25 Selector switch position 26 Selector switch position 27 Selector switch position 28 Selector switch position 29 Selector switch position 30 Selector switch position 31 Selector switch position 32 Switch position (integer)

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

11.6.5
Table 294:
Name Operation NrPos OutType

Setting parameters
SLGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 2 - 32 Pulsed Steady Unit Step 1 Default Off 32 Steady Description Operation Off/On Number of positions in the switch Output type, steady or pulse

Table continues on next page

506 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60000.000 Disabled Enabled Unit s s Step 0.001 0.010 Default 0.200 0.000 Disabled Description Operate pulse duration, in [s] Time delay on the output, in [s] Stop when min or max position is reached

Name tPulse tDelay StopAtExtremes

11.7

Selector mini switch VSGGIO


Function description Selector mini switch IEC 61850 identification VSGGIO IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -

11.7.1

Introduction
The Selector mini switch VSGGIO function block is a multipurpose function used for a variety of applications, as a general purpose switch. VSGGIO can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the single line diagram (SLD) on the local HMI.

11.7.2

Principle of operation
Selector mini switch (VSGGIO) function can be used for double purpose, in the same way as switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used: for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1 and POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE. for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed in the configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21. The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen. The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen. It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is associated with a controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be displayed on the screen. A symbol is created and configured in GDE tool in PCM600. The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of operators place, operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote).

507 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

An INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow operation from local HMI. As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit representation, where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the desired result. The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the name of the string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.
IPOS1 0 1 0 1 IPOS2 0 0 1 1 Name of displayed string Default string value PosUndefined Position1 Position2 PosBadState P00 P01 P10 P11

11.7.3

Function block
VSGGIO BLOCK PSTO IPOS1 IPOS2 BLOCKED POSITION POS1 POS2 CMDPOS12 CMDPOS21 IEC06000508-2-en.vsd
IEC06000508 V3 EN

Figure 250:

VSGGIO function block

11.7.4

Input and output signals


Table 295:
Name BLOCK PSTO IPOS1 IPOS2

VSGGIO Input signals


Type BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 Description Block of function Operator place selection Position 1 indicating input Position 2 indicating input

Table 296:
Name BLOCKED POSITION POS1

VSGGIO Output signals


Type BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN Description The function is active but the functionality is blocked Position indication, integer Position 1 indication, logical signal

Table continues on next page

508 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Name POS2 CMDPOS12 CMDPOS21 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Position 2 indication, logical signal Execute command from position 1 to position 2 Execute command from position 2 to position 1

11.7.5
Table 297:
Name Operation CtlModel Mode tSelect tPulse

Setting parameters
VSGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Dir Norm SBO Enh Steady Pulsed 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit s s Step 0.001 0.001 Default Off Dir Norm Pulsed 30.000 0.200 Description Operation Off / On Specifies the type for control model according to IEC 61850 Operation mode Max time between select and execute signals Command pulse lenght

11.8

IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO


Function description IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions IEC 61850 identification DPGGIO IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -

11.8.1

Introduction
The IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (DPGGIO) function block is used to send double indications to other systems or equipment in the substation. It is especially used in the interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.

11.8.2

Principle of operation
Upon receiving the input signals, the IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (DPGGIO) function block will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, other tools must be used, as described in the application manual, to PCM600 must be used to define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.

509 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control 11.8.3 Function block


DPGGIO OPEN CLOSE VALID POSITION

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

IEC07000200-2-en.vsd
IEC07000200 V2 EN

Figure 251:

DPGGIO function block

11.8.4

Input and output signals


Table 298:
Name OPEN CLOSE VALID

DPGGIO Input signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 Description Open indication Close indication Valid indication

Table 299:
Name POSITION

DPGGIO Output signals


Type INTEGER Description Double point indication

11.8.5

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

11.9

Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO


Function description Single point generic control 8 signals IEC 61850 identification SPC8GGIO IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -

11.9.1

Introduction
The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) function block is a collection of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from REMOTE (SCADA) to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need extensive command receiving functionality (for example, SCSWI). In this way, simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by

510 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control

other means, such as binary inputs and SPGGIO function blocks. The commands can be pulsed or steady.

11.9.2

Principle of operation
The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of the eight outputs is activated based on the command sent from the operator place selected. The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if the signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will block the operation of the function in case a command is sent, no output will be activated. PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions. Although, PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator places only, REMOTE operator place is used in SPC8GGIO function.

11.9.3

Function block
SPC8GGIO BLOCK PSTO ^OUT1 ^OUT2 ^OUT3 ^OUT4 ^OUT5 ^OUT6 ^OUT7 ^OUT8 IEC07000143-2-en.vsd
IEC07000143 V2 EN

Figure 252:

SPC8GGIO function block

11.9.4

Input and output signals


Table 300:
Name BLOCK PSTO

SPC8GGIO Input signals


Type BOOLEAN INTEGER Default 0 2 Description Blocks the function operation Operator place selection

Table 301:
Name OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4

SPC8GGIO Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Output 1 Output2 Output3 Output4

Table continues on next page 511 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control
Name OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Output5 Output6 Output7 Output8

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

11.9.5
Table 302:
Name Operation Latched1 tPulse1 Latched2 tPulse2 Latched3 tPulse3 Latched4 tPulse4 Latched5 tPulse5 Latched6 tPulse6 Latched7 tPulse7 Latched8 tPulse8

Setting parameters
SPC8GGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Unit s s s s s s s s Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 Default Off Pulsed 0.10 Pulsed 0.10 Pulsed 0.10 Pulsed 0.10 Pulsed 0.10 Pulsed 0.10 Pulsed 0.10 Pulsed 0.10 Description Operation Off/On Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 1 Output1 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 2 Output2 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 3 Output3 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 4 Output4 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 5 Output5 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 6 Output6 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 7 Output7 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 8 Output8 pulse time

11.10

AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS

512 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Function description AutomationBits, command function for DNP3 IEC 61850 identification AUTOBITS IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -

11.10.1

Introduction
AutomationBits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 to get into the configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC 61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).

11.10.2

Principle of operation
AutomationBits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart. There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the same way the setting Operation: On/Off does. That means that, upon activation of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts like an overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3 master again, momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the operator place. The command can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Local then no change is applied to the outputs.

513 Technical reference manual

Section 11 Control 11.10.3 Function block


AUTOBITS BLOCK PSTO ^CMDBIT1 ^CMDBIT2 ^CMDBIT3 ^CMDBIT4 ^CMDBIT5 ^CMDBIT6 ^CMDBIT7 ^CMDBIT8 ^CMDBIT9 ^CMDBIT10 ^CMDBIT11 ^CMDBIT12 ^CMDBIT13 ^CMDBIT14 ^CMDBIT15 ^CMDBIT16 ^CMDBIT17 ^CMDBIT18 ^CMDBIT19 ^CMDBIT20 ^CMDBIT21 ^CMDBIT22 ^CMDBIT23 ^CMDBIT24 ^CMDBIT25 ^CMDBIT26 ^CMDBIT27 ^CMDBIT28 ^CMDBIT29 ^CMDBIT30 ^CMDBIT31 ^CMDBIT32 IEC09000925-1-en.vsd
IEC09000925 V1 EN

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Figure 253:

AUTOBITS function block

11.10.4

Input and output signals


Table 303:
Name BLOCK PSTO

AUTOBITS Input signals


Type BOOLEAN INTEGER Default 0 0 Description Block of function Operator place selection

Table 304:
Name CMDBIT1 CMDBIT2 CMDBIT3 CMDBIT4 CMDBIT5 CMDBIT6 CMDBIT7 CMDBIT8

AUTOBITS Output signals


Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Command out bit 1 Command out bit 2 Command out bit 3 Command out bit 4 Command out bit 5 Command out bit 6 Command out bit 7 Command out bit 8

Table continues on next page 514 Technical reference manual

1MRK 511 227-UEN C

Section 11 Control
Name CMDBIT9 CMDBIT10 CMDBIT11 CMDBIT12 CMDBIT13 CMDBIT14 CMDBIT15 CMDBIT16 CMDBIT17 CMDBIT18 CMDBIT19 CMDBIT20 CMDBIT21 CMDBIT22 CMDBIT23 CMDBIT24 CMDBIT25 CMDBIT26 CMDBIT27 CMDBIT28 CMDBIT29 CMDBIT30 CMDBIT31 CMDBIT32 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Command out bit